JP2020000659A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can be set to be in an appropriate state after a reset.SOLUTION: A game machine includes game control means and setting operation means. The game control means includes calculation means, storage means capable of storing information related to a game, and reset generation means for generating a rest to the calculation means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A power-on process is executed when power is supplied. In a normal game state, when a reset is generated by the reset generation means, a normal game can be executed after the storage means is initialized, based on execution of the setting process operable by the setting operation means. On the other hand, at a predetermined timing of the power-on process, when a reset is generated by the reset generation means, the normal game can be executed without initializing the storage means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 226

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachislot machine").

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine that sets a setting state such as a winning lottery probability or an execution probability of various effects to any one of a plurality of settings by a setting change operation by a gaming arcade manager is known ( For example, Patent Document 1). Further, in a gaming machine having a setting function, there is described a gaming machine that determines whether or not a lottery probability indicated by a setting switch at power-on and a lottery probability stored in a predetermined area of a RAM match (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP-A-6-91049 JP 2017-56108A

  The gaming machine has a watchdog timer for monitoring program execution and a reset function by user reset. When these reset functions generate a reset, the game control means executes the program from a predetermined address. It is better that the state of the gaming machine that changes with changes in the state of the gaming machine when the reset occurs.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be set to an appropriate state after reset.

  The present invention provides a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a setting operation operated to change a set value relating to control performed by the game control means. A game machine comprising: a game control means for executing a program; a storage means capable of storing information relating to the game; and a reset generated in the calculation means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A reset generating means for performing a power-on process at the time of power-on. In a normal game state, when a reset is generated by the reset generating means, a setting process operable by the setting operating means. On the basis of the execution of the above, while allowing the execution of a normal game after initializing the storage means, at a predetermined timing of the power-on process When a reset is generated by the reset generation unit, a normal game can be executed without initializing the storage unit (for example, paragraphs 1154 to 2282, FIGS. 129 to 232, and the like). See).

  In the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when a reset is generated by the reset generation unit, the storage unit is initialized along with execution of a setting process operable by the setting operation unit, and a predetermined process of the power-on process is performed. When a reset is generated by the reset generation unit at the timing, the storage unit is initialized without executing the setting process, so that the gaming machine can be set to an appropriate state after the reset. For example, as described in paragraphs 2159 to 2161, when a reset is generated by the watchdog timer during the normal game processing, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the game is performed unless a setting change operation for canceling the RAM abnormality is performed. Can not resume. On the other hand, if a reset is generated by the watchdog timer during the power-on process, it is not determined that the RAM is abnormal, and it is possible to return to the state at the time of the power failure without performing the setting change operation. Thus, an appropriate state can be set according to the state of the gaming machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is the front view which cut the front component and the front unit in the game board at the approximate center in the front-rear direction in the game area. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematically. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration in a main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an arithmetic circuit in a main control MPU. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a serial communication circuit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process. 22 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization processing of FIG. 21. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory ratio calculation / display process. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. 24. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and a RAM incorporated in a main control MPU. It is a figure showing the structure of the data stored in the accessory ratio calculation area. It is a figure showing composition of an accessory ratio indicator. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a driver circuit. FIG. 3 is a timing chart of data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a load register selection table. It is a figure showing a character generator decode table. FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematically. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation / display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of winning balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a structure of data stored in a base calculation area. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of display selection processing. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display selection table. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation / display process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation area update process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update process for base calculation. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 1. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 2. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation processing 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 2. 13 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 3. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation processing 3. 13 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation processing 4. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base display process. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematically. It is a figure showing arrangement of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure showing arrangement of a frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure showing the example of connection of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a main control input circuit. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I / O port. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control I / O port. FIG. 99 is a timing chart in the example of the configuration of the main control I / O port shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure showing change of a state (section) concerning calculation of a base value. It is a figure showing an example of a character displayed on a base indicator. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process. 102 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization processing of FIG. 101. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a base calculation area. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base calculation process. 108 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the base calculation process in FIG. 105. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a base display data generation process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a base calculation process. It is a figure showing base calculation at the time of a game state switching. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area in an internal configuration of a main control MPU 1311. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of a timer interruption process and a base calculation process. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of a timer interruption process and a base calculation process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in a ROM and a RAM incorporated in a main control MPU. It is a figure showing an example of a game history recorded on a gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of an error screen. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error signal. It is a figure showing an example of an error. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. It is a figure showing an example of a game history record condition setting table. It is a figure showing an example of a game history. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a peripheral control board and its periphery. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration around a peripheral control SRAM; It is a figure showing a modification of a game history record condition setting table. It is a figure showing a modification of a game history. It is a figure showing a modification of a game history. It is a figure showing a modification of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back with the door opened. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 when viewed from behind with the door closed. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating a setting unit of the pachinko machine illustrated in FIG. 130. It is a figure showing the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine equipped with the game board shown in FIG. 135 as viewed from behind. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process and a setting display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a fluctuation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the production performed in out-of-place variation pattern 20 and 24-29 in the variation pattern table of Drawing 144 (A). FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect performed in out-of-place variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the outlier fluctuation pattern 31 and the hit fluctuation pattern 34 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the outlier fluctuation pattern 32 and the hit fluctuation pattern 35 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). (A) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure showing the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure showing another example of mounting of a main control board. FIG. 152 is a sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ in FIG. 151 (B). It is a figure showing another example of mounting of a main control board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initialization process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. FIG. 4 is a timing chart of a security signal. 11 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a setting confirmation process. It is another example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is an example of a final reserved color table. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161, the table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161, the table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 This is an example. When the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161, the table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 This is an example. It is an example of a notice effect table. It is an example of a line production table. It is another example of a notice effect table. It is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect. (A) is an example of the effect restriction table at the time of the setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of the effect restriction table at the time of occurrence of an error. It is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. 3 is an example of a processing table 1. 7 is an example of a processing table 2. 7 is an example of a processing table 3; 9 is an example of a processing table 4. 9 is an example of a processing table 5. 6 is an example of a processing table 6. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a performance display process of another example 1. It is a figure showing the information mode of other example 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a notification priority of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 1. 9 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a RAM abnormality initialization process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 1. 11 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 1. 11 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of another example 1. 14 is a flowchart of a random number update process 2 of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 1. 13 is a flowchart of switch input processing 1 of another example 1. FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level / edge data area of another example 1. is there. FIG. 199 (A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of another example 1, and FIG. 199 (B) is another configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area of another example 1. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a setting change / confirmation process of another example 1. FIG. 201 (A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of another example 1, and FIG. 201 (B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. 202 (A) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202 (B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1. FIG. 202 (C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on return destination command of another example 1, and FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a set value command of another example 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a transmission order of commands according to another example 1. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a state transition of a setting state management area of another example 1. 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 9 is a time chart from the start to the end of a setting confirmation mode of another example 1. 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. 10 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit determination threshold value table of the other example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit determination threshold value table of the other example 1. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit determination threshold value table of the other example 1. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 2. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 2. 15 is a flowchart of a setting value confirmation process of another example 2. It is a flowchart of RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at the time of power-on of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of RAM abnormality outside a game area of another example 2. 15 is a flowchart of an out-of-use-area RWM initialization process of another example 2. 14 is a flowchart of a power-on setting process of another example 2. FIG. 220A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area according to another example 2, and FIG. 220B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command according to another example 2. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. 15 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 2. 11 is a flowchart of a power-off process of another example 2. 14 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of another example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a setting process of another example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a setting display process of another example 2. 13 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 3. 13 is a flowchart of a power-on process of another example 3. 15 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 3. 14 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a setting change process of another example 3. It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process for normal games of the other example 3. 15 is a flowchart of a main control-side main process of another example 4. 14 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a setting change process of another example 4. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the center role of the front unit of the game board and the display effect unit, which is disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state in which the 1st design was light-emitting-displayed in the presentation effect unit. It is a front view showing the state where the 2nd picture was light-emitting-displayed in the presentation effect unit. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflective part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of the reflective part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a picture projected on a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a picture projected on a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a picture projected on a light guide plate. It is a figure showing the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a picture projected on a light guide plate. It is a figure showing signs that a picture seen by plane by a light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing signs that a picture seen by plane by a light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing signs that a picture stereoscopically viewed by a light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing signs that a picture stereoscopically viewed by a light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing an example of a production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a production display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure showing an example of a production display performed using a light guide plate. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram around a synchronous serial interface of a main control board. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram showing a connection between a serial / parallel conversion circuit and an LED. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement of a main control MPU and peripheral components on a main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an arrangement of ports in a main control MPU. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating timings of outputting and capturing data by a synchronous serial signal. It is a figure showing another arrangement of a main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure showing another arrangement of a main control board in a main control board box. It is a perspective view of the slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine in the state where the front member was opened. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a storage area provided by a ROM, a RAM, and the like according to the embodiment, and details of the ROM area. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating details of a RAM area according to the embodiment. It is a figure showing the structure of the data stored in the accessory ratio calculation area. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating details of a parameter information setting area according to the embodiment. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a periodic process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the information signal N output process.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main frame and the main frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front by disassembling the pachinko machine into a door frame 3, a game board 5, a main body frame 4, and an outer frame 2. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 when viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closably attached to the outer frame 2, a player which is detachably mounted to the main body frame 4 from the front side and which is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape in a front view and having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a game machine mounted on a lower front part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing spheres, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left front part of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the lower right part of the front face of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. Handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A foul cover unit 520 that receives the game ball that has been hit into the game area and is ejected to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball that is mounted on the lower portion of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and has the upper plate 201 A ball feed unit 540 for sending the ball to the ball launching device 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided. ing.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600 partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and are also rotatably mounted on the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge member 150 is rotatably mounted, respectively, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and the body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5; and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 mounted on the right side of the main body frame base in a front view. , And door A locking unit 700 that locks between the main frame 3 and the main frame 4; and an inverted L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980.

  Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is constituted by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be constituted by a liquid crystal display device. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided in the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300.

  Further, the display of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without separately providing a display device for displaying the ratio of the accessory. In this case, if the accessory ratio is always displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the player ratio can be notified to the player, and the player can confirm the condition of the pachinko machine.

  As will be described later, the role ratio can be calculated by calculating the number of gained balls / the total number of balls obtained. For example, in a pachinko machine having a high value of the role ratio (for example, 90%), a large number of prize balls are hit by a jackpot. Since it is obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has a small number of jackpot games and a small number of prize balls during a large jackpot, and thus can be said to be in poor condition. Therefore, the player can select a pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

  As a mode for notifying the player of the accessory ratio, a numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red, the frame lamp is lit or blinked in red, and when the ratio is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green, and the frame lamp is lit or flashed in green. I do. The numeric value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a manner not to be mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the display position of the decorative symbol when it is not fluctuating, or may be displayed in such a manner that the number indicating the accessory ratio is smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

  In addition, the mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be changed according to the numerical value of the accessory ratio to notify the player of the accessory ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, a decorative pattern is displayed in red, a frame lamp is lit or blinked in red, and when 69% to 30%, a decorative pattern is displayed in green and a frame lamp is lit green. Or flashing. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

  Alternatively, the information may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At this time, the above-described display mode may be changed, and may be displayed together with other information in addition to the accessory ratio. The other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of successive jackpots (so-called number of consecutive chans), the number of balls held, the remaining balance, and the like.

  In addition, the present invention is not limited to the accessory ratio, and a continuous accessory ratio, a base value, and the like, which will be described later, may be displayed by changing the mode as described above. The display ratio of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value may be changed respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and is disposed on a printed circuit board. The parts can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is formed of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control unit 1300 is displayed on the pachinko machine. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to make the pachinko machine 1 have a low gambling property, and to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being accurately modified. Can display gambling.

  When the back cover 980 is formed of an opaque resin, a hole is made in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, or the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is made transparent, so that the pachinko machine can be used. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be seen from the back side of the machine 1.

  Further, even when the back cover 980 is formed of a transparent resin, by forming the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 flat or by forming the back cover 980 thin, The ratio indicator 1317 may be easily seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the lower part of the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided an outlet for collecting game balls flowing out of the game area 5a via the out port 1111 and the winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006 and the like, and discharging the game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. In addition, the game ball discharged from the discharge port is supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharged ball sensor 3060 for detecting a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It may be displayed on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 (switching, printing, engraving, sticker, etc.) to indicate that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio. Note that the display switch 1318 is desirably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317. However, the display switch 1318 is not limited to the main control unit 1300 but may be provided on another board (for example, the effect control board 4700) as long as the operation is easy. , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. It may be provided on a relay board provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1500 or the main control unit 1300, a power supply board in the power supply board box 930 on the frame side, or a payout control board unit 950. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating by mistake.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is provided with an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper portion of the payout unit base 801 and extends left and right which is open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and facing left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are removably attached to the payout unit base 801 under the A payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950, and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to pay out. The upper full tank path unit 850 that guides the game balls downward and discharges the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. And a normal taxiway that is attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and guides the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank guide path for guiding the game balls released from the full tank discharge port forward and guiding the game balls to the full tank receiving port 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end. A lower Kalimantan ball path unit 860, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a bass speaker mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side in a front view of the substrate unit base 910. Speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the right side of the back of the board unit base 910 and which houses a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a payout control board unit 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to the front, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 A box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 and controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. The main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning holes mounted in the game area 5a in front of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the upper of the substrate holder 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launching device 680 plays the game with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 16 is a front view of the front panel and the front unit of the game board, which are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is formed. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front panel attached to the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is mounted on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side and on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept game balls hit into the gaming region 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the gaming region 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the lottery, and the first special portrayed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first winning prize port 2005 and a second winning prize port 2006 are provided, in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with either a lottery result or a second special lottery result. The second special winning opening 2006 is composed of two special winning openings, a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b arranged in one flow path through which the game ball circulates (FIG. 16).

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. A frame shape attached to the upper side unit 2300 and substantially at the center in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. A center role 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to a rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape having a front opening and a square back opening 3010a in a rear wall. The back unit 3000 is disposed at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the main liquid crystal display device 1600. A mechanism 3020 and a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end of the back box 3010 when viewed from the front, for discharging a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center role 2500, Attached near the front end of the lower right corner in front view inside the back box 3010, the second big winning opening 2006 and the second Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  The back unit 3000 also includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and a rotatable attachment to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, effect drive board 3043 accommodated in effect drive board box 3042, panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010, and panel relay board 3044 And a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the panel.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end inside the back box 3010 at an upper side from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left and right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and abuts a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by the spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened to the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  On the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a shooting ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball hit into the game area 5a is provided. For example, the shooting sphere sensor 1020 is configured by a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when detecting a game sphere flowing into the game area 5a through the backflow prevention member 1007. Note that the shooting sphere sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where a game ball always passes in the game area. By fixing the position of the launching ball sensor 1020 in the game board 5, specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and inspection at a manufacturing site or inspection after installation in a hall becomes easy.

  The shooting sphere sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a, such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002, detects an out ball before the winning opening sensor detects a winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out ball and the prize ball, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting the prize ball caused by the game ball not counted as the out ball.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out opening 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel board 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

  When the game panel 1100 is mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 can be covered from below. Thereby, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 14) can be discharged downward.

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and FIG. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against improper acts on the main control board 1310 is increased.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 has a state indicator made up of one LED for displaying a game state, and two LEDs based on a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. , A normal symbol display for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting mode in accordance with the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by flashing control, and a fluctuation display of the normal symbol relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. Among them, a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs for indicating the number of holdings, which is the number of changing displays for which the start condition of the changing display has not yet been satisfied, and reception of game balls to the first starting port 2002 (starting prize After the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed by controlling the blinking of the eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery selected by (occurrence). And the first special symbol display for displaying the LED in the lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery, and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. A first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the reserve number, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 (the occurrence of a start prize). The second special symbol is displayed by varying the second special symbol by blinking and controlling the eight LEDs based on the selected second special lottery result, and then displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result. A second display for displaying a symbol display and the number of suspended displays, which are the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been satisfied among the variable displays of the second special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004; Two L D and the number of repetitions of the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. And a round indicator comprising two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds). Note that a part of the display (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured by a 7-segment LED.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side in front view, and right fixing pieces protruding outward from the right side in front view. 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c, which are open on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view, inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind the box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. By sliding to, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and FIGS. 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end protrudes forward from the front of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize openings 2001 which are capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game region 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize openings 2001 are in the game region 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  Of the plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001, three are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged near the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right in front view and substantially immediately below the stop section 1006. The second starting port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 as viewed from the front. Among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 arranged near the upper right in front view in the game area 5a is arranged immediately above the second starting opening 2004. The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second special winning opening 2006 is disposed above the first special winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first starting opening 2002 in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second large winning opening 2006 in the front unit 2000 includes a second upper winning opening 2006a and a second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game ball circulates. It consists of. In the second special winning opening 2006, the second upper special winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower special winning opening 2006b is viewed in front of the second upper special winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005. The lower side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the mouth unit 2100 in front view and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. A frame shape attached to the upper side unit 2300 and substantially at the center in the game area 5a and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006. A center role 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end in the left-right direction, immediately above the out port 1111 and attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning port 2005.

  The starting port unit 2100 has a rectangular unit base 2101 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and having a rectangular shape extending left and right and having a first special winning opening 2005 penetrating back and forth. A ball receiving portion 2102 protruding forward from an upper portion in the left-right direction substantially above the large winning opening 2005 and forming a first starting opening 2002, and a first starting opening attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guiding unit 2103 for guiding a game ball received in 2002 downward, a first starting port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002; A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the starter unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big winning opening 2005 from the rear, and has a front end which is substantially the same size as the first big winning opening 2005 and is opened forward. Box-shaped unit case 2111, and a first oblong opening door having a horizontally long rectangular shape and a flat plate shape whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the first winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for driving the first winning port door member 2112 to open and close, and a first winning port 2005 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received in the first winning port 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 which detects the game ball which has been dropped, and the first A starting port unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection between the moving port sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first winning port sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310; A starting port unit decorative board (not shown) for illuminating the winning port 2005.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 has a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and is open upward. The first special winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 has a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time and is opened forward.

  In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 is opened upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding portion 2103. After being guided downward at the rear side of 2101 and made to be detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, it can be discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first starting port sensors 2104 are provided. In the main control board 1310, when the two first starting port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting port sensor 2104 is provided. In 2002, it is determined that a game ball has been accepted. This makes it possible to detect an improper act caused by improper insertion of a tool into the first start port 2002.

  In the starting port unit 2100, the first attacker unit 2110 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, so that the first winning port door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened in the unit base 2101. It is inserted from the back into the mouth 2005 to close the first winning opening 2005. The first special winning opening door member 2112 is attached to the left and right both ends of the lower side by the unit case 2111 so as to be rotatable in an upright state in which the first special winning opening 2005 is closed. By rotating so as to move downward, the first special winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

  The first special winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is upright in a normal state (when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized), and closes the first special winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first big winning opening door member 2112 is rotated so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly above the lower side. It will be located. In other words, the first winning opening door member 2112 is inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first winning opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first special winning opening 2005 and abuts on the first special winning opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first special winning opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, and is received in the first big winning opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game balls received in the first special winning opening 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices during a game based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 or an upper liquid crystal based on a command from the peripheral control unit 1511. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of the effect image on the display device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of game balls and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls launching of game balls by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM 1313 for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data, and the like, and an input / output device (I A main control I / O port 1314 serving as an I / O device), a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control And a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the MPU 1311. The main control MPU 1311 has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 2104 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting port 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, and detecting a gaming ball received in the first winning opening 2005 A first big winning opening sensor 2114, a second big winning opening 2006a serving as a second big winning opening 2006, and a second upper winning opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second lower winning opening 2006b. The second lower winning opening sensor 2557, ejected ball sensor 3060, fired ball sensor 1020, and illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are detected. Magnetic detection sensor, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O port 1314.

  The main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, the second upper attacker A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, Also, detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. Further, when an advantageous game state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first winning opening 2005 and the second winning opening 2006 are opened (or enlarged), and the game balls are frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second special winning opening sensor 2557 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper special winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower special winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not frequently occur. Therefore, as the general winning opening sensor 3015, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to control of the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. The information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. When receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from a power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various kinds of information in the RAM 1312 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314 and also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

  In addition, a display switch 1318 is provided on the main control board 1310. The display switch 1318 may be a push-button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. By operating the display switch 1318, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Note that the accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio and switch the display content by operating the display switch 1318.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration inside the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a matching block 13119, Information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122 are provided.

  The CPU 13111 executes a program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing a program.

  The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides random numbers for determining the result of the variable display game (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) and the effect contents of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation unit that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for a special symbol, a lottery for a symbol for a special symbol variation display game, and a lottery for a normal symbol.

  The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. In addition, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to the payout of the game balls to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio indicator 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupt and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMI that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it jumps to an address set in the vector table by referring to a vector table defined for each type of interrupt.

  The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I / O requests (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit addresses (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input and output.

  The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). In addition, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the clock signal to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

  The matching block 13119 is a functional block for checking whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

  The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function not depending on a program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written when the chip is manufactured.

  The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated travel prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses a non-predetermined address in the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit estimates that the access is made by an unauthorized program, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

  FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

  The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program for an arithmetic result, and includes a multiplying circuit 131211 and a dividing circuit 131215.

  The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

  The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores the multiplier and the multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads out the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 obtains a multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The processing from writing the values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock). , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

  The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that performs quotient and remainder conversion of input values (divisor, dividend) by a function and outputs the result.

  The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A 131216, and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B 131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 reads out the stored value at a predetermined timing, and divides the dividend by the divisor. The result is stored in the division result register A 131218, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B 131219. When the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 may erase the read values and clear the registers. The division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start command is input, and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 need not be erased at the read timing. In addition, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may have already stored values (without clearing the stored values) or may be able to overwrite the values.

  The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The processing from writing the values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). After the values are stored in the registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be obtained by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described later, a division process is required to calculate a base value, and the division in which the CPU 13111 executes a program is performed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, so that a considerable time is required. Such is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display a base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be reduced, and the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). . In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the time when the value is written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the time when the operation result is read from the division result register A131218, other processes can be executed. The base calculation process during the timer interrupt process can be executed efficiently.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. In FIG. 20, only the data transmission circuit is shown, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) is omitted.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 includes, as described above, the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

  Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is configured by a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

  The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

  The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming a transmission state.

  Communication setting register 3146 stores a command for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data at which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 in FIG.

  Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of the FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and the parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, the FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, 1 ×× 1010B meaning even parity In the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ×× 1000B meaning that parity is not used are set.

  In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Further, since the gaming machine is in an environment with a lot of noise, it is desirable to set a parity when transmitting data at high speed outside the main control board 1310.

  Since the accessory ratio display 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the influence of noise is less than that of communication with another board via a communication wire. Also, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and the need to use parity is scarce. In addition, along a pattern for transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left and right and / or thickness direction of a signal line provided on the surface or an inner layer of a printed circuit board) A ground pattern is provided on a layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern, and the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

  The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a free space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

  The bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the corresponding bit of the status register is not set, there is no empty space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. It may be determined that data has not been transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be performed.

  Baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. 1200 bps is set for channel 2 used for communication with.

  Thus, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted in each channel. This is because the gaming balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment susceptible to noise. Therefore, the data for controlling the pitching directly related to the profit given to the player is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so as to be surely transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and is not related to the pitch. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and when it is determined that the received command is abnormal, does not operate the peripheral control board 1510 or executes abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification), and executes the command. Request retransmission of When it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. Therefore, communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting opening to the start of the change of the symbol, which may lower interest.

  The communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510 of 19200 bps) or a low rate (a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951 of 1200 bps). Good. The communication between the accessory ratio display 1317 and the driver circuit 13171 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). May be adopted. If the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that another circuit may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if the transmitted data is abnormal due to noise, the same data is retransmitted every timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display content of the accessory ratio display 1317 is displayed. Is returned to normal, so that it is not necessary to make the transmission rate extremely low.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming a transmission state. For example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: SnTC This is a flag indicating transmission completion. 0 indicates that transmission is in progress, and 1 indicates transmission completion. Bit 6: SnTDBE In a normal mode (communication mode not using a FIFO), this is a flag indicating transmission data empty, and 0 indicates that data has not been transferred to the transmission shift register and 1 indicates that data has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, it is set.

In the SnTFT FIFO mode, a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level, where 0 indicates that the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level, and 1 indicates that the transmission data is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 and 2: Not used (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This is a bit for clearing the transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level to (SnTFL), and is written from outside. For example, when the contents of the buffer are forcibly cleared, 1 is set to the bit. More specifically, the command is written in the FIFO, but is used when transmission of the written command is stopped for some reason (for example, occurrence of an abnormality). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

  With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 can perform start-stop synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. In each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114, at least one channel may be capable of performing synchronous communication by setting, or a start-stop synchronization serial communication circuit and a synchronous communication serial communication circuit may be provided separately.

  Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data fetch timing used at the time of synchronous communication.

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. A payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 551. A launch control unit 953 for performing feed control, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail 803, a ball guiding unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[3-2a. Dispensing control section]
A payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch input from the dispensing control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. You.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal plate 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 among the signals output from the external terminal board 784 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 Is notified that the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball watching” (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830, indicating that the payout blade is difficult to rotate. Error, a “counter switch error” (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error”. (Specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, And that the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and when the number "7" is displayed, "CR not connected" (That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “stocking” ( Ingredient Manner to have informed yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  A ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and a return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. Also, the CR unit updates the residual value of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of borrowed game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the residual value on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. Entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control section]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 is a firing control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. Circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and a firing reference pulse And a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the gaming area 5a, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit, A ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  Regarding the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. After the detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit, it is input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing reference pulse is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, based on a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504. As a result, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball-feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are thrown by the ball. One ball is received in the feeding unit 540, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to send the received game ball to the ball firing device 680 side. As described above, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the dispensing control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the dispensing control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, a peripheral control board 1510 performs a production control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 for performing effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. A game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game board 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the effect drive board 3043, Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibrating device 242 and a door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the frame 3, and various components of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation light-up signal to a color LED or the like provided on the board; The control data (display command) indicating a screen transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit. In addition to transmitting the control signal to the sound source 1512, the control unit 1510 outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 mounted on the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 Monitors operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and music according to various effects from speakers 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In this embodiment, a plurality of speakers on the side of the door frame 3 and a low-range speaker 921 of the main body frame 4 are provided with sound signals as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running away by using WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, and a plurality of commands different from the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  This effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or receives the game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decoration board provided in the game board 5.

  The effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided on the door frame 3, the respective drive motors provided on the game board 5, and the like. Or output to

[3-3b. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in a very short time. be able to. This allows the peripheral control MPU to enter a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, a command related to control of a game effect and a pachinko machine output from the main control board 1310 are output. This is a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the device 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RTC control unit, and stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit. And set in the time information storage unit as current time information.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V blank signal to be described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU is input. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, first, the value 1 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220, and the like. Based on the various information obtained, the presence / absence of the operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the state of the operation of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP in the display data creation process described later is used by the built-in sound source VDP by the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In the sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation processing to be described later to the speaker 921, and notifies the sound and sound effects in addition to the music and sound effects. For example, sound data of a sound or a notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in a time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, in order to indicate the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP, Update the pointer.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in a time series that constitute the emission mode generation schedule data, the order of the emission data of the various LEDs from the top emission data is specified in order to specify the emission mode of each LED. , Update the pointer.

  In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects and the sound command data for indicating the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in chronological order constituting the sound generation schedule data. The pointer is updated in order to indicate the number of sound command data from the command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the order of the drive data from the first drive data is set as the output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the production control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis processing, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board-side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command The receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analyzing means).

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the effect control program includes various commands classified into a predetermined notification display in the command analyzed in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 as described above, various abnormality notifications are issued. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormal display mode for execution are stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands classified into status display, for example, In the case of the error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling to a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side A warning is visually given to the outside using the decorative substrate 233 (producing device) and a lamp (producing device), or an audible warning is externally provided using a speaker (error notifying means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 in spite of the playing state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, fraud on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game is suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information and time information storage units that are acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In the lamp data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer is designated by the pointer in the time-series light-emitting data that constitutes the light-emitting mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data to be transmitted, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is controlled peripherally. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or the peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, and is set in the peripheral control RAM, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 The door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is stored in a peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 or in the peripheral control ROM 1511. Was created by extracting from your RAM, it is set to peripheral control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and displays the screen data indicated by the pointer among the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board decorative board 3053. In addition, one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the externally attached peripheral control RAM to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs up the contents. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM externally attached to the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up in a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively.

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady processing starts when the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and then sets 1 ms in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. To complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to about 30 fps for a second, so that the V blank signal Is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

  Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted as shown in FIG. 61 is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The following describes the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed in response to the above. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not performed.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 60 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to about 30 fps for a second, so that the V blank signal Is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and then the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, and the second,..., And 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33-time 1-ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1-ms timer interrupt process has been started, this routine is immediately terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is assigned to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding a value of 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, a motor and solenoid driving process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the pointer data is used to store the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. In accordance with the drive data instructed, while driving an electric drive source such as various motors and solenoids, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, Update the pointer.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.) and set them in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in effect operation unit 220 have been input, so that history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 220C is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. The operation presence / absence of the operation button 220C can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect display receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal output to convey that effect.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up to a backup first area and a backup second area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup first area. The data is copied and backed up in one area and a backup second area.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the effect of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 60, the various processes related to the effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are performed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since the routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. Also in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[3-4. LCD display control unit]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not illustrated in detail, but is not illustrated as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (Video Display Processor) for controlling display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM for storing various data of screens displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM And

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) corresponding thereto. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Have been. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data includes screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is defined.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs the extracted data to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and outputs the sprite data to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. The drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 do not receive screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. I do. The VDP employs a line buffer system. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer stores the data. In this method, the held drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and This affects the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Note that sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like that constitute a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. These sprites are set in a position arranged on the screen and in a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite overlapping order”), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character. In the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in a horizontal 2 × vertical 3 or the like are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. And a sub-scan which repeats a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction. The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 receive one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and perform main scanning. When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output of one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub scanning, and similarly, drawing data of the next line is input. Then, one line is sequentially read from left to right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 10, FIG. 16 and FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the rotation amount of the handle lever 504, and the stronger the clockwise rotation, the stronger the ball can be hit, and a maximum of 100 continuous game balls per minute. That is, game balls can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  Also, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a game ball is formed on the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper portion of the center role 2500 enters the front peripheral left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 to the left in front view, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) , And flows down the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, the game ball passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500.

  The game ball supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 at the left and right thereof. Is emitted backward from any of the. When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 because the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002. The ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When game balls are received in the first opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first big winning port 2005 in the open state, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200 There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, a game ball hit on the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 (struck). ), And enters the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the upper right circulation space 2541, and a game ball contacts the obstacle nail and circulates while changing its flowing direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at an upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 are provided at a lower part.

  The game ball flowing down the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The gaming ball that has entered the lower right circulation space 2543 is a second upper winning opening that closes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side as a second winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower winning opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and enters the gaming area 5a from the left end of the lower left emission plate portion 2559 in front view. Released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game balls flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while the increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, the game ball may enter the discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged out of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned inside.

  When a game ball hitting right and entering the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, the ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 , One ordinary random number is acquired, and the acquired ordinary random number is compared with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table to perform an ordinary lottery. If the result of the normal lottery becomes “normal hit” when the time-saving control described later is not executed, the second start-up door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction in front view, and the second start-up port 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, the lottery is performed to determine which of the “normal hit”, the “second normal hit”, the “second normal hit”, and the “third normal hit” in the normal lottery. Then, if the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” when the time saving control is executed, the second start-up door member 2549 is activated. After turning in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004 in a front view, a state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period is set, and then a front view is performed. A predetermined number of times of opening / closing control (5 in this example) in which the second starting port 2004 is closed by rotating in the counterclockwise direction to make it impossible to receive game balls in the second starting port 2004. Times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, “0.3 seconds” is set as each of the five times in which the second starting port 2004 is in a state in which game balls can be accepted. , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, and “0.28 seconds” as five periods in which the second starting port 2004 is ready to accept game balls. , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is set to a state in which game balls can be received. The periods are "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "second normal hit" and "third normal". Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passing of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, the ordinary symbol is displayed after the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set before the stop display (until the normal lottery result is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 turns to be in an open state after the elapse of the normal fluctuation time. During execution of time-saving control described later, control for reducing the normal fluctuation time is executed as compared with normal (a state in which time-saving control is not executed). In addition, the opening time in which the second starting port door member 2549 is rotated to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed in accordance with the gaming state. For example, time reduction control is performed. When there is no time saving control, the opening time of the second start port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

  In addition, during the period from when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal symbol fluctuated and displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball is input to the gate unit. After passing through 2003, the normal symbol display cannot start a new variable display of the normal symbol. Therefore, the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is continued until the previous variable display of the normal symbol is completed (the normal lottery result is displayed). (Until the suggestion ends). Specifically, the ordinary random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the state in which the ordinary symbol variation display can be started is obtained. Until the start of the change display of the normal symbol is held. Note that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 updates the game ball in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By obtaining one first special random number from one special random number and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit" , "Small hit", etc.), a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed. Then, based on the lottery result of the first special lottery, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result is obtained. (Indicating the first special symbol after the variable display and then displaying the stop symbol according to the first special lottery result) to indicate to the player the first special lottery result. In addition, the first special lottery result which is drawn when the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 includes “out”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “8R big hit”, and “10R big hit”. Yes, the acquired first special random number is compared with the jackpot determination table to determine which of these is the case. Further, after the jackpot game, a normal (low probability state: with a probability of about 1/395 in this example) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probable change state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) rather than the jackpot. Whether or not to execute the time-saving jackpot, and whether or not to execute the time-saving control (time-saving state) for shortening the fluctuation time more than usual when at least the first special lottery result is unsuccessful (time-saving big hit). Or time reduction control Period to execute: a (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. Note that the winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

  When the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 is selected. Is obtained, and the acquired second special random number is compared with a predetermined jackpot determination table to obtain an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The lottery of the result of the second special lottery which generates the item (1) is performed. Then, based on the selected second special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined variation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. Is displayed in a lighting manner according to (the second special symbol is variably displayed, and then a stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result is displayed) to indicate the second special lottery result to the player. In addition, the second special lottery result, which is drawn when a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, includes “out”, “2R big hit”, “4R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “6R big hit”, There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and the acquired second special random number is compared with the jackpot determination table to determine which of them is the normal random number. Low-probability state: Probability improvement control (high-probability state (also referred to as probable state), which increases the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) rather than winning a jackpot with a probability of approximately 1/395 in this example) In this case, whether or not to win the jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) is executed (whether or not the jackpot is a probability variable jackpot). (Time saving ) To be executed (whether or not a time saving big hit) and a period for executing the time saving control (the number of time savings: a special symbol (the number of times the first special hit symbol and the second special symbol change)) are also determined. It has become.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After a lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display (the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and thereafter, the first special winning opening Either 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 can receive game balls in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 while the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 operate. A predetermined number of payout devices 830 (for example, 11 when a game ball is received in the first big winning opening 2005, or 15 when a game ball is received in the second big winning opening 2006). The game ball is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are capable of accepting game balls, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 accept game balls, so that many games can be received. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the first big winning opening 2005 plays the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after being in the acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, or “16R jackpot”, the first big winning opening A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 becomes an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006, the condition is satisfied. A predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) of repeating the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which the game ball cannot be received in a closed state is repeated. For example, 4 rounds for “4R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 16 rounds for “16R jackpot” are repeated, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first big winning opening 2005 has a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds)). In the meantime, in the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is opened after the game ball can be received and then closed, it is difficult to substantially allow the game ball to enter the first special winning opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, “16R jackpot” (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. When such a condition is satisfied, in the opening / closing pattern in which the game ball cannot be received in the closed state), it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. If the special lottery result is “4R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “6R jackpot”, “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “10R jackpot”, “16R jackpot”, the above-mentioned first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 becomes an open state in which game balls can be received, or the first special winning opening 2005 is determined in advance. Either a certain number (for example, seven) of game balls are accepted or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls are accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern for making the game balls unacceptable to be closed may be set as a substantial special lottery result, and a predetermined number (for example, , 7) When one of the conditions of accepting a game ball or accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the second special winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the game ball cannot be closed. The opening / closing pattern to be set and the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first special winning opening 2005 is set to a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) During this period), a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern of opening and closing the game ball after the game ball can be received may be provided. For example, a special lottery result “8R big hit with 4Rs” is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening is set. If a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be accepted to 2006 or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the open / close pattern of closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times. The opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) An opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is opened after the game ball can be received and then closed) may be repeated four times.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is composed of a second upper special winning opening 2006a and a second lower special winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second special winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of the "big hit", for example, in the first round (1R), the second upper winning prize opening 2006a is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, and the ball is closed by satisfying the condition that the game ball cannot be accepted, and then the game ball can be accepted next. Until (interval), the second round (2R) in which the second lower winning opening 2006b is opened and game balls can be accepted is started, and when the second lower winning opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, In the meantime, since the interval period has elapsed, the second upper winning opening 2006a is opened again so that game balls can be received. Then, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are consumed. Accordingly, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the "big hit", either the second upper special winning opening 2006a or the second lower special winning opening 2006b is in a state in which a game ball can be received. When a game ball is distributed in the second attacker passage 2543a by right-handing, the game ball is always accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, so that the player can entertain the player without losing the game ball. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, for some of the above-described types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned time-saving control after the end of the jackpot game is made different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal big hit in the time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. When the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in a time saving state (a state where the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both the probability improvement control and the time reduction control are not executed: also referred to as a normal state), the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. If it is a 2R probability change big hit, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in a state other than the normal state. If it is a big hit, the time reduction control is executed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display executed by the first special symbol display when the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 are displayed. The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol which is fluctuated and displayed on the first special symbol display by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is stopped (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first special symbol is indicated. Until the second special symbol which is fluctuated and displayed on the second special symbol display by stopping the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start is performed. When a new game ball is received in the mouth 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts a new variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible to change the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the change display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) ends (first special lottery Until the results and suggestions for the second special lottery result are completed. ) Is set to be pending. Specifically, the first special opening random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 2002 by the first starting opening sensor 2104, and the second starting opening sensor 2551 And the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted by the second starting port 2004 by the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol). The change display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of symbols can be started. The maximum number of the first special random number and the second special random number that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is up to four, respectively. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations. The first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing at which game balls are accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the change display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special random number is stored. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed prior to the symbol.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is made by repeatedly turning on and off the eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and suggests a special lottery result by a combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of the stop.

  On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled based on a control signal (a fluctuation pattern command, a determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, each of a series of decorative symbol rows including a plurality of different symbols is displayed in a plurality of columns (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The decorative display of the decorative pattern row is started, and then the display is stopped sequentially (in this example, the decorative display is stopped in the order of the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern), and finally all the decorative pattern rows are stopped. When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) acquired at the time of the start winning prize occurrence. After being displayed, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to indicate the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is displayed. In addition, the decorative design displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special design variably displayed on the first special design display and the second special design variably displayed on the second special design display. In general, the player will pay attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 because it is large and easy to see.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates and the final image is changed) (The time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center role object 2500, the back left The interior decoration unit 3050, the rear lower back movable rendering unit 3100, the back upper left movable rendering unit 3200, the back left movable rendering unit 3300, the back upper middle movable rendering unit 3400, and the back lower front movable rendering unit 3500 are appropriately used. It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. More specifically, a system / user reset process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) by a timer started in the system / user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization processing of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program to perform an initialization process. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 starts a built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written into the watchdog timer control register, and "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not increase immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the predetermined voltage is reached, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage during the period from when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit , A power failure notice signal is input. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process waits for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating the watchdog timer.

  If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18) because the time required for starting the sub-board (the peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has elapsed. . When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area ratio calculation work area (work area ratio calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30). ), And proceed to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut down through normal processing, such as when a power failure occurs (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (except for the area ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted. S30), and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power-off is used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The portion other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not deleted. Proceed to.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the work area for calculating an accessory ratio (the area 13128 for calculating an accessory ratio) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the work area ratio calculation work area is deleted because the data in the work area ratio calculation work area may be incorrect (step S26).

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code. , N, and N, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

  Regarding the accessory ratio calculation area, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted at predetermined time intervals, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined amount of operation (for example, for each predetermined number of launch balls, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, for each of the predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is different for each data type (the game control data 13132 and the character ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase on condition. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up game control data 13132 is deleted, but the backed-up property ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted. When the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backup of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, thereby preventing the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the game room attendant. In addition, it is possible to prevent concealment of an abnormal state of the accessory ratio. For this reason, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled into a state where the accessory ratio is high or low.

  When the power recovery of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) (step S28). In the initialization of the main control MPU 1311, first, the initialization of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is performed, and the interruption is permitted. Further, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 starts, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initialized.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

  The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol / electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the gaming state at the time of return after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the special symbol change display.

  After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal (step S36), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), that is, a random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for performing the winning determination mainly in the special lottery or the normal lottery is updated. The random number updating process for making a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are set as main control side main processes (normal means after initial setting).

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power failure processing (power failure setting means). In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, and writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption until the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off is completed, and to complete the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (Step S46). Further, the calculation result of the checksum is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

  Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the work ratio calculation area (the area 13128 for calculating the ratio) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. Note that the check code may be calculated and stored each time data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display processing, instead of the main board power-off processing.

  Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

  Subsequently, the data of the main area of the work for calculating the ratio of the bonuses (the region 13128 for calculating the ratio of the bonuses) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be appropriately performed (for example, every time data is updated) in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, instead of the main-board-side power-off process.

  In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code in the backup area, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is turned off. In addition, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in long-term operation.

  Further, a value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Lastly, writing "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register prohibits writing to the RAM 1312 (step S58), and waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first sets RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1, which are switched and used each time a timer interrupt process is executed.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. More specifically, detection signals from various sensors for detecting game balls entering a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from a magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting an improper act using a magnet, prize ball control processing The payer ACK signal and the like from the payout control board 951 that indicate that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the above are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. In the switch input process, detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out-balls is counted.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (Step S76). In the timer updating process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the later-described special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process In addition to the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the symbol variation display pattern, a payer ACK signal that indicates that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a random number update process 1 (Step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for initial value determination for the jackpot symbol and the small hit, which are updated in the non-hit number random number update processing in step S40 in the system / user reset processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The random number for symbol initial value determination is also updated.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a prize ball control process (Step S80). In the prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written into the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of award balls, a self-check for creating award ball commands for paying out game balls or checking a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. Or create a command. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created award ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and calculates the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). If there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, the processing in step S81 can be skipped, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a frame command receiving process (Step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control board 951 and stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 shapes a command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, and the like), and transmits the above-described transmission information as transmission information. The information is stored in the information storage area. In the prize ball discharge processing, the number of prize ball discharges is recorded in a storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the game state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

  The accessory ratio calculation area updating process (step S81) may be executed in any order after the winning ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89). .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and a game ball is detected to have entered the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 by the count switch when the jackpot is not in the gaming state, the main control program is executed. Creates a prize abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the random number for big hit matches a hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the big hit symbol random number value. Then, when the certainty change condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted to the probability change state, and when the certainty change condition is not satisfied, the game state is changed to a game state other than the certainty change state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low-probability state).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal has been input to the input terminal, a normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the random number matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Usually called lottery). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed according to this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state, so that the starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be received, and a game advantageous to the player is provided. Transition to the state.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 has been operated. If the display switch 1318 has been operated, the main control MPU 1311 calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25), and executes the accessory ratio. The accessory ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to confirm the accessory ratio (the gambling of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data.

  Regardless of whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, if the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio may be displayed. . When the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Is also good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, when the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open, and the progress of the game is stopped. As described above, when the accessory ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the accessory ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

  Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display process will be described later with reference to FIGS. Further, a specific example of the display method of the accessory ratio will be described later. Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, total, total total) may be calculated, but the values are displayed each time the display switch 1318 is operated. May be calculated. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated.

  Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects a fraud and stops the game, it executes the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89). Regardless of whether or not fraud has been detected, by executing these processings, it is possible to check the role-item ratio even during fraud notification.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (Step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or the big hit game When in the state, a drive signal is output to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to a starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display information output Various signals related to games, such as signals, information output information during working hours, Broadcast and outputs a (game information) signal and security signals to the payout control board 951.

  In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out-balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (eg, 10 balls).

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a symbol indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (Step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, transmission information such as a command and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the timer interrupt process. The calculation process of the physical ratio may be executed. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may transmit the command to the peripheral control unit 1511. A command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Calculating and Displaying the Ratio of Characters]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display processing. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed so that the notice effect is more interesting than the normal notice effect.

  First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140). It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). More specifically, the ratio of the bonuses is calculated by the number of the acquired balls / the total number of the acquired balls, and the ratio of the continuous bonuses is calculated by the number of the consecutively acquired balls / the total number of the acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  In step S156, the updated value may be copied to the backup area every time the accessory ratio and / or the continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

  When the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the accessory ratio, the lower-order bits of the acquired number of balls are omitted and division is performed. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,969,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit operation, the operation is performed by extracting the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit of which the value is 1 out of the acquired number of balls stored in 32 bits. It is preferable to store the data in a register (16 bits) for division. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum value of the number of bits usable for calculation (32767 which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for calculation.

  In addition, when the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the decimal point) and used as the dividend (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, calculation with decimals can be avoided.

  In addition, the upper limit of the accessory ratio may be set to 99, and 99 may be set when the calculation result of the accessory ratio becomes 100 or more.

  On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Is determined (step S146). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148). ), An accessory ratio calculation process is executed to calculate an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio from the data of the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  On the other hand, if the calculated check code does not match the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the calculation of the accessory ratio from the data in the backup area 2 is performed. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Is determined (step S152). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), An accessory ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read out, and an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

  If the data of the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (the area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

  Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The reason why the check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process is that the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated when the power is reset in the middle of the main-board-side power-off process. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is calculated and stored periodically during the process of calculating and displaying the ratio of the accessory, the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory will be maintained even if the power of the pachinko machine is turned on again. This is because the data in the (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

  Subsequently, 1 is added to the backup area distribution counter value to update the value (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the duplication destination of the data in the main area according to the backup area allocation counter value and writing data to only some of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas.

  When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup area in which data is to be written may be allocated according to the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

  Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of the accessory ratio and the calculated value, referring to a conversion table (not shown), data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317 is acquired, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the accessory ratio is the accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

  In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process, data on the number of acquired balls is read from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the work ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). In addition, data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the area 13128 for calculating the ratio of characters. The data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

  As described above, the data for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation / display process is duplicated in the backup area. Therefore, when the normal power-off process is not executed due to an abnormal reset or the like. , Data for calculating the accessory ratio can be protected.

  Note that the processes in steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, and may be configured with one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the method of checking and backing up data differs for each model. However, if the method of checking and backing up data is shared among the models, it may be arranged in a common program module.

[6. Configuration of Storage Area]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

  In the ROM 1313, a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a character ratio calculation / display code 13135, and a character ratio calculation / display An area for storing the data for use 13136 is included. In the ROM 1313 of the present embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133 A debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 and the like And an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the accessory ratio, such as the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

  When a free area of 16 bytes or more (unused space) is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, and displayed in a dump list format The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished from each other. Similarly, an empty area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the last address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the top address of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135. When displayed in a dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area and the debug area or a value with a low frequency. Also, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

  Even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. Good. That is, it is only necessary that the game control area and the other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing between the game control area and the other areas, the character ratio calculation area (the code 13135 for calculating and displaying the character ratio and the character ratio), which is processing not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. The ratio calculation / display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid a risk that a defect (bug or the like) in the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 affects the game control.

  Note that the debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1 A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. The debugging (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debugging (inspection function) signal. Further, in the accessory ratio calculation area, a program for calculating the accessory ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

  The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The game control code 13131 can be read and written to and from the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can be read only from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and is configured to be unable to execute writing to the area. In this manner, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The processing based on the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed. Cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

  The character ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 are performed. And the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  FIG. 26B is a diagram illustrating details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored in addition to a main area in which a calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. . One or more backup areas may be provided. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set each time data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and is executed when the main control side power is turned off (see FIG. 22 may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization processing or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control-side power-off processing (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. If a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it is determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control-side power-off process, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area (Step S54 in FIG. 22). Also, in the accessory ratio calculation / display processing, every time the value of the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

  An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) at which the main control MPU 1311 times, and the accessory ratio calculation process of the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step in FIG. 24) It is read in S156). As described above, the accessory ratio calculation / display process reads out the acquired ball number data from the accessory ratio calculation region 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) stores the acquired ball number data in the accessory ratio calculation region 13128. Can be completely separated from the game control program and the program for executing the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and the gaming machine ratio calculation / display process can be shared by gaming machines having different specifications. .

  In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are converted into the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Write to ratio storage area. The data of the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is read in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

  FIG. 27A shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27A, the number of the obtained accessory balls, the number of the continuous obtained accessory balls, the total number of the obtained balls, the ratio of the accessory, and the ratio of the continuous accessory are stored. The number of winning objects obtained balls is the number of awarded balls by winning a working accessory (for example, a large winning opening 2005, 2006 being opened, a second starting opening 2004 in which the second opening door member 2549 is being opened). is there. The number of continuous-acquisition-acquired balls is the number of award balls obtained by winning a bonus while the bonus is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open in a jackpot repetition chan). The total number of obtained balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The role item ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of obtained ball (s) by the total number of obtained balls. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous bonus balls by the total number of available balls. The number of the obtained spheres, the number of the continuous spheres obtained, and the total number of the obtained spheres are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the ratio of the special prize and the number of continuous heroes are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. Is stored.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27A, the number of acquired accessory balls, the number of consecutive accessory acquired balls, and the total number of acquired balls correspond to the total sum of FIG. This is a 4-byte storage area, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294968295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store values up to 255 in decimal.

  FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27B, the number of obtained balls, the number of obtained other balls, the number of obtained continuous balls, the total number of obtained balls, the ratio of the role and the ratio of the continuous role are stored. The storage area of each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for the predetermined number of winning balls has been stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of accessory acquired balls, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of special design variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, The write pointer may be moved.

  Note that the write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. The read pointer also moves with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

  The cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and the continuous character ratio is a value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer makes a round and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data of the cleared area. The total sum of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the value of the total of the character ratio and continuous character ratio calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total value of each data Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data of the cleared area is calculated.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27B, the number of obtained accessory balls, the number of obtained continuous accessory balls, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27A. The other number of obtained balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than an accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of obtained balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. When this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. Regarding the number of the obtained ball, the number of the obtained other balls, the number of the obtained continuous balls, and the total number of the obtained balls, the data in the storage area having the write pointer is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the ratio of the number of the obtained characters and the continuous The physical ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the work area structure shown in FIG. 27 (C), more detailed data can be acquired than that shown in FIG. 27 (B), and the number of ordinary electric accessory acquired balls, the number of special electric accessory acquired balls, and the number of starting opening acquired balls , The number of winning opening winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the ratio of bonuses, and the ratio of consecutive bonuses are stored. The storage area of each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the number reaches the predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for the predetermined number of winning balls has been stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired special electric accessory balls, the number of fired balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of big hits in the special symbol variation display game, etc.) becomes a predetermined number. Then, the write pointer may be moved.

  The cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and the continuous character ratio is a value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer makes a round and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total total of each data is the total value of the data collected in the past, the total value of the accessory ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the total value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data of the cleared area is calculated.

  Among the work area structures shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C), the number of accessory acquisition balls in the ring buffer, the number of other acquisition balls, the number of consecutive accessory acquisition balls, the total number of acquired balls, the ordinary electric accessory acquisition balls The number, the number of the special electric accessory acquired balls, the number of the started opening balls, and the number of the winning opening acquired balls are each a 2-byte storage area, and can store a value up to 65535 in decimal. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, number of consecutive winning balls, total number of winning balls, number of ordinary electric winning balls, number of special electric winning balls, number of starting opening balls and other winning opening balls The total number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the total is the sum of data of 6000 prize balls × n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of acquired balls, number of acquired balls, number of consecutive acquired balls, total number of acquired balls, ratio of actors, percentage of consecutive actors, number of ordinary motorized actor-acquired balls, number of special electrically-operated accessory acquired balls, starting port The total number of the acquired balls and the total number of winning ball acquired balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294767295 in decimal. Since the total total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Each of the total and total of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store a value up to 255 in decimal.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27C, the total number of acquired balls, the ratio of the accessory, and the ratio of the continuous accessory are the same as those described in FIG. 27B. The other number of acquired balls is the number of awarded balls due to winning a prize other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close). The number of the ordinary electric accessory acquired balls is a prize ball acquired by winning a prize to the operating ordinary electric accessory (the second starting opening 2004 in which the second starting opening door member 2549 is open) according to the result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol. Is a number. The special electric auditors product acquisition ball count is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a special electric auditors running (for example, open large winning openings 2005 and 2006) according to the result of the lottery by the special symbol. The starting opening ball count is the number of prize balls obtained by winning the starting opening (first starting opening 2002). The other winning port ball count is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize port (general prize port 2001) that is not an accessory and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of ordinary electric accessory acquired balls, the number of special electric accessory acquired balls, the number of acquired opening opening balls, the number of other winning opening acquired balls, the number of consecutive accessory acquired balls, and the total number of acquired balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not erased by the trigger. For this reason, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total sum of FIGS. 25B and 25C may be deleted every predetermined period.

  Further, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , The number of acquired balls> the total number of acquired balls), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be checked using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be copied to the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Structure of Character Ratio Display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 includes a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 has four digits.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package as a single unit, but both may be housed in another package.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, and CLOCK).

  The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting an operation state of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating a data fetch timing, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit a signal for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7 segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is the signal transmitted on the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. Note that the direction of the illustrated signal (current) differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is illustrated.

  The R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 is connected to a resistor 13174 that determines a current value flowing through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission luminance of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, It has a latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, a digit-limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

  The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The four bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting an operation mode (see FIG. 35) of the driver circuit 13171, and the four bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting a register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data of the detailed setting.

  The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and switches D15 to D8 to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). Unit 3183 and the standby mode control unit 3184), and D7 to D0 are sent to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to the respective control units (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). The 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 among the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

  The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores the display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). More specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180 outputs data register 0, that is, the 8-bit Digit-A. A signal for selecting 8-bit data latch 3173 is sent so that data latch 3173A stores the data.

  The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided by the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and take in data to be displayed on each of the 7-segment LEDs according to the selection signal from the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

  The 8 × 4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

  Decoder 3175 converts the input data into a character to be displayed on 7-segment LED 13172 using a character generator decode table (see FIG. 34), and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

  The 2 × 8 data selector 3176 refers to the decode setting, selects data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the 8 × 8 data when set to the mode not using the decoder. The data from the four data selector 3174 is selected. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

  The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output a current signal for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

  Driver 3179 receives the sink current of the current output from constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls the current sink timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 to determine which 7-segment LED (digit) to display.

  The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of lit digits from one to four digits by an external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are 00100001B and D7 to D0 are XXX0011B, a setting is made such that all four digits are used in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that the data may be either H or L, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

  The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls a duty ratio when the seven-segment LED 13172 is turned on. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by an external setting, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, D15 to D8 are set to 00100000B, and arbitrary data is input to D3 to D0, so that the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16 steps of duty from 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

  The data selector control unit 3183 controls the setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether to use the decoder 3175 according to an external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001xxxB, the setting for using the decoder is written into the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000xx. By inputting XXB data, the setting of NO DECODER that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select the data from the decoder 3175 when the use of the decoder is set. Control is performed so that the × 8 data selector 3176 selects data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

  The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the setting of the standby mode and the setting of the data clear. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by an external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are 0100B and D3 to D0 are 0000B. In the standby mode, the current setting is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

  In addition, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held therein by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

  The oscillator 3185 generates a clock used in the driver circuit 13171.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

  FIG. 31A shows a main control board box 1320 of the mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 so as to be sealable in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and has a model number of the main control board 1310 on its surface. (Sticker sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and an opening seal are stuck. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

  The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31B shows a state where the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

  The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320, and forms a main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that improper remodeling has not been performed. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that no components are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been performed.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The number displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be in the same direction as the model number of the main control MPU 1311 or the model number of 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable that the mounting is performed so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on a gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are the same. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 in such a manner. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on a gaming machine in a vertically long orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. The accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so as to be oriented.

  Further, connectors CN1 and CN2 for leading out signal lines from the main control board 1310 have ends along the long side of the main control board 1310 in the direction in which the lengths are aligned with the accessory ratio display 1317 (in the figure, the upper long side). (It may be the upper end along the side, but may be the lower end along the lower long side, or the end along the left and right sides.) That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 be arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not hinder the visual recognition of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. .

  Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal affixed to the main control board box 1320 are affixed to positions that do not overlap with any of the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display 1317.

  By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this manner, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in a correct direction, and these visibility is improved, and the manufacturing process and the amusement arcade are used. In the inspection after the installation, the ratio of the accessory and the presence or absence of the modification of the main control MPU 1311 can be confirmed without taking an excessive posture.

  In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31C, the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the direction of the numeric display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are the same, but the circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are mounted. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display direction of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, a circuit module other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping with the model number indication of the main control board box 1320 or the unsealing sticker attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized remodeling, and therefore, it is not meaningful to arrange them in the same direction on the main control board 1310.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be unstable due to noise. For this reason, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

  For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is determined by the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). L1) It is arranged so as to be shorter. That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

  Further, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that improper remodeling has not been performed, as indicated by the dotted line. For this reason, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

  Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and are mounted so that L1 is larger than L2 in any case.

  FIG. 32B is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32C is a view showing the positional relationship in the implementation example shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of a signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, on the printed circuit board, a forbidden area 13106 where no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and the inner layer of the signal line 13101. A ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed board in the prohibited area 13106.

  The arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example will be described. For example, the signal line 13103 that supplies a clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are connected to each other). (So that they do not intersect). Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer by the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 does not cross the signal line 13101).

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is generally formed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and having no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized remodeling. The present invention can also be applied to a multilayer substrate having an inner layer (e.g., four or six layers).

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

  The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

  The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182 to set a duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set to D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio, and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

  The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and sets the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence or absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits. It is written to a register or a digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

  The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D, and sets data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set to D7 to D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data registers in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

  The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the registers described above do not have to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and need only be set once. Therefore, the initial setting is performed in step S28 in FIG. Is set as If the setting is performed only once in the initial setting, the setting may be changed due to the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Every time is pressed). As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, correct display can always be performed.

  FIG. 34 shows a character generator decode table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert the input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. When displaying a number, D5 to D0 match the displayed number, so that the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 without conversion and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172.

  The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

  FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: an initial state, a data input completed state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (full lighting). Is prepared.

  To control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, all lighting, and standby mode setting instructions. The blank command cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after each setting is completed. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the numeral 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether to use or not use the decoder, and inputs display data. A register to which data is to be written is selected in D11 to D8, and contents to be set in the register are input in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all lighting instruction turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side and lights all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction includes a standby instruction that is divided into two according to parameters and transitions to a standby state, and a clear instruction that transitions to an initial state. The standby command maintains the current setting, stops the operations of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. The clear instruction clears and initializes all data held in the registers and latches, and turns off the display.

  In addition, since the blank command is also a kind of the display command, in this specification, the “display” includes any of the lighting of the 7-segment LED, the lighting of some segments, and the turning off of all the segments.

  With reference to FIG. 36, display examples in each of the above-described states will be described.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the initial setting (ALL BLANK) of the driver circuit 13171 has not been completed or the display data has not been set, so that the 7-segment LED 13172 as shown in FIG. Are turned off so that all segments are turned off. In addition, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed and a game is available, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is preferable to set the standby mode, turn off the 7-segment LED 13172, and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine.

  Then, after setting the control data in the registers for various controls in the driver circuit 13171 and completing the initial setting, when the display data is input, a predetermined display is made on the 7-segment LED 13172. In this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be turned on. It is preferable that the normal display of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by the predetermined display.

  Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be provided on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be turned on.

  When the display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lighting according to the input data). More specifically, the display is in the accessory ratio display state, a code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and the numeric value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (C), “y175” is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value out of the specified range, it is preferable that a display that can identify the abnormal value is displayed. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed by blinking, or the decimal point is lit or blinked.

  When the display switch 1318 is further operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, a different type of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36D, “y263” is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case, as in the above case, it is preferable to display such that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36E), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is better to turn off the light and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. The non-display ratio of the accessory is the same as that after the completion of the initial setting, but may be in a different mode, as long as it can be distinguished from the display of the ratio of the accessory.

  FIG. 36E shows a display example in a case where the accessory ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a mode different from that shown in the figure, and may be in a mode that can be distinguished from the normal display of the accessory ratio to indicate that the display of the accessory ratio is impossible.

  In addition, in any state, when a full lighting instruction is input, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. When a blank command or a standby command is input in any state, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining data. When a data clear command is input in any state, all data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned on, and the state returns to the initial state.

[8. Display of ratio of character]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

  As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, displays the numeric value of the accessory ratio in the lower two digits, and displays the type of the numeric value in the upper two digits. Is displayed.

  Also, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be displayed alternately.

  The display mode of the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the result of comparison between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or changing the color (green in a normal state, red in a case where the reference is exceeded). By changing the display mode according to the result of comparison with the reference value, it can be easily recognized that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, green is displayed when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, and red when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value. When the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, the display is turned on, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, the display is flashed.

  When the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp being 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, the display may be performed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display content (such as the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the continuous accessory, whether the latest data is displayed or the medium-term data is displayed).

  If the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of the prize ball data is short, and the value of the accessory ratio may not converge. Therefore, the display is performed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, or the like). May be. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is smaller than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of obtained balls exceeds the above-described reference value.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch and display the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the immediately preceding counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C. The medium term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counters shown in FIGS. The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C).

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may be shared by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. However, when the main frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main display unit 1400 displays the main game state. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. The display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, but the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the display of the accessory ratio to the display of the game state. For example, if the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol change display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but if the main frame 4 is closed before the change time elapses, the change display for the remaining time may be performed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the special symbol variable display on the function display unit 1400 stops. For this reason, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may display anything other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of winnings for each type of winning opening per unit time or the number of paid out prize balls may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a base. The base is the normal payout rate excluding the special prize (during the big hit), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of shot spheres (the number of out spheres) is detected by the shot sphere sensor 1020. As described above, the shooting sphere sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention members 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide game balls from the ball shooting device to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out-balls may be detected by a discharged-ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, there is provided an out-passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided below the game area 5a, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021; The number of out-balls may be detected by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the start-up opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball supplied to the ball launching device 680, and a game ball (so-called foul ball) launched from the ball launching device 680 but not reaching the game area 5a And a foul ball sensor (not shown) for detecting the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch / supply ball sensor, and subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of outgoing balls (the number of launched balls). It may be detected.

  The number of out spheres may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient that any of the illustrated sensors is provided with either the ejection ball sensor 3060 or the shooting ball sensor 1020.

  The number of safe balls is equal to the number of paid prize balls. Further, the base may be defined as the payout rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, and during time reduction), and the number of safe balls per game state divided by the number of out balls may be calculated. . By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, a deviation from the design value of the throwing performance during operation can be confirmed on the spot for each gaming machine. In addition, since the pitching performance can be confirmed without using a hall contest, the inspection for each gaming machine at the time of the on-site inspection of the game arcade becomes easy.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 displays information on other winnings and prize balls (eg, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 2001 and the number of winning balls by the winning, the number of winnings in the starting opening 2002 and the number of winning balls by the winning, The number of winnings in the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls by the winning, and the like may be displayed.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio starts, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Good. That is, if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

  Further, the display content may be changed every time the display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7 indicating the ratio of the bonus (cumulative) is displayed in the first two digits, and the bonus for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) of prize balls is displayed. The ratio is displayed in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits is switched to A6 meaning the continuous bonus ratio (total), and the continuous bonus ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered by two. It may be displayed in a digit (FIG. 37B). Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7 meaning an accessory ratio (6000 award balls) is displayed in the first two digits, and the accessory ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (the latest data display). (FIG. 37 (C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the upper two digits is switched to y6 meaning the ratio of the accessory (cumulative), and the ratio of the accessory to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of winning balls is changed to the lower two digits. Display (medium term data display) may be performed (FIG. 37D).

  The display switch 1318 does not need to be provided as an independent switch, and may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated during operation of the pachinko machine 1. By integrating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the staff at the amusement arcade operates only one switch, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the operating gaming machine and confirm the gambling of the operating gaming machine.

  Also, the data of the number of awarded balls is stored as the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, and when the check code is abnormal, the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is deleted. Can be avoided.

  In addition, since the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the bonus ratio is deleted under the condition different from the condition for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the data of the accurate prize ball number is retained. , Can calculate the accurate accessory ratio.

  In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased depending on the operation of the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erroneously erased by the operation of a game room attendant. Since the object ratio calculation / display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by an erroneous operation of a game room attendant. In addition, since the game hall cannot intentionally delete the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and it is possible to prevent the state where the accessory ratio is high from being concealed.

[9. View Base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
The embodiment of the pachinko machine for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio has been described above. Next, the embodiment of the pachinko machine for calculating and displaying the base value will be described. In the present embodiment, a pachinko machine that exclusively calculates and displays a base value will be described. However, the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

  In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins in the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a random number is drawn and a special symbol variation display game is executed. . The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short time (a normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, a shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds which is easily selected when the number of holdings is large). And a fluctuation pattern of a relatively long time (a fluctuation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, since the notification of the base value does not require urgency than the notification of the error, it can be notified at the timing when the special symbol change display game switches to the next change display game. However, when the variable display time is long, when the predetermined condition is satisfied without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of award balls (the number of paid balls) If the number changes), it is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even during the special symbol change display game) (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of award balls (the number of paid balls) If) changes), calculate and display the base value. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that operates as described above will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays a base value.

  The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by the reference numeral 1317 is a base display instead of the accessory ratio display. As the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, a 4-digit 7-segment LED may be used, and other digits (for example, 2 digits) may be used. A 7 segment LED may be used.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires the data of the number of award balls and the number of out-balls in the update process (step S81) of the area for calculating the accessory ratio in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), a base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, the "update of the area ratio calculation area" of step S81 in FIG. 23 is replaced with the "area update processing of calculating the base area", and the "calculation / display processing of area ratio" of step S89 is replaced with the "base area area calculation processing". Calculation / display processing "will be described. In addition, the “accessory ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is read as a “base calculation area 13128”, and the “accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135” is read as a “base calculation / display code 13135”. The description will be made by replacing the "data for calculating and displaying ratio 13136" with "data 13136 for calculating and displaying base".

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update processing determines the current game state, adds the number of award balls to be paid out as a game value to an area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. I do. In particular, the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39 uses the prize ball count calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) to calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt period occurs. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (step S822).

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The state of the game being a special prize means that the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can acquire many prize balls, but the time including the opening and ending time of the big hit game is included. Good. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Also, all times during a right-handed instruction may be included.

  Further, in the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, the special award may be included. Further, in a game state other than during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 until the closing thereof (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The period up to the required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize.

  The electric actuated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculation of the base value. As described above, during the special prize regarding the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the condition device is being operated (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls other than the special prize, a normal (so-called big hit) prize in the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (a so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, a winning prize ball and a prize ball other than during the special prize (low probability or non-working time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically actuated actors (grand prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value regardless of the playing state (whether or not a special prize is in progress). The other characters (starting opening 2004) are not used, and whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls for the calculation of the base value is switched according to the gaming state (whether or not a special prize is in progress). Will be. The fact that the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls are not used in the calculation of the base value means that the paid out balls are not counted in (the number of award balls other than the special prize which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value) This includes not generating edge information for paying out a prize ball by the winning signal even when the winning signal is input.

  In addition, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the condition device does not operate (so-called small hits). In general, a small hit occurs during a short working time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win, so that it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated other than during the special prize (at a normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility of winning. In this case, the winning balls and the prize balls to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly cope with the base value standard, and it is possible to improve design flexibility.

  If the gaming state is the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore, the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the prize ball number or the out-ball count. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update processing may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of award balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and the number of award balls corresponding to the payout command that has received the acknowledgment (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receive the payout completion report from the payout control board 951 (the number of paid out prize balls). This variation will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). In addition, it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Further, although the game balls have won the starting openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit value, and even if the winning in the starting opening is not held, the winning balls are paid out, so that the total number of winning balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even when a game ball is awarded in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize ball due to the prize is generated, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is reduced. Since it is 0, the total prize ball count is not updated. The total prize ball count is recorded in the total prize ball count storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the obtained number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the launching ball sensor 1020, the ejecting ball sensor 3060, and the like. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out-ball is detected. The number of spheres = 1 is obtained. The total out ball count is recorded in a total out ball count storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, every time an out ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated. As described above, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out-balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

  It is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls as in steps S815 to S817 of a base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described later, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is performed. May be stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted from the main control board 1310, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the payout control unit 952. May be transmitted.

  Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on both winning and outgoing to the winning opening is obtained, the number of awarded balls is stored in the total number of awarded balls (or in the embodiment described later, awarded ball number buffer). Then, the number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or an out-ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings to a plurality of winning openings is acquired, the total number of winning balls due to the plurality of winnings is determined by the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when a prize is detected by a winning opening sensor of a winning opening having five prize balls and a winning opening sensor of a winning opening having three prize balls, a total of eight prize balls are counted as the total winning prize balls. (Or prize ball number buffer).

  The prize ball count may be added to the total prize ball count (or prize ball count buffer) only when the launch of the game ball is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). In addition, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is stopped. Alternatively, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected in a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total prize ball number or the prize ball number buffer. When the player operates the firing handle, the number of award balls may be added to the total number of award balls (or the number of award balls buffer). In other words, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when a palm or a finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is determined as the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer. In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value of the prize ball due to an abnormality or an improper act of detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. In addition, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of a game ball, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls during the special prize. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out-balls excluding the number of balls winning the big winning opening.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

  First, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out-balls (step S903). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value need not be calculated. Further, when an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, when the total number of winning balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value is not calculated. Is also good. If the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls / the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

  The predetermined number multiplied by the total number of winning balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, assuming that the predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated to the first place in 100-percent fraction, and the decimal value is not calculated. If the predetermined number is 10,000, the base value is calculated up to two decimal places at a percentage. That is, if the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit is divided by 100, the base value of the fractional two-digit percentage of 100 can be calculated.

  Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. Note that during a wait time of 32 clocks from the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to the reading of data from the division result register A 131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits for no processing and performs other processing. May be performed. For example, a random number that determines a jackpot may be updated between the time when data is written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and the time that data is read from the division result register A 131218. More specifically, the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random numbers are also updated.

  That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing relating to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes relating to the game include at least a process of updating a random number for determining a win. In addition, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the update of the random number affecting the game result is performed one or more times.

  Also, when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the base value abnormality. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation of the base value.

  There are various methods for reporting the base, and one of the following methods may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. For example, the base value may be reported at all times or at a predetermined timing by the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, and the like. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. At this time, the display mode described with the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When reporting the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-described display or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

  When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 designates a digit for displaying a numerical value in “D15 to D8” by “data n setting” and designates a display content in D7 to D0. Is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

  When displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and when the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. . For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green in a normal state, red in a case where the reference is exceeded). Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emission color may be changed in each stage such as white, blue, and yellow. In addition, at each stage, when the base value is low, such as "good condition", "condition is decreasing", "not bad", "somewhat great", a self-selfish comment may be displayed. If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that the illegal operation has been performed. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner indicating a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, “similar” means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

  In addition, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, the abnormal value or the normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. If the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying a base notification disable on the liquid crystal display device may be generated. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, it is possible to report the state of the base with the effect device controlled by the sub-board. Can be reduced. By notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between a failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of a base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

  The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, it is preferable to always notify by using a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400. In addition, the notification may be given at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the main frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished).

  Base information may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to a hall computer installed in the game arcade. In this case, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls) as in a base calculation / display process (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.) described later. Good.

  The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold. Further, a signal having a length indicating the outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse of 30 milliseconds when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Further, a number of continuous pulses indicating the outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

  In addition, even when the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated, and when the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. Even if the base notification command is not generated, the display of the base value is continued.

  Further, as described later with reference to FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated, and the base abnormality is notified to the player or the hall employee. You may be notified.

  Further, whether to notify the base to the player may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because, if the base value is constantly reported to the player, the player's attention to the effect of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be neglected, and the consciousness of the player may be dispersed. It is.

  Further, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or to be executed in the future may be changed. For example, a plurality of display selection tables may be prepared, and an effect may be selected from display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) that differ depending on the base value.

  Further, during the special symbol change display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold (for example, 30%). Therefore, when the value exceeds or falls below the threshold value during the special symbol change display game, the effect of the special symbol change display game may be changed. The effect may be changed in the same manner when the base value rises and falls below the predetermined threshold value, or the effect may be changed in a different manner.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of the update timing of the number of winning balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls is updated in the base calculation area update processing in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display processing in step S89.

  For this reason, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning port in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base ball. In the area update processing (step S81), the award ball count buffer is updated. Thereafter, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89), and a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting processing (step S90).

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls in accordance with the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. The number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When backing up the number of unpaid prize balls in the payout control board 951, the payout control board 951 needs to transmit a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the ball payout completion. Absent. On the other hand, when the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. No need.

  In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, it is possible to detect an abnormality of the gaming machine at an early stage. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the base value is calculated a plurality of times during one special symbol variation display game, and moves up and down over the predetermined threshold value and becomes abnormal. , The base value calculation process is continuously executed regardless of the abnormality determination without stopping the game. For example, there are special design variation display games that have a short duration such as normal variation and long durations such as reach variation, and calculate the base value from the start to the end of one special symbol variation display game. When the condition for performing is satisfied a plurality of times, the base value may be calculated each time, and the base value may be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol change display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the change display), it may take a long time to change the base value depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because information required for the operation of the hall is not output at an appropriate timing because the time is not noticed, and the hall may be inconvenienced.

  In addition, if the launched game ball has not won the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value decreases. In this state, since the player loses money, for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a hit that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect related to a change in the base value, Or a notice effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (a notice effect with a high expectation such as the next notice effect among the effects not related to the change of the base value) or a change in the base value. A preview effect with a high degree of expectation among specific appearing effects (for example, displaying a base value in a rainbow display) may be performed. Thereby, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning in the starting port and the general winning opening, and can give motivation to continue the game.

  On the other hand, if many of the fired game balls win the start opening or the general winning opening (if they win more than the average of the past winning numbers), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the player is paid out more game balls than usual, so that the player is less disappointed. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to an effect with a low degree of expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the timing of updating the number of winning balls and the timing of calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the update timing of the number of winning balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the update timing of the number of award balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 41: Calculation of the number of prize balls-> Update of the number of prize balls-> Calculation of the base value-> Sending out the payout command → Send payout command → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value ・ FIG. 44: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Confirm command reception → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value ・ FIG. 45: Calculate the number of prize balls → Transmit the payout command → Completion notification of payout → Update of the number of award balls → Calculation of base value The variations in FIGS. 41 to 44 are not limited to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. It can be applied to any base calculation area update processing and base calculation / display processing.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base ratio calculation is performed. Execute display processing (step S89).

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and sets the base calculation area. In the updating process (step S81), the total prize ball count (or the prize ball count buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting processing (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89).

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls in accordance with the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, the payout command reception confirmation or the payout command reception is determined depending on whether the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. Any of the ball payout completions may be omitted.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting processing (step S90), the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89) Execute

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of winning balls determined for each winning opening in the winning ball control process (step S80), and sets the output data setting process. In step (S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the total prize ball count (or the prize ball count buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the prize ball count corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio calculation / The base value is updated in the display processing (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated not with the prize ball number corresponding to the transmitted payout command but with the prize ball number corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted).

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls in accordance with the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, the payout command reception confirmation or the payout command reception is determined depending on whether the unpaid prize ball number among the prize ball numbers calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. Any of the ball payout completions may be omitted.

  The timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operation speed of the payout device 830. The order of the step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89) does not matter.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display processing (Step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of winning balls determined for each winning opening in the winning ball control process (step S80), and sets the output data setting process. In step (S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

  Upon receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 performs a base calculation area update process (step S81) and obtains the total prize ball count (the prize ball count corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation has been received). Alternatively, the award ball count buffer is updated in the embodiment described later, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89).

  When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls in accordance with the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area updating processing (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display processing (Step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of winning balls determined for each winning opening in the winning ball control process (step S80), and sets the output data setting process. In step (S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  When storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls in accordance with the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

  Upon receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 performs a base calculation region update process (step S81) to calculate the total prize balls (or in the later-described embodiment) with the number of prize balls that have been paid out. The award ball count buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89).

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 so that the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. For this reason, the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, but the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

  As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning opening sensor detects a winning of a game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. In the processing shown in FIG. 43, when the payout command is transmitted, the number of winning balls is updated. In the process shown in FIG. 44, when the reception of the payout command is confirmed, the number of award balls is updated. In the processing shown in FIG. 45, when the payout of the prize balls is completed, the number of prize balls is updated.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to a difference between the timing of determining whether the gaming state is during the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes serious when the time from the winning of the winning opening to the update of the number of winning balls is long. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is taken over in the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification by the winning. Then, it is determined whether or not the prize ball is in a special prize at each stage using the flag. In this way, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated even if the time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of prize balls is long.

  Also, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of award balls and the number of out-balls are updated at these moments, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known by the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be reduced, and the gaming machine can be manufactured efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is unable to pay out a prize ball when the ball is out of ball, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

  In the case where the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port in which the winning is detected is not determined. Add to the number of dispensed balls. Note that a predetermined upper limit may be provided for the number of unpaid balls, but no upper limit may be provided. In this case, every time the number of awarded balls to be paid out is calculated, the number of awarded balls buffer for calculating the base value or the total number of awarded balls may be updated. Further, the number of winning balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

  On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port where the winning is detected is detected. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951. A payout command is transmitted even when the pachinko machine is unable to pay out a prize ball when the ball is out of ball, and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, each time the payout command is transmitted, the prize ball number buffer for calculating the base value or the total prize ball number may be updated.

  When the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of winning balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Note that a predetermined upper limit may be provided for the number of award balls, but no upper limit may be provided. Further, each time a prize ball is actually paid out, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

  Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, the prize ball number buffer value is not compared with the threshold value Th1, but every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

  As described above, the update of the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be performed at various timings. However, when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base display 1317 displays the value in real time. Or a base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing for updating prize balls and calculating base value]
Next, a variation of the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base calculation display processing (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
39 and 40: Calculate the base value each time the timer interrupt period occurs. FIGS. 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls. FIGS. 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out balls. Calculations / FIGS. 50 and 51: When one of the number of award balls and the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 46, the prize ball count is recorded in the prize ball count buffer in order to calculate the base value when the prize ball count satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation area update processing (FIG. 39) are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811).

  Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the acquired number of prize balls is one or more (step S812). As a result, if there is no award ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of award balls. On the other hand, if there is an award ball, the acquired number of award balls is added to the award ball number buffer (step S813). Note that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall every time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball buffer, or the prize ball number described later becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the prize ball number paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls means that a large number of prize balls (for example, a prize corresponding to a prize of 10 or more shots per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in a general winning opening or a starting opening) during a predetermined time other than during the special prize. Ball) is obtained. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls. If the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired prize ball number does not need to be added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813, and the prize ball number added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813 is subtracted. Is also good.

  As a result, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, and the like. Further, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Further, the number of award balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, a prize ball may be paid out to the player. When the number of award balls is determined to be abnormal and is notified by the above-described notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from external terminal plate 784, etc.), the number of award balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even when the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started from the operation check in the initial state. As another method of stopping the game, after temporarily stopping the game (for example, stopping the change display of the special symbol), the game returns to the original state after the error notification is stopped, and the game is restarted. For this reason, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, the power failure detection signal is output, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 without any change, the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, since 100 game balls (ie, out balls) are fired in the game area 5a and all the game balls may win the general winning opening or the starting opening, the abnormality of the number of award balls is notified. It is desirable that the mode in which the error is performed is lower in urgency than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error), and the mode in which the level is lower (e.g., a lower volume or lower light intensity than the normal error notification). The display time may be the same as a normal error or a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

  Then, the award ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the award ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the obtained number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S817 has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time. However, the end of the notification is determined such that the prize ball abnormality is notified for a predetermined number of fired balls. You may. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

  In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 46, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls in step S985. However, after obtaining the number of out spheres, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out spheres. (That is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value). For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out-balls is counted at a predetermined time, or when the number of out-balls is high (for example, 50% or more), the number of out-balls wins in consideration of the number of prize balls in a general winning opening or a starting opening. And so on.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at a timing when the number of winning balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing (FIG. 40) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on a value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is made up of 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out-balls can be determined to be 128 or more.) In the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46), the determination result obtained by comparing the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1 is recorded in a flag. In the base calculating / displaying processing (FIG. 47), the flag is used to store the winning ball number buffer value. May be determined to be greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold Th1.

  If the award ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation / display process ends.

  On the other hand, if the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total award ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the award ball count buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or more than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the prize ball number is determined. Remaining (the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball buffer is left in the prize ball buffer), and the other part is stored in the memory (the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball count) and used for calculating the base value. Execute the processing to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold value Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99. When five prize balls are generated by winning a general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104. However, 100 are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining four are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls remaining in the prize ball number buffer is used for calculating the base value when the prize ball number buffer value next becomes equal to or greater than the threshold Th1. Also, the threshold value Th1 has been described as 100, but another numerical value such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold value Th1 is set such that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed. Therefore, the threshold value Th1 is equal to or less than the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot (multiple types). (For example, if there are four rounds and eight rounds), it may be set to be equal to or less than the minimum number of prize balls per jackpot. In addition, the base value may be frequently updated from the viewpoint of early detection of fraud. For example, it is preferable to set the threshold value Th1 to 10 instead of 100 in that the base value is frequently updated.

  Steps S891 and S892 may be executed for each predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1. The predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311 or may be measured by an output of an RTC (real time clock).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out-balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. When the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error (or indefinite), and therefore need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  In addition to the case where the total number of out-balls is 0 and the case where the calculated base value is an abnormal value, it is not necessary to calculate the base value and update the base calculation area 13128. For example, when the total number of out balls is equal to or less than the total number of award balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the number of award balls equal to or greater than the number of launch balls (out balls) is obtained. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and to calculate the base value. When the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 does not need to be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

  Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as the threshold. The theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine having a maximum winning number of balls for a winning opening of 15 is 1500%. Therefore, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. Also in this case, the base value need not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 need not be updated with the value read from the division result register A 131218.

  Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is out of the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is read with the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

  Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

  The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are, as described later with reference to FIG. 52, a cumulative value from when the pachinko machine 1 starts operating, and the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same. The timing may be initialized (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out balls).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that an illegal act can be detected early. That is, during a normal game, a large number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) do not win the general winning opening 2001 or the starting openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, the abnormality of the winning in the winning opening (the general winning opening 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004) which is always open is determined and notified.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated when the number of winning balls satisfies a predetermined condition, an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the calculation amount required for calculating the base value (for example, The load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified. Until then, the conventional base value is notified. Is done.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 48, the out-ball count is recorded in the out-ball count buffer in order to calculate the base value at a timing when the out-ball count satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there is a winning ball, the acquired number of winning balls is added to the total number of winning balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 48, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of award balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for informing the award ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out-balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when it is determined that a game ball wins in the starting port and a prefetch effect is generated, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a different mode (flashing display, red hold, or the like) from a normal mode, The player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-reading hold to be a big hit, but if the special symbol variation display game is a loss, the player is discouraged. Even in such a case, when the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls as in the present embodiment, the discouragement of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the prize ball generation timing, so that the base value increased by the prize ball by winning the start port is notified. In other words, even when it is determined that the prefetching effect is to be executed when a prize is entered in the starting opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out when the prize is entered in the starting opening is added, the predetermined number (for example, the threshold value Th1 = 100) is obtained. If not, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of display digits, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the pre-reading effect described above is missed, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the condition is good), and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed, the base value is not updated if the winning ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1). Further, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed, and when the winning ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the next winning ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number. .

  Note that the player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, the selection can be made with the operation buttons 220C at the start of the game. The calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be performed, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. In addition, when the reserved memory of the special symbol change display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the start opening is won. Even in this case, a prize ball is paid out in accordance with a prize in the starting port, so the number of the prize balls is counted and used for calculating a base value. In addition, at the time of a specific error, even if a prize is won in the starting opening or the general winning opening, it is treated as if there was no prize, and if the prize ball is not paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted, and depending on the prize, the base value will not be counted. Is not updated.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at a timing when the number of out-balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of out-balls stored in the out-ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on a predetermined bit value of the out-ball-number storage area (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is configured with 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out balls can be determined to be 128 or more.) In the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 48), the determination result obtained by comparing the number of out-balls with the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag. In the base calculation / display processing (FIG. 49), the number of out-balls is determined by the flag. May be determined to be equal to or greater than the threshold Th2.

  If the out ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation / display process ends.

  On the other hand, if the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900). Steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute) without comparing the out-ball count buffer value with the threshold Th2.

  Thereafter, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. Note that when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Note that the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are cumulative numbers from when the pachinko machine 1 starts operating, and the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are determined at the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize ball count). Initialization may be performed for each number of balls or for a predetermined number of out balls.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, may notify the base value in a specific effect, or may notify the base value abnormality.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out-balls (the number of fired balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fun is pursued.

  In addition, each time a prize ball (prize detection, transmission of a payout command, arrival of a payout command, completion of payout of a prize ball, etc.), the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. This is because if the predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball), the base value may not be calculated correctly. For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about one minute), the ball-grabbing state caused by the game ball being caught on the nail disposed in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed to the winning opening. This is because a prize may be won. For this reason, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of an out ball.

  When both the out-ball count and the out-ball count buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball count buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out-ball count buffer value may be displayed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out-balls reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, it is necessary to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out-ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified. Until then, the conventional base value is notified. Is done.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. The number of out-balls is recorded in the out-ball number buffer. In FIG. 50, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is an award ball, the acquired number of award balls is added to the award ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of award balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for informing the award ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out-balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at a timing at which either the number of winning balls or the number of out-balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation / display processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total award ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the award ball count buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out-balls stored in the out-ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total out-ball count, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out-balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out-balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. Note that when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify the base value abnormality. Note that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or the base value may not be calculated or the base notification command may not be generated.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, unless the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

  The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out-balls in the base calculation area 13128 are based on the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, and 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. 49, 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). The data of the prize ball count buffer and the out-ball count buffer in the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update processing (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -It is read out in the display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). For this reason, the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing can be configured separately from the timer interrupt processing (game control program), and the programs for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio are shared by gaming machines of different specifications. it can.

  FIG. 52A shows an example of the structure of a work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), a prize ball buffer, a total prize ball count, an out ball count buffer, a winning ball count buffer, a specific winning ball count buffer, a total out ball count, and a base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and bases the prize ball number on a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out-ball count buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the out-ball count satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of out-balls). Can be The winning ball count buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that have won a general winning port or a starting port. The specific winning ball count buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that have won a specific general winning port or starting port. The winning ball count buffer is used when counting the number of out balls based on the number of balls passing through the exit (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball count buffer is used when correcting the out-ball count with the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total out ball count is the total number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize. The base is calculated as the total number of prize balls / the total number of out balls × 100 and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display processing.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the total prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to the respective areas of the total total in FIG. 52 (B) which will be described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. And can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The base is a one-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of the base in FIG. 52B described later, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity capable of recording the base value as a decimal may be allocated.

  FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52B, the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number, and the base are stored. Each data item is the same as that described in FIG. The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas (for example, every 6000 prize balls) for every predetermined number of prize balls (or for every predetermined number of out balls, for every predetermined time). When the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer for all data moves, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. . Then, after the data for the predetermined number of winning balls has been stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of award balls (the number of out balls, a predetermined time, etc.) has reached a predetermined number.

  Note that the write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. The read pointer also moves with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the base value using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

  The total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the total value of data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the total value of the base is the total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls. When the ring buffer makes one cycle and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the accumulated value is excluded excluding the data in the cleared area. Recalculated. The total total of each data is the total value of all data collected in the past, the value of the base total total calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total total value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one cycle, the total cumulative value including the original data of the cleared area is calculated.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are each a 2-byte storage area, and can store values up to 65535 in decimal. Since the total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls × n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since the total sum is not erased unless an error occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Each of the base total and the total total is a storage area of 1 byte, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity capable of recording the base value as a decimal may be allocated.

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 52A, the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Good. Similarly, the total sum of FIG. 52B may be deleted every predetermined period.

  If the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, the data of the base calculation area 13128 and the fact that the calculated base value is abnormal may be notified. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be checked using the check code, and the base value may be calculated again after copying the data in the normal backup area to the main area.

[9-4. Display Base Value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. However, when the main body frame 4 is closed and a game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Since it is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Naturally, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base calculation / display processing (step S89) are executed.

  The base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value starts, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. The base value may be displayed on the base display 1317 if the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2. That is, if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

  In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be displayed on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be turned on.

  When the main frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36E), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. The power consumption of the gaming machine may be reduced. This base non-display state is the same as the state after the completion of the initial setting (FIG. 36B), but may be in a different form as long as it can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

  The base display 1317 may be shared by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the base display to the display of the game state. For example, when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed. However, when the main frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the special symbol variable display on the function display unit 1400 stops. For this reason, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to give the player a sense of discomfort.

  In addition, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio display) 1317. In this way, the base value (combination ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, so that a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. In the island facility where the pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine is opened, the back of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, it is possible to confirm the bases (combination ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back. When the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form recognizable by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer indicating the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even when the mode is shifted to the energy saving mode. If the light amount of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it is difficult to confirm the base value using the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening hours.

  Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the holding of the special symbol variation display game has been exhausted and no gaming ball has won any of the winning ports. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal fluctuation. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demonstration state, a moving image in which the motif of the gaming machine is known is reproduced, and a description of the gaming machine is given. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demonstration state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (the demo state and the energy saving mode do not need to be distinguished). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is not necessary to reduce the light amount of these display devices. Is also good. In addition, unless the light amount of the function display unit 1400 is reduced, a player who wants to play a game on an empty stand can easily visually recognize the result of the previous lottery.

  Also, even if the game ball does not win at the starting port or the general winning opening, if the game ball is fired toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value may be recalculated and updated. There is. If the number of out balls increases when the game balls are fired and the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value decreases, but some players burn revenge.

  By notifying such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 also serving as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even when the mode shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed maintains the light amount before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or the light amount is increased, so that the player It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

  As described above, the description has been given of maintaining or increasing the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed. However, emphasis is placed on the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption, and the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed is lowered or turned off. Good. For example, a predetermined operation during the energy saving mode (a firing stop button for forcibly stopping firing, an operation button for changing the effect that appears, a RAM clear button for clearing the contents of the RAM, power supply to the gaming machine) (Operation of an operation means provided on the gaming machine such as a supply adjustment button for switching the presence / absence of the display), the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced. Furthermore, not only during the energy saving mode, but also when performing the above-described predetermined operation, the light amount of both the lamp for reducing the power consumption and the display displaying the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. Is also good.

  When reducing or extinguishing the light intensity of both the lamp and the display that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode before the display that displays the base value. The light may be turned off or turned off. In this case, an effect of greatly reducing the power consumption by first reducing the amount of light of a lamp or the like having a large power consumption is achieved. In addition, the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off before the lamp or the like on the display on which the base value is displayed. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. It works. In addition, during the energy saving mode, a lamp or the like for reducing power consumption and a display for displaying the base value may be simultaneously reduced or turned off. In this case, the amount of reduction in power consumption can be increased, and the energy saving effect is high. . It should be noted that before and after time in these descriptions (meaning “first” and “simultaneously”) also includes the order of internal processing timing and the order of appearance from the player.

  Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into several stages. The display for displaying the base value may be configured by a multi-color LED, and the display may be displayed in different colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display that displays the base value is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low at each stage, such as "good condition", "condition is decreasing", "not bad", "somewhat amazing" Sometimes masochistic comments may be displayed. Furthermore, an effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displaying a decorative symbol may be executed without changing the display mode of the display for displaying the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of out-passing balls]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update processing (step S81) and the base calculation display processing (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the processing described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out-balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of passing-out balls, and a base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
54 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt period occurs. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out spheres is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 54 to FIG.

  When an out ball is detected by the out ball passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out port 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. That is, the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out of the game area 5a via the general winning port 2001, the starting port 2002, the large winning ports 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out port 1111. Therefore, the out-passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of out-balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of out-going balls, and the base value is accurately calculated.

  FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the gaming board.

  The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a and passes through the out port 1111 to flow out of the game area 5a. An out-passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of passing ball) is provided. The out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-opening ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-opening 1111, it can be made conscious that the out-balls are counted, that is, the base is calculated.

  Further, the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a collecting gutter where game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-portion 1111 are aligned. If the player is placed at a position where the player cannot view the ball, the player need not be aware of the number of out-balls. Further, by providing the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111, it is possible to secure a sufficient place for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body), thereby improving the design flexibility of the game board 5. it can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the rolling surface on which the game balls passing through the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 rolls so that the game balls passing through the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 do not rebound. It is good to have a slope or curved surface.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 54 obtains the number of award balls, the number of out-passing balls, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate a base value using the number of passing-out balls at each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated. In addition, it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

  After that, the number of balls passing through the outer opening is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 54, every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46), it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

  After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out-balls in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 55, in order to calculate a base value at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out spheres satisfies a predetermined condition, the number of prize balls is recorded in a prize ball number buffer. The number of balls passing through the out mouth is recorded in the out ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is an award ball, the acquired number of award balls is added to the award ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of award balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for informing the award ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-passing balls is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out-passing balls is added to the out-ball count buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the winning ball number buffer (step S821).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

  In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. Then, the acquired number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (an out-ball number buffer, a winning ball number buffer). As described above, the number of passing-out balls and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or may be recorded in another storage area.

  Also, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of out-passing balls and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out-balls increases by one when a winning port is won. The counting of the number of outgoing balls and the number of winning balls are performed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the outball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer. At that time, if both the out-ball count buffer and the winning ball count buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of balls passing through the out-mouth preferentially or count the number of winning balls first. Is not determined by lottery as appropriate, but should be determined in advance. At this time, if priority is given to the processing relating to the prize ball over the other processing, the payout processing of the prize ball can be executed quickly, but it may be determined appropriately according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the award ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total award ball count, and the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total award ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the award ball count buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-passing balls stored in the out-ball count buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball count buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the exit and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area and is the number of out balls. If the result of determination is that the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out-balls, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out-balls is equal to or more than the threshold Th2, the award-ball number buffer value is added to the total number of award balls (step S897), and the award-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of outgoing balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the outgoing ball number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined times without comparing the number of out-balls (out-ball number buffer value + winning-ball number buffer value) with the threshold Th2.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out-balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. Note that when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, unless the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of passing balls out of the exit to calculate the number of out balls, so that the number of out balls is accurately counted, and the base value is accurately calculated. it can. Furthermore, in the manufacturing process and the inspection process of the gaming machine, by confirming the base value, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317 and the process of calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of abnormalities in the base]
The processing described above is for generating a command for reporting the calculated base value. Next, a description will be given of a process for determining an abnormality in the base value and reporting the abnormality.
FIG. 57: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt period. FIG. 58: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each out-ball count is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 57 and 58.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

  First, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out-balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. Note that when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display processing ends. The same method as the above-described base notification can be adopted as a method of notifying the base abnormality.

  For example, one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. Specifically, the base value (seven-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, and the like may notify the abnormality of the base value. If the player is notified of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-described display device or display device to notify an abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, or 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

  When displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or changing the color (green in a normal state and red in an abnormal state). Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. The display may be divided into a plurality of stages and the emission color may be changed in each stage such as white, blue, and yellow.

  In addition, the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, the abnormal value or the normal value, etc.) may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. In addition, information on abnormalities of the base may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to a hall computer installed in a game arcade.

  The base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 57 is performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, at the timing when the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update processing to be updated.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total award ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the award ball count buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out-balls stored in the out-ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total out-ball count, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out-balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out-balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. Note that when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display processing ends.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated each time even if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is not updated. That is, unless the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  The base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 58 updates the total prize ball count and the total out ball count directly using the acquired prize ball count and the out ball count, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update processing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall employee can know the state of the gaming machine. It is possible to know the possibility of an unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to detect and report an abnormality of the gaming machine which cannot be detected by the conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, a description will be given of an embodiment of a gaming machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value.

  The base value calculated by the pachinko machine naturally goes up and down. Since the base value indicates the condition of the gaming machine, a player who is playing a game is concerned not only with the base value itself but also with a change in the base value. For this reason, it is desired to notify the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the upper and lower base values appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the current base value with the history of the past base values. In FIG. 59, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total award ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the award ball count buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out-balls stored in the out-ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total out-ball count, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th2, the prize ball count buffer value is added to the total prize ball count (step S897), and the prize ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out-balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball count buffer (step S900).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out-balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. Note that when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the time of the base value management timer has expired (step S904). If the base value management timer has not expired, it is not time to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the time of the base value management timer has expired, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

  The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores a current base value in a base history every time the base value management timer times out. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Also, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is formed in the base calculation area 13128, and stores, for example, a predetermined time × n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls, The base value may be calculated as needed.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (FIG. 60).

  First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. Is determined (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decrease, with reference to the base decrease duration measuring timer. (Step S10302). Then, if the predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, an effect table in which the base is lowering is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the base decrease, the effect table in which the base decrease is continued is selected (step S10304).

  On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or larger than) the current base value, the base lowering duration measuring timer is reset (step S10305), and a display selection table in which the base is rising is selected (step S10306). ).

  In the above-described display selection process, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value. However, the current base value is compared with the base history value to determine whether the current base value is larger, equal, or smaller. May be. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is obtained by division. Therefore, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value is equal to the current base value in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

  FIGS. 64 to 68 are diagrams illustrating an example of the display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select an effect of the special symbol variation display game by a random number selected at the time of winning in the starting port (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or when there is no change in the base value. The display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected when the base value is decreasing. Selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the base value starts to decrease.

  Each display selection table includes each item of the effect number, the effect content, the fluctuation time, the remarks, and the distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The effect content is the name of the effect. The fluctuation time is the time from the start of the change of the special symbol by the effect to the end thereof. Remarks are information describing the outline of the effect so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is a probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by a numerator having 65536 as a denominator.

  The display selection table 1 (outlier) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is outlier and the base value is increasing or does not change. Is a normal jackpot in which the result of the jackpot lottery does not derive a probability change state, and is selected when the base value is increasing or does not change. The display selection table 1 (hit 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability change jackpot for deriving the probability change state and the base value is increasing or does not change.

  The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

  As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

  Further, even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease, if the base value has decreased, an effect is selected using the display selection table 3 and the selected effect is selected. You may switch.

  In addition, whether to display a specific effect for notifying a change in the base value may be determined according to the game state (game state). This is because if the player is constantly informed of the change in the base value, the player's attention to the effect of the special symbol change display game, which is the original pleasure of pachinko machines, will be neglected, and the consciousness of the player may be dispersed. Because there is.

  For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation where the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed with priority, and when the variation is not in progress, the base value increases. It is preferable to display a specific effect (effect serving as a measure of a change in the base value) at the time of or at the time of descending.

  The specific effect may be displayed at a timing when a time during which the special symbol change display game is not executed has continued for a predetermined time. This is because, if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the end of the special symbol change display game, the player's sense of tension is maintained and fatigue is accumulated. When a game ball wins at the starting port in a state where the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped, and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because a jackpot lottery is performed and a special symbol variation display game is started when a winning in the starting port is triggered, so that it is better to cause the player to pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

  The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th1) or in a situation where the number of out-balls has not reached the predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but may be always executed if the same condition is satisfied.

  Further, the specific effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, but may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because, when a player is notified of an increase in the base value, the expectation of the player increases, and if the base value does not increase to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to a gap with the expectation. is there. On the other hand, if the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, there is a player who raises the fighting spirit to increase the base value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display selection table is changed while the base value is decreasing and other than that (during rising or steady), but the display selection table is divided into three states, that is, when the base value is decreasing, steady and rising. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is stationary (whether the base history value is equal to the current base value) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

  Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol change display game. In this case, there is a higher possibility that the base value will drop when displayed during a non-special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

  In a state where the game ball does not win at the starting port and the special symbol change display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. In addition, if the special symbol change display game is not performed for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 69 (A) is a display example of the normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol fluctuates. FIG. 69 (B) is a display example of the special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing a rock-paper-scissor match, and the result of the rock-paper-scissors determines the medium symbol. FIG. 69 (C) is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is changing. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are fighting, and the medium symbol is determined according to the result of the battle.

  FIG. 69 (D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which a stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is reduced at a position where the recognition of the decorative symbol is not hindered (for example, the lower right portion of the screen). Display that can be recognized. FIG. 69 (E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which a stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is reduced at a position that does not hinder the recognition of the decorative symbol (for example, at the bottom of the screen). Provide a display that recognizes continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as the position does not hinder the recognition of the decorative symbol. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative symbol. For example, a display that pops up at the center of the display screen may be used.

  The example in which the degree of change of the base value is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, but the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed as a numerical value, instead of the upward and downward tendency of the base value.

  The displayed change in the base value is the sum of the base value calculated in the predetermined time period and the comparison result of the base value calculated in the time period before the predetermined time period and the base value calculated in the current time period. It may be the result of comparison between the latest total and the base value.

[9-8. Calculation based on specific general winning openings]
Next, a description will be given of a process of accurately calculating a base value in consideration of winning in a specific general winning opening.

  In the pachinko machine, the player aims to win a particular winning opening (for example, the open winning opening 2005 or 2006 in an open state) in which the gaming ball is likely to win during the big hit, and the game ball is played. Adjust the launch intensity. Even during a big hit, a game ball is fired by aiming at the same place as a so-called normal hit and aiming at the special winning opening 2005, or a so-called right-handed shot aiming at the special winning opening 2006 by increasing the firing strength to the maximum. There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed to arrange a starting port or a general winning port downstream of the special winning port and pick up a ball spilled from the special winning port.

  Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that is driven right during the big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player makes a right hit in order to make the open game winning prize a game ball. Many of the game balls fired toward the game area win the open special winning opening 2006 which is being opened. As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment is provided with the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, and the right-handed game ball is being opened. When the player does not win the special winning opening 2006, the player wins the general winning opening 2001. In other words, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-playing game ball does not win the open big winning opening 2006.

  The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the starting port and the general prize port when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (that is, the payout number for 100 out balls). (The ratio of the number of prize balls issued), the number of game balls that have flown into the game area but have a low probability of winning in the starting port and the general winning port (high probability of winning in the large winning port) When counted as (the number of out-balls), it is assumed that when calculated as the base value, it deviates from the actual base value.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the special winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls winning the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine for calculating the base value in consideration of the specific general winning opening is as follows.
70 and FIG. 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt period occurs. FIG. 71 and FIG. 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls is omitted, but it can be realized by combining FIG. 70 to FIG.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70 is performed to calculate the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle. Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 70, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated. In addition, it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls (specific number of winning balls) to a specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning balls from the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  It should be noted that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46), it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

  After recording the total prize ball count and the total out ball count in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 71, in order to calculate a base value at a timing when the number of award balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition, the number of award balls is recorded in a buffer Record the number in the out ball count buffer. In FIG. 71, the same steps as those in the base calculation area update processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is an award ball, the acquired number of award balls is added to the award ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of award balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and a timer for informing the award ball abnormality is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818), and the obtained number of out-balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning port associated with the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning port, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning port is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display processing (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 72, a base value is calculated in consideration of the number of specific winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display processing described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball count, and the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the award ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total award ball count (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the award ball count buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball count buffer value is added to the total out ball count (step S893), and the out ball count buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the award ball count buffer value with the threshold Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-passing balls stored in the out-ball count buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball count buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the exit and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area and is the number of out balls. If the result of determination is that the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out-balls, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out-balls is equal to or more than the threshold Th2, the award-ball number buffer value is added to the total number of award balls (step S897), and the award-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the number of specific winning balls is subtracted from the total number of out balls, and the threshold Th2 is added (step S899). The winning ball buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball buffer (step S900).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of award balls by the total number of out-balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out-balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after a lapse of 32 clocks, the quotient is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value. Note that when the total number of out-balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error. Therefore, the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display processing ends.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total prize ball count and the total out ball count are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value maintains the same value, and if the total prize ball count or the total out ball count is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at a timing when one of the total prize ball count and the total out ball count is updated, or the base value may be calculated at a timing when both of them are updated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated by excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting port and the general winning opening, so that the deviation from the actual base value may be different. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

  In addition, the case where the general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the special winning opening 2006 with the pachinko machine that strikes right during the big hit has been described, but the invention according to the present embodiment aims at the large winning opening 2005 by the normal hit during the big hit. A pachinko machine can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a starting port or a general winning port downstream of the special winning port 2005.

  In the game area 5a, large winning prize openings 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which do not normally accept game balls but allow game balls to be accepted according to the jackpot lottery result. Prize balls resulting from winning in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the special ball change display game is started by the game balls winning in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, and from the time the special symbol is determined until the large winning opening 2005 or 2006 is opened (big hit opening), the large winning opening During the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol change display game (big hit ending), the detected out-ball is excluded from the number of out-balls as a special prize. In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether or not a special prize is being performed in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing with one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In other words, during the special prize means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Also, all times during a right-handed instruction may be included. Further, in the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, the special award may be included. Further, in a game state other than during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 until the closing thereof (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The period up to the required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize.

  Also, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 that normally does not accept a game ball but can accept a game ball according to a result of a lottery of a normal symbol is arranged. The prize sphere obtained by winning the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 to perform a normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variation display game starts, and the normal symbol is determined and then released (opening). During the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol change display game (ending), the detected out ball is excluded from the number of out balls. In the case where the second starting port 2004 repeatedly opens and closes based on the result of the normal symbol lottery, the time from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the award. In this manner, all winnings in the second starting port 2004, not only during working hours, can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

  In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls other than during the special prize (eg, jackpot, time saving, etc.) can be accurately counted without determining whether or not the special prize is being performed in step S810 of FIG.

  In this way, the number of out balls and the number of award balls while the player is right-handed can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

  In some pachinko machines, it is recommended to play a game by left-handing in a state that is neither a big hit nor a time reduction (a so-called normal state), and play a right-handed game during a big hit or during a time reduction. In such a gaming machine, there are provided a general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002 for winning when left-handed, and a general winning opening 2001 and second starting opening 2004 for winning when right-handed. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning ports in the center from the left side of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting left) and the right side of the gaming area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right), The ball entry rate to each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the left-handed base value differs from the right-handed base value.

  The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player makes a left-hand hit in the normal state. However, as described above, when the base value differs between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value for right-handed in a normal state is designed to be lower than that for left-handed). When the player makes a right strike in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

  In the hall, the pachinko machine having a low base value is considered to be abnormal and is inspected, or is judged to be a gaming machine having poor payout performance. Even in a pachinko machine determined to have a poor ball-out performance (lower than the assumed base), the hole determines that the player is performing a left-handed operation. Make adjustments to increase the ball entry rate of general winning openings. Then, the nail having the abnormality is adjusted to increase the base value. When the gaming machine adjusted in this way is left-handed, many prize balls can be obtained even in a normal state. In other words, you can receive many lotteries for a small amount. In other words, even if the base at the time of left-handing is not different from what the hole assumed, the hole is misunderstood and adjustment is made to increase the ball entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening at the time of left-handing. Since there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantaged by such a player's malice, it is necessary to accurately calculate the left-handed base value and the right-handed base value.

  By the way, a pachinko machine that performs a right-handed operation during a time reduction has a second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on a game state, and a gate unit 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004, when a right-handed operation is performed. The game ball is arranged in an area where the ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by right-handing to the normal state, even if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is performed, the probability of the ordinary figure winning is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 is not opened, Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

  Here, in order to increase the base value in the right state in the normal state, the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate into the second starting port 2004 will reduce the profit of the hole. Therefore, game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state are counted, and when calculating the base value, a corrected base value may be calculated using the number of passing balls of the gate unit 2003.

  Specifically, in the normal state, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as a specific winning ball number. A high base calculation can be obtained by reducing the number of out-balls. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate unit 2003, an extremely high base value is calculated. In addition, the degree of the correction process may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

  Further, the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (for example, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without winning the start port), (Conditions may be set), and the number of out-balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate unit 2003 may not be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage through the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as “Please return to left” may be output without positively notifying the player that the result is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the right may be notified to the hall that the right-hand driving is being performed. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the fact that the player is right-handed may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall.

  As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area in which the game ball rolls at the time of right-handing) from the number of out-balls, the right-handing in the normal state. The base value at the time can be corrected to a large value. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the base calculated value from fluctuating due to the game style of the player.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
In view of the role of the base value in checking the operation status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be held for a long period of time. Also, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. For this reason, the base calculation / display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for deleting the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, accurate data of the number of prize balls can be held, and an accurate accessory ratio can be calculated.

  Specifically, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supply to the main control MPU 1311 is shut off and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. By the second operation to cut off, all data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. In the second operation, a single switch for realizing this operation may be provided, or an employee of a game arcade disconnects the connector of the backup power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 May be shut off.

  In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only data related to the progress of the game, while the second operation erases the calculated base value. And all data including data related to the progress of the game.

  With such a configuration, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation of a game hall attendant, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of a state where the accessory ratio is high can be prevented. .

[9-10. Calculation based on winning abnormalities]
FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update processing in consideration of the winning abnormality.

  In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, a winning abnormality may be detected. For example, when a winning is detected other than during the opening of the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 due to the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variation display game, or the starting port 2004 due to a winning being derived in the normal symbol variation displaying game. If a prize is detected other than during the opening of, the prize is abnormal. That is, the abnormal prize ball count determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the prize ball count, and is mainly when many prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning prize is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a prize in a state where a prize cannot be won or a case where many prizes are detected in a predetermined time.

  Since the winning ball related to the winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct the amount and calculate the base accurately. For this reason, in the base calculation area updating process in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls relating to the detected winning abnormality.

  Note that, since the winning prize openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 are normally won only during the special prize, the winning prize balls in these winning opening are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and the winning prize is not counted. There is no need to consider abnormalities.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area update processing determines the current game state, adds the number of award balls to be paid out as a game value to an area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. I do. In particular, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 73, similarly to the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 39, the prize ball control processing (step S80) is performed in order to calculate the base value every time the timer interrupts. The total prize ball count is directly updated using the prize ball count calculated in (step S814), and the total out ball count is directly updated using the out ball count (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation area update processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG.

  If the gaming state is the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and therefore, the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the prize ball number or the out-ball count. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update processing may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of award balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and the number of award balls corresponding to the payout command that has received the acknowledgment (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receive the payout completion report from the payout control board 951 (the number of paid out prize balls). This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS.

  Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). In addition, it may be determined whether there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Further, although the game balls have won the starting openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit value, and even if the winning in the starting opening is not held, the winning balls are paid out, so that the total number of winning balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even when a game ball is awarded in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize ball due to the prize is generated, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is reduced. Since it is 0, the total prize ball count is not updated. The total prize ball count is recorded in the total prize ball count storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined as abnormal is obtained (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a prize in the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 is detected other than during the special prize (during the operation of the condition device) that occurs due to the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variation display game, If the winning in the starting port 2004 is detected while the game is not being opened due to the winning derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

  If one prize ball related to the prize abnormality is detected, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal, or if a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are detected, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal. Further, when a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal, or when a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined that the prize is abnormal. May be.

  Then, the total number of out-balls is updated so that the obtained number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the shooting-ball sensor 1020, the ejection-ball sensor 3060, and the like. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired. At this time, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the obtained number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or the obtained number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, and then the winning The number of winning balls that are abnormally reduced may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total out ball count is recorded in a total out ball count storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, every time an out ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated. As described above, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out-balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed in the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

  It is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls as in steps S815 to S817 of a base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74) described later, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is performed. May be stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted from the main control board 1310, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the payout control unit 952. May be transmitted.

  Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on both winning and outgoing to the winning opening is obtained, the number of awarded balls is stored in the total number of awarded balls (or in the embodiment described later, awarded ball number buffer). Then, the number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or an out-ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winnings to a plurality of winning openings is acquired, the total number of winning balls due to the plurality of winnings is determined by the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball number buffer in an embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when a prize is detected by a winning opening sensor of a winning opening having five prize balls and a winning opening sensor of a winning opening having three prize balls, a total of eight prize balls are counted as the total winning prize balls. (Or prize ball number buffer).

  The prize ball count may be added to the total prize ball count (or prize ball count buffer) only when the launch of the game ball is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total prize ball number (or prize ball number buffer). In addition, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is stopped. Alternatively, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected in a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total prize ball number or the prize ball number buffer. The prize ball count may be added to the total prize ball count (or the prize ball count buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when a hand or a finger is detected to be touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is determined as the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer. In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value of the prize ball due to an abnormality or an improper act of detecting the prize ball in a state where the game ball is not fired, and to prevent an incorrect display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, and therefore, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 74, the out-ball count is recorded in the out-ball count buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out-ball count satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation area update processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is during the special prize (step S810). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there is no winning ball, the flow proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of winning balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 74, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for calculating the base value is updated.

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of award balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the award ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

  Thereafter, the number of out-balls is obtained (step S818). The acquired number of out-balls is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether a winning abnormality has been detected (step S826), and the number of gaming balls corresponding to the winning determined as abnormal is obtained (step S827).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

  In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all the winning balls related to the prize abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the prize balls related to the specific type of the prize abnormality. It is not necessary to correct the out ball in a winning ball related to a particular type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of the winning sphere related to the winning prize, the prize sphere for the winning sphere may or may not be paid out. Whether or not to pay out a prize ball in response to the winning abnormality may be determined for each winning opening. In this case, winning prizes in which prize balls are not paid out are not counted as total out balls and should not be used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, with respect to a winning prize in which a prize ball is paid out, the prize ball may be counted as the total out ball, and the prize ball to be paid out may be counted as the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value. Even if a winning prize ball is paid out, the winning prize ball may not be counted as the total out sphere, the paid prize ball may not be counted as the total prize ball number, and may not be used for calculating the base value.

  For example, as a result of maintenance of a malfunction of a gaming machine (such as clearing of a clogged ball), a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting opening to compensate for a ball that the player will not lose. In such a case, a prize ball is paid out for a prize at the starting port. The winning at the starting port is detected as a winning error, but a prize ball is paid out. When the prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, and therefore it is not necessary to determine that the winning is abnormal. In this case, a prize ball is paid out at the winning opening (starting opening 2002, 2004) which is reflected in the calculation of the base value, and the winning prize ball is paid out at the other winning opening (large winning opening 2005, 2006) without judging a winning abnormality. It is good to determine a winning abnormality without paying out. A winning opening for determining a winning abnormality has a smaller number of prize balls paid out by winning than a winning opening for which a winning abnormality is not determined (three starting balls and fifteen winning balls for a large winning opening). For this reason, although a winning prize is determined at the winning opening, even if an abnormal prize is not determined at the starting opening, it does not become a large security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraud. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the out ball and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality that does not generate a winning ball, it is possible to match the number of winning balls with the out ball that causes the winning balls.

  As described above, it is possible to determine a winning abnormality in various winning ports, but a specific example of mounting on a pachinko machine will be described.

  First, the winning prize abnormality may not be determined in the general prize opening 2001, but may be determined in a prize opening other than the general prize opening 2001 (large winning opening 2005, 2006, starting opening 2002, 2004). Since it is difficult to simultaneously win a plurality of gaming balls, the general winning opening is a large winning opening 2005 or 2006 or a starting opening 2002 (a motorized accessory that opens and closes while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts). The ball can be compensated for the player by entering the general winning opening 2001 (a total of four) provided more than the total (three). In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by the employees of the hall, the operation for the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and the compensation for the exiting ball is easy. The reason why the employees of the hall can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning opening 2001 is often arranged collectively (in a divided area) in the game area, and the electric winning (large winning opening) This is because the decoration member (appearance) differs from the decoration member (appearance). In addition, when the number of prize balls for winning one ball in the general winning opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against improper behavior is improved. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only for a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), but may be determined for other general winning openings.

  In the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 having a large number of prize balls, no winning abnormality is determined, and the winning prize opening other than the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 (a general winning opening 2001 having a small number of prize balls, a starting opening 2002 or 2004). An abnormality may be determined. The large winning opening has a large number of prize balls per winning of one ball, so that even a small winning ball greatly changes the base value. For this reason, the change of the base value can be easily inspected when inspecting the pachinko machine, which is convenient. It should be noted that a special winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 in which a game ball can be easily inserted by hand) may not be used to determine a winning abnormality, but another winning opening (for example, 2006) may be used to determine a winning abnormality. .

  In addition, the winning abnormalities may not be determined in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the winning abnormalities may be determined in the winning ports other than the starting ports 2002 and 2004 (general winning ports 2001, large winning ports 2005 and 2006). Since the starting port has a smaller number of prize balls for winning one ball than the large winning port, it is possible to compensate the player for a ball while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against goto. Note that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific starting port (for example, the starting port 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the other starting ports 2004 may determine the winning abnormality.

  Furthermore, in the special winning opening and the starting opening, the opening / closing member of the winning opening is located at a position where the opening / closing member of the winning opening can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine. Alternatively, a winning abnormality may be determined in a winning opening where the opening / closing member of the winning opening is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, in a winning opening where the employee of the hall has difficulty operating the opening / closing member. For example, when the opening / closing member vertically positioned in the closed state is inclined to the oblique position, the employee of the hall can easily operate the winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening / closing member picks up a game ball. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is closed by the flat member, and when the flat member is retracted to the back, the entrance to the winning opening (the so-called belochu) is opened. Is difficult to operate. By doing so, the security level is relaxed by limiting the winning port used for compensating for the ball to the player, so that the employees of the hall can easily understand and improve the security resistance of the gaming machine.

  Further, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the abnormal number of prize balls described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, displaying a game board or a frame). It is preferable that the notification of the winning abnormality is looser than the notification of other abnormalities such as lighting or blinking of the decorative lamp, output of voice, sound effect, and warning sound. Specifically, the time of the abnormality notification is short, the character that reports the abnormality is small, the lamp does not light when the abnormality is reported, or the volume of the abnormality notification sound is lower than the volume of the notification sound at the time of another abnormality (suppression ).

  Further, in the notification of the prize abnormality, an abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after detecting the prize abnormality, and even if the prize abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the abnormality is initially set without extending the predetermined time. The notification may be ended in a predetermined time, or the mode of notification may be changed. In this way, when the winning prize abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not an improper act by the player. Therefore, by notifying the winning prize for a predetermined time and not continuing the notification thereafter, the work efficiency of the gaming machine can be improved without interrupting the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Further, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be understood that the maintenance work of the gaming machine is not hindered and the work is continuously performed correctly. Specifically, the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued, but the notification by the sound may be stopped (or the volume may be reduced).

  In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correcting means for correcting the number of out-balls based on the number of winning balls, and the correcting means classifies the plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (start-up opening, large winning opening). For the first type of winning opening, the number of out-balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected while the predetermined condition is not satisfied (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning opening, The number of out-balls is not corrected based on the winning sphere detected other than during the establishment of the condition (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the number of out-balls when compensating a player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and to accurately calculate the number of out-balls. An abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as adjustment (maintenance). Thereby, an accurate base value can be calculated and displayed.

  So far, the detection of the winning abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detecting of the winning abnormality (when not detected) have been described. However, the gaming ball determined to be the winning abnormality is not the prize ball acquired in the game, but the pachinko machine. Since it is highly likely to be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls determined to have a winning error be not reflected in the number of out balls and not used for calculating the base value.

  In addition, a winning prize detected in the base calculation area update processing shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection processing of the timer interrupt processing (step S84), a prize abnormality display command is created with the prize abnormality as an abnormal state, and transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). The notification of the prize abnormality may be performed when one prize ball relating to the abnormal prize is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of prize balls relating to the abnormal prize are detected. Further, when a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are continuously detected, the notification of the prize abnormality may be performed, or when a predetermined number of prize balls related to the prize abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the prize abnormality is detected. Notification may be performed.

  Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be ended when the winning port is opened next (the condition device is activated).

  It is not necessary to notify the winning prize.

[9-11. Calculation of Base Value Utilizing Characteristics of Arithmetic Circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division processing for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without hindering other processing than when the CPU 13111 executes the division by the program. The base calculation process described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

  That is, in connection with the calculation of the base value, in the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23), in the switch input processing (step S74), the detection signals from the ejection sphere sensor 3060 and the shooting sphere sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out spheres is read. Is counted, and in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated. Thereafter, in the base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of award balls and the number of out-balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

  Thereafter, in the base calculation / display processing (step S89), a base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

  Since the timer interrupt process is executed at every predetermined time, the predetermined process must be completed at every timer interrupt. Therefore, in a slow division process by a program, a time-consuming process is included in the timer interrupt process. That is, it has been difficult to include a plurality of base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be reduced, the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

  Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the time when the value is written to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the operation circuit 13121 to the time when the operation result is read from the division result register A 131218. That is, the 32-clock wait time from the input timing of the dividend and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively used, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timings of the dividend and the divisor are different from the output timing of the quotient, the degree of freedom in the base value calculation process in the timer interrupt process is improved.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98), and the description of the same processing will be omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program to first switch the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74). In the switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, a detection signal from a sensor for detecting a winning ball, a detection signal from a switch for detecting cheating, a detection signal from a discharge ball sensor 3060, and a detection signal from a launch ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls is read. Is counted.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base calculation process 1 (step S97). In base calculation processing 1, the total number of out-balls is updated using the number of out-balls counted in step S74, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation processing 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (Step S76) and a random number update process 1 (Step S78).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a prize ball control process (Step S80). In the prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written into the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base calculation process 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total prize ball count is updated using the prize ball count calculated in step S80, and a base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command receiving process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (Step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (Step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, the base ball is not calculated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation processing 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out-balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the obtained number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls. The number of out-balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation processing 1 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. It is stored (step S9708). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

  After that, similarly to the above-described step S908, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or abnormal base value) is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command is a display command to the peripheral control unit 1511 when notifying a base value using a display device (liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244) or a speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. And sound output commands. Also, when the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 notifies, the base notification command is sent to the LED elements because these display devices are configured with 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by a driver, a drive signal including a character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, a drive signal for lighting each LED element is a base notification command.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG.

  As a result, if the gaming state is a special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so that the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the prize ball number calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of award balls cannot be obtained or the number of award balls obtained is 0, the base calculation processing 2 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. It is stored (step S9812). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value need not be calculated. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value need not be calculated. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process for each predetermined time (for example, one minute longer than the timer interrupt process). By not performing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) required for calculating the base value can be reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

  Next, another example of the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. The base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out-balls and each predetermined number of award balls.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, the base ball is not calculated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation processing 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out-balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the out-ball number is added to the out-ball number buffer so as to add the obtained number of out-balls to the out-ball number buffer. The sphere number buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out-balls stored in the out-ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball count is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball count storage area (specifically, the out-ball count storage area is represented by 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out-balls can be determined to be 128 or more.)

  If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 ends.

  On the other hand, if the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total-out ball count is updated so that the out-ball count buffer value is added to the total out-ball count (step S9705), and the out-ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation processing 1 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. It is stored (step S9708). After a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value (step S9709).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, if the gaming state is a special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of award balls calculated in the award ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and if there is a award ball, that is, the obtained number of award balls is 1 or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there is no winning ball, the process advances to step S9808 without updating the number of winning balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer. The sphere number buffer is updated (step S9804).

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize ball is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, the various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 can be used.

  The abnormal number of prize balls means that, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, a prize corresponding to 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in a general prize port or a start port) at a predetermined time other than during the special prize Ball) is obtained. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls.

  Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on a value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is made up of 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out-balls can be determined to be 128 or more.)

  If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, so that the base is not calculated, and the base calculation processing 2 ends.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so that the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

  Note that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall every time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball buffer, or the prize ball number described later becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the prize ball number paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217. It is stored (step S9812). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) is read from the division result register A 131218 and set as a base value (step S9813).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 has timed out (step S9815). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time. However, the end of the notification is determined such that the prize ball abnormality is notified for a predetermined number of shot balls. You may. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95). Is omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program to first switch the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74). In the switch input process, detection signals from the ejection ball sensor 3060 and the shooting ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out-balls is counted.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out-balls is updated using the number of out-balls counted in step S74, and parameters for calculating the base value are written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a timer update process (Step S76) and a random number update process 1 (Step S78).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a prize ball control process (Step S80). In the prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written into the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of awarded balls is updated using the number of awarded balls counted in step S80, and a parameter for calculating a base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command receiving process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process of reading a command from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generating a command for notifying the base (step S95).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (Step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (Step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is the same as the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, the base ball is not calculated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation processing 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out-balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the obtained number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls. The number of out-balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 3 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing the steps after step S9813 from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, if the gaming state is a special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the prize ball number calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of award balls cannot be obtained or the number of award balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

  In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out-balls is not stored in the division input register B131217. In step S9812 of FIG. 82, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of award balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is used as the division input register A131216. , And the total number of out-balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base display process (step S95).

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) from the division result register A 131218 and sets it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process for each predetermined time (for example, one minute).

  Next, another example of the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. The base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of outgoing balls and each predetermined number of prize balls.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. If the gaming state is during the special prize, the base ball is not calculated because the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation processing 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out-balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is obtained (step S9702), and the out-ball number is added to the out-ball number buffer so as to add the obtained number of out-balls to the out-ball number buffer. The sphere number buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be obtained or the obtained number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be immediately terminated. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessary calculation of the base value.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out-balls stored in the out-ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball count is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball count buffer value may be compared with the threshold Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball count storage area (specifically, the out-ball count storage area is represented by 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out-balls can be determined to be 128 or more.)

  If the out-ball count buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, and the base calculation process 1 ends.

  On the other hand, if the out-ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total-out ball count is updated so that the out-ball count buffer value is added to the total out-ball count (step S9705), and the out-ball count buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9706).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out-balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out spheres is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation processing 1 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criterion for determining whether or not a special prize is being given can be used as described with reference to FIG. Then, if the gaming state is a special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation processing 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of award balls calculated in the award ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and if there is a award ball, that is, the obtained number of award balls is 1 or more. Is determined (step S9803). As a result, if there is no winning ball, the process advances to step S9808 without updating the number of winning balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). If there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer. The sphere number buffer is updated (step S9804).

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize ball is abnormal. There are various methods for reporting the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, the various methods described in step S816 in FIG. 46 can be used.

  The abnormal number of prize balls means, for example, that a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in a general winning opening or a starting opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. And so on. Note that a plurality of allowable ranges may be provided to determine the degree of abnormality in a plurality of steps based on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls.

  Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of award balls stored in the award ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the determination may be made based on a value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is made up of 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, the number of out-balls can be determined to be 128 or more.)

  If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not time to calculate the base value, so that the base is not calculated, and the base calculation processing 2 ends.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or larger than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so that the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. It is set (step S9810).

  Note that the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall every time the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball buffer, or the prize ball number described later becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. In this case, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the prize ball number paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation process 2 ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A 131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

  In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out-balls is not stored in the division input register B 131217. In step S9812 of FIG. 85, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is set in the division input register A 131216. , And the total number of out-balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total prize ball count / total out ball count) from the division result register A 131218 and sets it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player or the hall employee.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed out (step S8903). Then, when the prize ball abnormality notification timer times out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined based on the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time. However, the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of shot balls. Is also good. Further, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and before the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit The input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing at which the division result can be read from 13121. Specifically, the timing of writing the input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or in the special symbol or the ordinary symbol. It is better before the control processing (steps S86 and S88).

  Further, whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value may be determined based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of winning balls determined for each winning opening, whether to use the number of winning balls or the number of out balls for calculating the base value may be switched. For example, the prize ball of the winning opening that gives the largest prize ball to one prize ball may not be used for calculating the base value.

  Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) given when a game medium defined for each prize port provided in the game area wins is one, three, or three. In the case of three types of prize balls, the maximum five prize balls and the corresponding number of out spheres do not have to be used for calculating the base value. This is because when a winning with a large number of prize balls is used for calculating the base value, the calculated base value changes greatly, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). ), The displayed value sometimes changes frequently. In such a case, it is difficult to determine whether or not the pachinko machine is exhibiting the predetermined performance (for example, whether the pachinko machine has the set payout rate) by the hole.

  Further, the minimum number of one prize ball and the corresponding number of out spheres need not be used for calculating the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, and the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing means are rounded without using the one prize ball for the calculation of the base value. If the value is displayed (rounded, rounded up, rounded down, or the like), the displayed base value may not change, so that processing that does not contribute to the change in the display may be omitted.

  Also, the case where the number of prize balls is maximum and minimum has been described, but the number of prize balls having an intermediate value between the maximum value and the minimum value may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum prize balls are used for calculating the base value, the maximum and minimum are averaged to indicate the number of prize balls and the number of out balls which indicate the operation of the entire pachinko machine. A base value can be indicated.

  Although the description has been made with the three types of prize ball number patterns, the present invention is not limited to the three types of prize ball number patterns.

  Furthermore, if the winning of the number of prize balls of a specific type (one of the minimum value, three of the intermediate value, five of the maximum value, etc. described above) is not used in the calculation of the base value, the winning is determined. All winnings in the gaming state at the time of detection may not be used for calculating the base value. For example, when a winning in a winning opening that gives five prize balls is not used for calculating the base value, in a gaming state in which a winning in the winning opening is detected, the winning is not performed until the end of the gaming state. Do not use winnings in mouths or other winning openings to calculate the base value. Further, even after the start of the gaming state, the winning in the winning opening or another winning opening is not used for calculating the base value retroactively.

  In addition, the winning when the gaming state when the winning is detected occurs again does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected transits to another gaming state. The winnings up to may not be used in the calculation of the base value. This is because the pachinko machine is normal (for example, according to the set payout rate) by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls in the gaming state in which the calculated base value changes greatly in the calculation of the base value. This is to eliminate the possibility that the judgment is delayed.

  It should be noted that when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the maximum (or minimum, middle) prize ball for one winning ball need not be used for calculating the base value.

  Next, a specific process in which the number of awarded balls and the number of out-balls are not used for calculating the base value based on the number of game media (prize balls) described above will be described.

  In the switch input process (step S74), when a detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for the calculation of the base value. . For winnings determined not to be used for the calculation of the base value, the total prize balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the calculation process of the base value is not executed. I do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and the number of the winning balls is excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation is performed. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. When all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation processing 1 (step S97) and the base calculation processing 2 (step S98) in FIG. 75 need not be executed.

  In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the out ball count, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. When all the detected winnings are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation processing 3 (step S93), the base calculation processing 4 (step S94), and the base display processing (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. You may.

  As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, a method similar to the method of correcting an out ball due to abnormal winning described in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be employed.

  In this case, whether the detected winning is used for calculating the base value is determined based on the number of winning balls, so that the base calculating process 1 (step S97), the base calculating process 2 (step S98), and the base calculating process 3 ( In step S93) and the base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether or not a special prize is being won.

  In this way, by excluding the number of out-balls and the number of winning balls required for a predetermined winning from the calculation of the base value, the processing is executed without skipping, so that it is easy to check whether the processing is correctly executed particularly in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (such as a lottery process and a process of determining a variation pattern) are accurately executed. it can.

  In other words, among a plurality of prizes having different degrees of advantage, even if the largest prize is given to the player, the largest prize is not used for calculating the base value, and the base value is displayed without being changed by the provision of the prize. You. Further, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize is provided.

[9-12. Another configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, a board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5 as the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is 4. Note that either one of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

  As described above, the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is an out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided below the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting-port sensors 2104, 2551, and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 The sum with the number is defined as the number of out balls.

  As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port that discharges the game balls flowing out of the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

  When both the board-side ejection ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting result of the board-side ejection ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B are compared to obtain two counting results. May be notified when a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. In addition, an error may be notified when a difference between two count results within a predetermined time exceeds a predetermined value.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 are switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. By operating the display switch 1318, the base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched.

  The configuration other than that described above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

  FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which the out balls are aligned in a single line in a ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board, and the number of out balls is counted by one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B. . The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, and the special winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the discharged game balls to flow down to the right side in a front view and align them in a single line. The frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one line.

  FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of a game board flow down in two rows and are counted by a plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 through the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the special winning ports 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that causes the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and align them in two lines. Each of the two frame-side ejected ball sensors 3060B counts the number of game balls arranged in each row.

  The frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, but may be configured as a unit with the ball flow path 960 so as to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a connection example between the ejection ball sensor and the main control board.

  The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to a connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

  The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected may be provided above the main control board 1310. The connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected may be connected to the main control board 1310. It is good to be provided under.

  The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are connected are provided separately. The output line of 3060A and the output line of frame-side ejection sphere sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

  The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) connecting the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. May be.

  Further, a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030 are provided in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows an arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5.

  The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects a winning in each of the various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (the position of the star in the figure). Is provided. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5 and partially overlaps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the out port 1111. This is to prevent calculation of an incorrect base value. That is, when the player moves the ejected ball sensor 3060 by bringing the magnet close to the out port 1111, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number, and the base value decreases. For this reason, the gaming shop may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine that has been subjected to a maintenance operation based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of pitches in the normal state increases, so that the player can play in a state that is more advantageous than usual and can obtain many pitches. In order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent illegal payout of the ball, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided near the out port 1111. Note that a magnetic detection sensor 1030 may be provided at a location other than the vicinity of the outlet 1111 where the ejected ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

  As shown, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 preferably has a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting the out ball with the plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060, the magnetism is detected in a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out opening 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 2005 provided above the out opening 1111).

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening). The output signals of the sensor 2554, the second lower winning opening sensor 2557, and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 performs level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal) on signals input from various sensors and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing specified by the main control MPU 1311.

  Specifically, an output signal from each sensor is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, a signal whose level has been converted or shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, The signal is input to one of terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result of each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311.

  The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the input of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the level of the input signal to each terminal is lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4 V) or a predetermined threshold (for example, the power supply voltage − 0.1 V), the disconnection of the connection line to the switch or the short circuit of the switch is detected. If the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold, the abnormal signal E is output. And outputs a signal of a level at which each sensor is OFF from the Y1 to Y8 terminals irrespective of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and an abnormality of the power supply is detected. At the same time, a signal of a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals irrespective of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. That is, even if an ON-level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit corresponding to the input is at the OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine the signal output from the sensor as valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to execute the processing of the input signal based on whether or not the power supply of the switch has been reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and to reduce the output signals of Y1 to Y8. Regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal at a level at which each sensor is turned off can be output.

  As described later, when detecting the abnormal signal, the main control MPU 1311 does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives a signal (the number of ejected balls and the number of awarded balls) from a sensor used for calculating the base value and a signal (eg, the gate sensor 2547) from a sensor not used for calculating the base value. . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. For this reason, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the calculation of the base, the calculation of the base is not executed, and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

  That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value, and when any of the signals becomes abnormal, Output an abnormal signal to stop the calculation of the base.

  FIGS. 93, 94, and 95 are diagrams illustrating mounting examples of the main control board 1310. FIG. 93A shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93B shows that the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are one. The example connected to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows an arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. FIG. 95 (A) is a front view of main control board 1310 housed in main control board box 1320, FIG. 95 (B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95 (C) is a right side view.

  As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, display data is output from different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333. Then, display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line from which the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 is output from the main control MPU 1311 and the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal do not cross each other.

  The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and may be provided above the main control board 1310. The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A, but also to other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the output lines from the magnetic detection sensor 1030. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided below the main control board 1310. The signal from the ejection ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back side, in which the solid line is the pattern on the back side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component side of the printed board. Is shown. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

  The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and passed through the driver 2 (1334) to the cathode-side segment of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Connected to terminal.

  In addition, a part (D1 to D4) of the data line output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333) and passes through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. Is connected to the common terminal on the anode side.

  A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) outputs the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 at the input timing. Then, data for controlling the blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). Further, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

  A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each of the latch circuits 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

  The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

  This is because, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, a pulse signal is transmitted on the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 The level of the data line with the base display 1317 frequently changes. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, a data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly, between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) becomes a cause of noise. When the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 crosses the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, noise is put on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines may also occur at the intersection of the wiring pattern on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board, or at the intersection of the wiring pattern on the inner layer and the surface layer (front surface, back surface).

  Specifically, when a reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur, the main control MPU 1311 is reset during the game, and the game may stop or the game state may be erased. . If the game state is erased at a timing that cannot be caused, the process is reset without executing the normal power-off process, so that the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the big hit ends, or the fluctuation display is performed. The game is ended in the middle, or the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is canceled.

  The main control board box 1320 is partially lower in height and higher in other parts depending on the height of the components attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other members when assembled. Has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the height of the main control MPU 1311 is high, the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted has the height of the main control board box 1320 which is high, and the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the figure, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as relatively high electrolytic capacitors are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and components such as short ICs are mounted (tall components cannot be arranged). The area where the main control board box 1320 is high and where the high parts can be mounted is indicated by hatching. Further, in a region where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed to have a height equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted / removed (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is preferable not to hinder the insertion and removal of the cable (connector) connected to the substrate.

  In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 in accordance with the height of the components mounted on the board, the goto action of mounting an incorrect component (circuit) on the main control board is suppressed. it can.

  In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged at the upper right portion of the main control board 1310. However, even if the main frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance, the display contents are not easily visible by the player. A display 1317 may be provided. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (confirmation of the presence or absence of a game ball in the replenishment tank), if the player can visually recognize the display contents of the base display 1317, the player In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display on the base display 1317, so that the player may be required to explain the display contents of the base display 1317, and in order to prevent such complication. In addition, the base display 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content. Further, by disposing the base display 1317 in this way, inquiries from the player can be suppressed. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value of the maximum number of active balls of 52,000, but the base value is different from the base value in the short-time game by the player. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The same is true of the above-mentioned accessory ratio display 1317, and the player's ratio indicator 1317 may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content.

  As shown, since the height of the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 is low, the main control board box 1320 is mounted in an area where the height is low.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93A, an example is shown in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are configured by light emitting diodes (LEDs), but may be configured by a lamp (bulb) or another light emitting element. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. I do.

  As described above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334.

  The latch circuit 1333 captures the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds the data until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

  Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the bus data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. Outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LED constituting the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

  For example, in order to turn on the first digit 7-segment LED (7 seg1) of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. It is output as segment data (when lighting is LOW). The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). More specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 turns on. Driven.

  In addition, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured by the latch 3 (1333) is read by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2 and the segment data (LOW when lit). ). The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured by the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is a common anode type in both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 in the 7-segment LED. Therefore, when the segment is turned on, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12 V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0 V).

  The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus as they are to the Q1 to Q8 terminals, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and have a data bus. A signal may be output from any one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data acquired from.

  Next, the output timing of signals when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 as shown in FIGS. 93A and 96 will be described.

  The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 via separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are: Output in one timer interrupt process.

  Then, in the next timer interrupt processing, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

  The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated in another process in the timer interrupt process and output at another timing in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area, thereby generating and outputting display data to the base display 1317. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game control code 13131 in the game control area to generate and output display data to the function display unit 1400. These data are generated by another program (code) and output at another timing.

  Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

  The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 is executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be executed subsequently.

  The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed in accordance with programs (game control code 13131, base calculation / display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same processing is performed. In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the timing, it is preferable to use control data common to the two codes and control the transmission timing of the common signal so as not to overlap. For example, a common counter used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 is provided in common. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is output. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when the values are 4 to 7.

  The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or by one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing a process of outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation / display code 13135 for executing a process of outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317, The subroutine may be called at a timing determined by a program to output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt processing. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called by a different timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 is provided. Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93B, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a driver circuit 1334 common on the common side. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of an example to be performed. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400. I do.

  As described above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes the latch circuit 1333 and the driver circuit 1334. The configuration of the circuit included in main control I / O port 1314 is the same as the above-described circuit configuration, and therefore, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is the common signal. It is common.

  In order to turn on the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured by the latch 3 (1333) are converted into the segment data (the lighting time is LOW) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. The drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured by the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

  As described above, by using a common driver circuit for the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of components, the failure rate is reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, as the main control board 1310, a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface is used without using an inner layer pattern (a printed board having three or more layers). For this reason, even if the components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of a two-layer board, an area for routing the wiring pattern cannot be secured, and the board cannot be larger than a three-layer or more multilayer board. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

  FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I / O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, a dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates a break of the timer interrupt processing (timing of the timer interrupt processing).

  In the timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. The latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and the driver 1 (1334) sets the common data (at the time of driving) corresponding to the digit specified by D1 to D4. Output HIGH).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be lit by the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) stores the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Then, the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is turned on.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment turned on by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) stores the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Then, the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is turned on.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1, and CS2. Thus, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

  In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, and repeats the above-described process to output digit selection data and display data. In this way, the common side driver circuit is shared between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the segment data is output in a time-sharing manner, and the common display data is used for the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 97, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, so that the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced, and high-density mounting (for example, In addition, it is possible to easily mount components on the main control board 1310 where it is not possible to employ a multilayer board or to arrange components close to each other.

  Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1313 is output at different timing from the segment data. Therefore, while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common data line, the display of both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

  In the case shown in FIG. 98, display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1), and is erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. For this reason, as shown in the figure, when the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is changed to the display time of the base display 1317. Be longer. This increases the lighting time in one cycle of the LED of the function display unit 1400 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increases the luminance, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the illumination of the hall. This is to prevent it. In addition, since the base display 1317 is disposed on the back side that is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED emits light at low luminance, the influence on the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

  Conversely, the display data of the base display 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display 1317 is displayed on the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating a change in a state (section) related to the calculation of the base value.

  On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the provisional section display and the fixed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, “bA.” Is displayed in the first two digits to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the last two digits as a two-digit percentage. Note that when the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, “99” is displayed, when it is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed, and when it is 0, “00” is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it is possible to display the base value A so that the user can know whether the base value A is 0% or 100%.

  Also, in the provisional section display, when the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are blinked (for example, a cycle of 0.6 seconds). , Which repeatedly turns on for 0.3 seconds and turns off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that an accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits are lit to indicate that an accurate base value has been measured.

  In the confirmed section display, the base value of the immediately preceding section is displayed. Specifically, “bb.” Is lit on the first two digits to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the last two digits are the base value of the immediately preceding section (lower digit of the previous period). The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed at a two-digit percentage. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value B is 99, “99” is displayed, when it is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed, and when it is 0, “00” is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, the display can be performed so that the user can know whether the base value B is 0% or 100%.

  In the first section, the base section is not measured because the immediately preceding section is a test section. For this reason, in the confirmed section display, “bb.” Is blinkingly displayed in the first two digits, and “−−” is blinkingly displayed in the last two digits.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) in which the number of out-balls is less than 500 since the first power-on is set as a test section and the base value is not calculated. This is because in a predetermined number of launches from the first power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the pitch may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stabilized, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. . For this reason, in the test section, the base value is not determined on the base display 1317 and the base value is not determined. Specifically, in the provisional section display, “bA.” Is displayed in the first two digits, “−−” is displayed in the last one digit, and “bb.” Is displayed in the first two digits in the confirmed section display. , "-" Is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, all digits of the base display 1317 are blinked to indicate that an accurate base value has not been measured. In the test section, the base value may be calculated, and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be determined.

  Here, the first power-on is defined as the first power-on after the pachinko machine 1 is completed, or immediately after the base calculation work area is initialized (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108). State. The power-on generally used in this specification is a power-on other than the first power-on.

  In addition, all the LEDs of all the digits of the base display 1317 may blink for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, or for a predetermined time after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). .

  In the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128 described later, when an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is deleted, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

  In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out-balls in all game states (during big hit, during normal game, during time reduction, during non-time reduction, during high probability, during low probability, etc.) reaches 52,000, the next section To measure the new base value. Note that the number of out-balls in one section is not 52,000, but may be another number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the daily operation time of the pachinko machine 1 is 10 hours, the daily operation (number of out-balls) of 60,000 may be adopted as the number of out-balls in one section. 50,000 or 100,000, which are good numbers, may be adopted.

  The number of out-balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, or the like) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out-balls in one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on a main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, when the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or the base section is restarted from the beginning of the current section. Good. Since the pachinko machine is frequently operated immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out-balls in one section is set to a large number after the business period, and the number of out-balls in one section is set to a small number after the business period. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means capable of setting an operation for determining the length of a section serving as a unit for calculating the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, based on the operation set by the setting means. Thus, the length of one section is set.

  As an example of displaying the determined section, an example in which the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured is displayed will be described. However, the base values of a plurality of determined sections (eg, the section 1 to 3 sections before) are switched and displayed. May be. At this time, even if the display is switched from the provisional section to the determined section 1 to the determined section 2 to the determined section 3 at predetermined time intervals, the provisional section, the determined section 1, the determined section 2, and the The confirmed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

  In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the fixed section display are not “bb.” But “b1”, “b2”, and “b3”. A different display should be used.

  In this way, the base display 1317 switches and displays the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section or sections at predetermined intervals. In addition, a display capable of distinguishing display contents is performed on a part of the base display 1317, and the measured base value is displayed on another part.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

  As described above, the base display 1317 is configured by a 7-segment LED of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits), and displays a number or a character by lighting or blinking the segment of each digit. Numerals 0 to 9 can be displayed, and letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L, and a minus sign can be displayed. In addition, decimal points can be displayed simultaneously with numbers and letters. The case where the number 6 is displayed simultaneously with the decimal point and the case where the number 9 is displayed are shown.

  FIG. 101 and FIG. 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization processing of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In the initialization processing shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the check code calculation processing (step S50) and the check code storage processing (step S52) are deleted as compared with the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. For this reason, the calculation of the check code of the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program to perform an initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510 or the like)) has elapsed. A determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30), and step S24 is performed. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). The process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power-off is used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. The area other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not deleted. Proceed to.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). When it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality where the power failure flag is not set (step S20). There is a RAM abnormality where the checksums of the RAM do not match (step S22) and an abnormality of the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area are deleted). Is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. In the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, unlike the illustrated case, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 May be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the gaming state will be lost and the normal processing cannot be executed. It is good to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. You don't have to clear it.

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in that order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is erased under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. I do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is deleted, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not deleted. When the base calculation area 13128 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased, so that the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of a game room attendant, and the abnormal base value is concealed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine whose base value has been modified to a high state or a low state.

  The main control MPU 1311 performs an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in the various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RAM initialization process is executed. A power-on command setting process for transmitting to the 1510 (step S32) is executed, and execution of an interrupt process including a timer interrupt process is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal (step S36), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), a random number update process is executed (step S40).

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power failure processing (power failure setting means). In the power-off process, first, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited (step S42), the output port is cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and checks the calculation result of the checksum in the RAM 1312. It is stored in the sum area (step S48).

  Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed appropriately (for example, every time data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the main-board-side power-off process. As described above, the data used for calculating the base value is stored in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, so that the data for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are obtained even when the power is turned off. And a base value in long-term operation can be calculated.

  The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

  Further, a value indicating that backup has been normally performed is stored as a power failure flag in the backup flag area (step S56), and writing of “01H” indicating writing prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing to the RAM 1312 (step S56). S58) Wait until the power is restored after the power failure (infinite loop).

  FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area illustrated in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

  The base calculation area 13128 is composed of a part of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as described above.

  The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for the base value A, the base value B, the section counter, the total number of out-balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving award balls.

  The storage area for the base value A is composed of one byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area for the base value B is composed of one byte, and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section for which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated each time the section is switched, and is used to control display contents that differ depending on the section. It should be noted that the section counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter = 0 in the test section, the section counter = 1 in the first section, and the section counter = 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Further, the section counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than 255 as a value from 0 to 255, and the section counter becomes 2 or more after the second section.

  The storage area for the total number of out-balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out-balls regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of out-balls is used to determine switching of a section that is a unit of measurement for the base. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the operation of one day is generally regarded as one section, and the base value in each section is measured. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the total number of out-balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting the number of all out balls regardless of the game state for each section. (The total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

  The storage area for the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of out balls for calculating the base value (the number of out balls in a game state other than during the special prize). Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability / non-time-short prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and stores the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in a game state other than the special prize). Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability / non-time-saving balls and the storage area for the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls need only be an area of 2 bytes or more. It is better to do.

  The above-mentioned storage capacity (the number of bytes) of each storage area is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out-balls in one section.

  When a main area and a backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is provided instead of the update process of the accessory ratio calculation area in step S81. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Note that the same steps as those in the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first sets RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1, and switches the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74), a timer update process (Step S76), a random number update process 1 (Step S78), and a prize ball control process (Step S80).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and sets the base calculation area 13128 ( The base value is calculated (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the award ball control process (step S80), but may be executed in an earlier order to ensure execution at every timer interrupt. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command receiving process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). (Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92).

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt processing, so that the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

  FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the base calculation process.

  The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  By executing the base calculation program, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensors (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening sensor 2554, second winning opening sensor 2554) When there is an abnormality in the lower ball winning opening sensor 2557 or the like and the ejected ball sensor (board side ejected ball sensor 3060A, frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated by the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is determined that there is an error that cannot be made. In addition, when it is determined that a fraudulent activity has been performed (for example, when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, when the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, and when the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is determined to be accurate. Is determined to have an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is an error, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, it is determined that an error (for example, magnetic, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) accompanied by a game stop is an error (YES), and an error not accompanied by a game stop (for example, award ball abnormal, door open, etc.). A failure that is not directly related to the calculation or the base (out of supply, a full tank error, etc.) may be determined to be not an error (NO). In other words, the base calculation process may be executed even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal states, and the base calculation process may not be executed if there is another abnormality.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out-balls is detected by the launching ball sensor 1020, the ejecting ball sensor 3060, and the like. In the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, the out-ball is detected. The number of spheres = 1 is obtained. When out balls are detected by the plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by each sensor is acquired as the number of out balls. That is, in one timer interrupt process, a plurality of out balls may be detected.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of winning balls (step S8015). As described above, the number of prize balls is obtained from the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process in step S80. The number of award balls obtained in the base calculation process may be the number of award balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of award balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951, and the number of award balls corresponding to the payout command that has received the acknowledgment (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and receive the payout completion report from the payout control board 951 (the number of paid out prize balls). This variation is as described with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball has been detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If no out-ball has been detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing the processing relating to the out-ball. On the other hand, if an out-ball has been detected, the detected out-ball count is added to the total out-ball count stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 since the first power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0 which is the initial value. Has become. Thus, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined that the section is a test section. If it is a test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the flow proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is during the special prize (step S8019). Whether or not a special prize is being determined can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The state that the gaming state is in the special prize means that the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and the player can acquire many prize balls, but includes the time of opening and ending the big hit game. You may. When the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time from the closing of the special winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. Also, all times during a right-handed instruction may be included.

  Further, in the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, the special award may be included. Further, in a game state other than during the time reduction, during the probable change (during the ST), and during the power support, a predetermined time after the opening of the starting port 2004 until the closing thereof (for example, until a ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The period up to the required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize. Note that the so-called “latent game state” which is a high-probability game state but does not become a time-saving state (during electric support) is not included in the special prize, and is the same as the normal state (low-probability / non-time-saving state). The base value may be calculated using the number of award balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal game state and the latent game state, and the base value may be displayed so that it is possible to identify which base display is to be performed.

  The latent game state is a game state that does not allow the player to recognize that it is a high probability state even if it has a high probability, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, the frame is opened during business hours In some cases, the player looks at the base display 1317 and recognizes that the player is in the latent game state (ie, high probability). In other words, in a case where the employee of the hall grooms the winning opening or sheds the ball in the out opening with the frame opened, the player can know the gaming state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the hidden game state.

  On the other hand, in the hall business, there is a case where it is necessary to manage the base value in a low probability / non-time saving state, and when calculating the base value including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage according to the hall business form . Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding the hidden game state. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business mode of the hall, it may be desired to manage (examine) the base value separately for each game state. .

  When calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using a dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. May be. By calculating the base value using a common calculation process, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

  The electric actuated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculation of the base value. As described above, during the special prize regarding the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the condition device is being operated (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of prize balls and the number of out-balls other than the special prize, a normal (so-called big hit) prize in the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 is not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (a so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, a winning prize ball and a prize ball other than during the special prize (low probability or non-working time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically actuated actors (grand prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value regardless of the playing state (whether or not a special prize is in progress). The other characters (starting opening 2004) are not used, and whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls for the calculation of the base value is switched according to the gaming state (whether or not a special prize is in progress). Will be.

  In addition, the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened even when the condition device does not operate (so-called small hits). In general, a small hit occurs during a short working time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win, so that it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated other than during the special prize (at a normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during a time when there is a high possibility of winning. In this case, the winning balls and the prize balls to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated during the special prize may be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly cope with the base value standard, and it is possible to improve design flexibility.

  If the gaming state is during the special prize, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low-probability / non-time-saving out-ball count, since the out-ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of out-balls detected in step S8014 is to be used for the calculation of the base. The determined number of out-balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, when an out-ball or award ball other than the special prize is detected, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a winning ball has been detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If no prize ball has been detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball has been detected, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not a special prize is being made may be the same as in step S8019.

  If the gaming state is during the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low probability / non-time saving prize ball count. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 is to be used for the calculation of the base. The number of the awarded balls thus added is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, since the out ball or the prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls is reduced to the low-probability / non-time-out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by the number, and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter to determine whether or not a test section is being performed (step S8028). If the section counter value is 0, indicating that the section is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out-balls has a predetermined value of less than 500 since the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and indicates that the section counter is a test section. If the total number of out-balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

  As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is during the test section and it is the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds from the test section to the first section, and the process proceeds to step S8032. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (Step S8032). The section counter changes from 0 representing the test section to 1 representing the first section. Then, the total number of out-balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). With this processing, the test section is completed, and the process proceeds to the first section.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the section is not in the test section, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out-balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out-balls is smaller than 52000, the flow advances to step S8034 to continue the current section.

  On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is 52000 or more, the section ends, and processing for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area in the base calculation area 13128 and writes the base value A into the base value B storage area (step S8031). Thereafter, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the section counter is controlled so as not to be larger than any one of 0, 1, and 2, that is, 2. Therefore, even if 1 is added to the section counter when the section counter value is 2, The section counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out-balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving award balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (Step S8036).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display described with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds) and display the same. The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the confirmed section display is a cycle of blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is less than 6000 in each section. It should be much longer. This is because if the blinking and the display switching are at the same period, the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand, so that the blinking display is displayed. This is in order to make it easy to understand whether the switching is performed.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code is calculated using the same calculation method as that for calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization processing (FIG. 22). In addition, when the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, adjacent bits of the check code may be set to a value of a plurality of bytes that do not have the same value (for example, A55AH (1010010101011010B for two bytes). To). Instead of setting fixed values in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, a first fixed value is stored at the head of the base calculation area 13128, a second fixed value is stored in the middle, and a third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure the check code with a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining a RAM abnormality.

  As described above, according to the base calculation process of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value can be set without delay at the timing of each occurrence of a prize ball or each occurrence of an out ball ( (In real time) and determine whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay. Note that the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small as compared with the capacity of the game control area 13126. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

  In addition, when the base value is calculated and displayed using the estimated number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated prize signal, when the prize ball is calculated and displayed as the base value, and when the prize ball is paid out Are different. That is, a state in which the payout device is abnormal and the prize ball is not paid out (the supply device runs out, the upper plate is full, the payout number counting sensor provided in the prize ball passage, the payout motor fails, or the like). Base value is calculated and displayed.

  In the above-described base calculation process, each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process, the base value is calculated using the number of out-balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. In this manner, even when the timing of the above-described section switching (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which of the preceding and following sections is to be calculated as the base value. , Can display an accurate base value in real time.

  Also, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update processing (FIG. 46), it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. Alternatively, the award ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed out, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is performed. May be stopped.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base display data generation process.

  The base display data generation processing is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation processing.

  By executing the base display data generation program, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, five seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to zero. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when the display switching counter reaches 2499. Therefore, when the display switching counter is 0 to 1249, the processing in steps S8042 to S8045 is executed. Executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation processing of the present embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

  If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying “bA.” In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the current section is a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying “−−” in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

  If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the current section is the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past determined section, data for displaying “−−” in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability non-time-saving balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the number of low-probability non-time-saving balls is less than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls is smaller than 6000, the number of running (the number of out-balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, and the base value may not be stable. The display of the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls is 6000 or more, control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 is turned on without blinking (step S8052).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the process proceeds to step S8055 without initializing the display switching counter. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition has been completed, and the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

  As described above, in the timer interrupt process (base calculation process) executed every predetermined time, the display content on the base display 1317 is switched by using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, so that the current time in the provisional section is changed. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the determined section can be displayed in an easily understandable manner.

  In addition, since the base value is blinked in a range where the base value is not stable in each section, whether the base value is in the stable range or in the range where the base value is not stable can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of the base calculation process. The modification shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation shown in FIG. 105 except that a base calculation work check process (steps S8012 and S8013) is added. In FIG. 108, the process up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process will be described, but the processes in steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

  By executing the base calculation program, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S8012). If it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect (step S8013).

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in that order, and the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

  In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). It may be determined whether or not 13128 is normal (step S8012), and after performing necessary processing based on the determination result, whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value may be determined (step S8011).

  Subsequent processing (steps S8014 to S8014) is the same as that in FIGS. 105 and 106, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the base calculation processing shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal at each timer interrupt (ie, every 4 milliseconds). Display of a simple base value can be suppressed.

Next, a method of determining an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The value used for the calculation of the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the “character size calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 26 is referred to as the “base calculation area 13128”). It is determined whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. The process (timing) for performing the normal / abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step includes the following variations.
FIG. 101 and FIG. 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
FIG. 21 and FIG. 22: The check code calculated at power-off is determined at power-on (initialization processing).
106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation processing (timer interrupt processing) is determined in the base calculation processing (timer interrupt processing).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and is determined when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) at power-on will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the initialization processing is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 105 and 106), the base calculation area 13128 A check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data.

  In step S24 of the initialization processing (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. As a result, if it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct (step S26).

  When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so that the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup areas 1, 2 , N in that order, the data in the backup area initially determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

  In this case, the frequency of the check code determination is low, and the consumption of the calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and is determined when the power is turned on)
Next, a process of determining the check code calculated at the time of power-off at the time of power-on (initialization process) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the initialization processing is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, and the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off processing of the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

  In step S24 of the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. As a result, if it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct (step S26).

  In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

  In this case, the frequency of calculation and determination of the check code is low, and the consumption of the calculation resources (main control MPU 1311) related to the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated by timer interrupt processing and determined)
Next, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 108 and 106).

  In step S8012 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. As a result, when it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect (step S8013).

  In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area is normal in steps S24 and S26 may be omitted.

  In this case, an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

  When a fixed value is used for the check code instead of the checksum, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Also, the determination may be made by using both the checksum and the fixed value as the check code.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating calculation of a base value when the gaming state is switched.

  One game ball won while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) was open, and thereafter the predetermined number of variable display games ended, the time saving state ended, and the state returned to the normal state. Thereafter, in a normal state, it is assumed that a game ball wins in the opening port 2004 being opened.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display in accordance with the winning of the starting port 2004. That is, the illustrated variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in connection with any winning in the starting opening 2004 is performed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball during the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting opening 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, The second winning ball is added to the number of low-probability, non-timeout balls.

  In the above description, the case where the time saving state ends is described.

  A similar phenomenon occurs at the time of occurrence of the big hit in the special symbol change display game, in addition to the end of the time saving state described above. It is assumed that, in the normal state, one game ball wins while the start port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then the big hit state starts, and further, a game ball wins in the open start port 2004.

  In this case as well, a variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in connection with winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is performed. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the number of low-probability / non-timeout balls, but the second winning ball has a low probability.・ It is not added to the number of non-hours out balls.

  Further, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is opened, a specific error occurs after that, and further, a game ball wins in the opening port 2004 being opened. . As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error for which the base value cannot be accurately calculated based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), Do not use the sphere for base calculations.

  In this case as well, a variable display game in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in connection with winning in any of the starting openings 2004 is performed. On the other hand, since the out ball in which a specific error has occurred is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the start port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball is added. Is not added to the number of low-probability, non-timeout balls.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls which have been won during the operation of the electric auditors character under specific conditions (such as at the end of a time reduction, at the time of a big hit of a special symbol variation display game, at the time of a specific error, etc.). May be used for the calculation of the base value and may not be used for the base calculation, and the change of the special figure can be started in any of the winnings.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the pre-reading effect of the special symbol variation display game on hold, the first prize winning in the starting port 2004 in a time-saving state is not a target of the pre-reading effect, and is in the normal state. The second winning prize may be a target of a look-ahead effect. Conversely, the first prize winning in the starting port 2004 in the time saving state may be a target of the prefetching effect, and the second prize winning in the normal state may not be a target of the prefetching effect.

  Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the positive change state (ST) or the power support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in processing outside the game control area (for example, base calculation processing) will be described.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration relating to a storage area in the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in FIG. 18 as a whole, but FIG. 110 shows the configuration related to the storage area in detail.

  The main control MPU 1311 includes a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU as storage areas for storing data. The auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU exclusively temporarily stores data when the program is executed by the CPU 13111 (for example, a flag indicating a state of a calculation result, an execution state of the program, data input / output to / from the CPU 13111). In the CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142, for example, a random number value updated in the random number update process (Step S40 in FIG. 22) and an intermediate value in the random number value update operation are temporarily stored. Also, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the address of the jump destination are temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the processor core 13141 executes the processing corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, values input to the ports from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, values in the process of creating edge information of a signal input from the switches and detection results of edge information) are temporarily stored. To be stored.

  When a random number is acquired and stored in the holding storage area at the time of winning the starting opening, the random number value is temporarily stored in the CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142, and the temporarily stored random number value is stored in the holding storage area of the RAM 1312. To memorize. In addition, when a random number at the time of starting opening winning is obtained and a pre-read determination (winning determination at the time of starting opening winning) is performed based on the value of the random number, the randomness temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is obtained. The prefetch determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number stored in the reserved storage area may be read (again) into any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU to perform the prefetch determination.

  The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from a memory space configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name (for example, Area0) of each storage area included in the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. . The CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C.

  The auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13145C are composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area 0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is formed for every predetermined number (7 in the figure) of storage areas. Thus, access from the processor core 13141 is enabled for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and 13145C.

  As described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be performed by switching a plurality of storage areas for each group by one CHANGE instruction. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0, and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 to group 0.

  The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

  The storage area (Area0 to Area5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data at the time of program execution, and one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. Even if a plurality of sets are set (for example, 2 bytes = 16 bits in which Area0 and Area1 are paired), it can be used. For this reason, 8-bit data or 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without generating extra capacity in the storage area. Further, the storage area (Area 6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity of an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of the other storage areas, and cannot be used after being divided into 1-byte storage areas. As described above, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by the storage areas having a plurality of capacities, and the storage area that can be used in any combination is provided. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, an address can be specified in one (or a set of combined) storage areas. Therefore, the number of command arguments can be reduced, and the command can be executed with a small number of clocks.

  The switching unit 13143 switches the group of storage areas that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

  The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area that can be accessed by the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. The switching register 13144 includes, for example, data for identifying the auxiliary storage area 13145 to be selected (for example, 2-bit data for switching four areas), and an abnormal flag indicating that switching was not performed normally. (When the abnormality flag is set, the switching command is executed again), and an unauthorized access flag set when an abnormality occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 has changed is stored. Good to be.

  Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity / overflow flag, a zero flag, a sign flag, and the like) indicating the state of the operation result.

  In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 without depending on the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be provided. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program for the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and illustrates a specific example of a portion that calls the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returns from the base calculation process.

  In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the process proceeds to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.

  After that, the data of the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

  In the base calculation processing, before starting the processing shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the CHANGE instruction is used to use the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt processing in the callee's base calculation processing. Switch to group 1. As described above, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be switched collectively by one instruction (ie, a small number of steps).

  Further, the stack pointer value being used in the timer interrupt processing is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is saved. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction, and the stack area is changed.

  After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation processing is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt processing is restored from the address zzzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the callee to the group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the caller by a CHANGE instruction, and then is switched to the timer interrupt processing of the caller by a RET instruction. Return. In general, an instruction for switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 and an instruction for restoring data saved on the stack have different roles. However, in this embodiment, after returning from the base calculation process to the timer interrupt process, By returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. For this reason, in this embodiment, the auxiliary storage area 13145 does not have to be switched to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation processing is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

  As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing an argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

  Thereafter, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. The saving and restoring of the data of the switching register 13144 may be performed by using other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) without using the push or POP as the stack operation instruction.

  Then, after permitting the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

  Note that the interruption may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interruption processing, and the interruption may be permitted by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interruption processing. Further, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag without using the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

  Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where the interrupt is disabled, it is not necessary to further disable the interrupt or permit the interrupt in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the state in which the interrupt is permitted for some reason to the interrupt prohibition. In this case, the interrupt prohibition state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

  In the above-described example, the saving of the switching register 13144 is executed by the timer interrupt processing of the caller, and the switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the switching of the stack area are executed by the base calculation processing of the callee. The two processes may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves outside the game control region and when the process returns to the inside of the game control region. An example in which the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched in the caller's timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of the program for the timer interrupt process and the base calculation process, and shows a specific example of a part that calls the base calculation process from the timer interrupt process and returns from the base calculation process.

  In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is prohibited by the DI instruction before the process proceeds to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interruption by the interruption between the DI instruction and the EI instruction without interruption.

  After that, the data of the switching register 13144 is saved to the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. Thereafter, the CHANGE instruction is used to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt processing to group 1 used in the callee's base calculation processing. As described above, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be switched collectively by one instruction (ie, a small number of steps).

  Thereafter, the program is executed from the start address xxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

  In the base calculation processing, before starting the processing shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt processing is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is written. Evacuate. Thereafter, the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer by the LD instruction, and the stack area is changed.

  After the preparation for executing the base calculation processing is completed, the processing is executed from step S8011 in FIG. 105 or FIG. After the base calculation processing is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt processing is restored from the address zzzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

  Thereafter, when returning from the base calculation processing, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the callee to the group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the caller by the CHANGE instruction, and the game is executed by the POP instruction. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. The saving and restoring of the data of the switching register 13144 may be performed by using other instructions (for example, the data transfer instruction LD and the exchange instruction EX) without using the push or POP as the stack operation instruction.

  As described above, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before the base calculation process is called by the return of the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 does not have to be switched by the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

  Then, after permitting the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt process is continued, the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

  As described above, the interrupt may be prohibited by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing is started by directly operating the interrupt enable flag without using the DI instruction or the EI instruction, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

  Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where the interrupt is disabled, it is not necessary to further disable the interrupt or permit the interrupt in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the state in which the interrupt is permitted for some reason to the interrupt prohibition. In this case, the interrupt prohibition state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

  In FIG. 111, an example in which the timer interrupt processing, the base calculation processing, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 are switched has been described. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched also in the inspection processing executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, at the beginning of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing by a CHANGE instruction. Further, an initialization process (step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22), a main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), a power-off process (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21) The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched between the timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23, 75, 80, etc.) and a different auxiliary storage area 13145 may be used for each processing.

  Furthermore, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed in the game control area (for example, main processing on the main control side, timer interrupt processing, and the like) and processing outside the game control area (for example, debug ( The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched between processing (for example, debugging processing, base calculation processing, and the like) executed in the inspection function) area and the base calculation area, and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 are used separately inside and outside the game control area. Is also good.

  In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control-side main processing and the timer interrupt processing. However, since the main control-side main processing being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt processing is started, the timer interrupt processing is started. At the start of the processing (for example, at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing), the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137, and at the end of the timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of the timer interrupt processing). The value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 may be returned to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

  For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (byte) storage areas, if the unit is saved to the stack area one unit (byte or word), the number of instructions for saving increases. Similarly, the number of instructions for restoring data from the stack area increases. Also, in this case, if the order of processing is wrong between data saving to the stack area and data recovery from the stack area, different data will be read from the stack area, and the subsequent processing may not be performed accurately. . Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and collectively restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area, The above problem can be solved.

  Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved to the stack area, the stack area overflows, and there is a possibility that data outside the area that is scheduled as the stack area (such as a stack area for another use) is rewritten. is there. Therefore, in addition to the instruction to collectively store all storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas in the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area is provided. Alternatively, an instruction for collectively restoring a plurality of storage areas arbitrarily designated in the auxiliary storage area 13145 saved in the stack area may be provided and executed.

  As described above, the processing is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145 when moving to processing outside the game control area, and is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145 when moving to processing within the game control area. The process can proceed without saving the saved data to the RAM 1312 (for example, a stack area).

  Further, when the process shifts to processing outside the game control area, the switching register 13144 is saved to the RAM 1312 (for example, a stack area), and when the process shifts to processing within the game control area, the switching register 13144 is restored from the RAM 1312. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when proceeding to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be restored without being restored from the RAM 1312.

  Also, when switching to processing outside the game control area, switching to another stack area is performed, and when switching to processing within the game control area, switching to the original stack area, the stack area used in processing within the game control area is The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

  Further, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, a stack area) when the processing shifts to processing outside the game control area, and the value saved when the processing is shifted to processing in the game control area is used for switching. Since the value is restored to the register 13144, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the processing outside the game control area, and the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

  FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 and the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. In the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted from the arrangement on the memory described above with reference to FIG. 26 is shown in the RAM 1312, but the stack area is also provided in the RAM 1312 shown in FIG.

  The ROM 1313 stores a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a base calculation / display code 13135, and a base calculation / display data 13136. Contains the storage area. In the ROM 1313 of the present embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133 A debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 and the like And a base calculation area (third storage area) for storing a program used for calculating a base value, such as a base calculation / display code 13135 and a base calculation / display data 13136.

  When a free area of 16 bytes or more (unused space) is provided between the last address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, and displayed in a dump list format The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished from each other. Similarly, a free space (unused space) of a predetermined length is provided between the last address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation / display code 13135. If the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more, it is desirable that the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format. However, the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. Note that the value stored in the free area may be a fixed value that is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area or a value with a low frequency. Also, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code that the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

  Also, the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is only necessary that the game control area and the other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing between the game control area and other areas, the debug area (debug (inspection function) code, debug (inspection function) data, ) And a base calculation area (base calculation / display code 13135 and base calculation / display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and a defect (bug or the like) of the base calculation / display code 13135 is applied to the game control. Avoid the danger of affecting.

  In the debug (inspection function) area, programs and data that are not directly related to the game are stored. For example, in addition to the game control of the pachinko machine 1, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 are used. A code 13133 for outputting a test signal is stored. The debugging (inspection function) code 13133 is a program for outputting a debugging (inspection function) signal. In the base calculation area, a program for calculating a base value that is not directly related to the progress of the game is stored.

  The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The game control code 13131 can be read and written to and from the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can be read only from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Can be executed, and writing to the area cannot be executed. In this way, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debugging (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed during execution of the game control code 13131, but the game control code 13131 is converted from the debugging (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

  Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). As described above, the base calculation / display code 13135 is designed separately from the game control code 13131 and stored in another area, so that the inspection of the base calculation / display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed. The inspection can be performed separately, and the labor for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The base calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debugging area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

  The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and is readable and writable from the game control area 13126. The game control area 13126 cannot write data from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but can be read-accessed, and can perform the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation. The display code 13135 can refer to data stored in the game control area 13126.

  The debugging area is an area in which data used by the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area can be accessed by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation / display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the debugging (inspection function) code 13133, but only data reading is permitted and data writing is prohibited.

  The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area where data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which data used by the base calculation / display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is used exclusively for temporarily saving data stored in the CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. Note that the stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

  FIG. 113B is a diagram illustrating details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to a main area in which a base calculation result is stored. One or more backup areas may be provided. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization processing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time data in the main area is updated in the base calculation / display processing, and is performed when the main control side power is turned off (see FIG. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization processing or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control-side power-off processing (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. If a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it is determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the main control-side power-off process, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area (Step S54 in FIG. 22). In the base calculation / display processing, the value of the main area may be copied to the backup area at the end of the base calculation / display processing. What is necessary is to copy the entire main area or only the area of the updated value to the backup area when at least a part of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

  An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

[11. Record of game history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic Configuration of Gaming Machine for Recording Game History]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines an effect suitable for the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from among a plurality of effects prepared, and displays the determined effect on the main liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the device 1600. At this time, when it is determined that the specific effect (for example, two specific effects of the three types of super reach) among the plurality of effects is to be displayed, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the game state is switched. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 determines how many times the special symbol change display game has been performed and the specific effect has appeared (in other words, at what rotation the effect has appeared) along with the progress of the game. To display.

  Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, the super reach 1 appears at the 34th rotation of 10:25, and the result of the special symbol change display game is lost, at the 127th rotation of 10:54. Super Reach 2 appears, the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and Super Reach 2 appears at 428 revolutions at 11:30, the result of the special symbol variation display game is a probable big hit, Is displayed.

  The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot at the 15th rotation and the jackpot at the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect appearing up to the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or not based on the degree to which a specific effect appears (for example, if the super reach 2 appears within 50 revolutions after the end of the jackpot, it is considered that the jackpot will be won in a short time). In order to meet such a player's expectation, the appearance of the effect is visually displayed. Also, since the player does not fire the game ball while checking the degree of appearance of the effect, if the display that shows the degree of appearance of all the prepared effects is displayed, the player It takes time to check the appearance of the game, and the operation of the game console may be reduced. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (reach effect with a high degree of expectation for the jackpot) among the reach effects. The history of appearance for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like).

  As a specific process, when receiving the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores information on the number of fluctuations and the effect that has appeared. Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of times of change and the effect that has appeared based on the received change pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (the operation button 220C or the like) is operated, not all the produced effects but the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is displayed. Processing may be performed.

  When an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in operation, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and reported to employees in the hall. The form of this notification is such that an error screen shown in FIG. 115A is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or a detailed error screen shown in FIG. , An alarm sound is output, and an error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal plate 784. In addition, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 include those shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. An error occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is reported outside the pachinko machine 1 so that the employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the connection of the cable between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is faulty, “0” is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and Lights up blue.

  However, an error occurs due to various causes such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of a connector), a severe failure requiring replacement of parts, and a misconduct.

  The pachinko machine 1 in which the error has occurred must find out the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate. Searching for the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved early and the operation stoppage time of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  More specifically, the hall determines the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on a signal output from the external terminal board 784 using a hall computer. However, in searching for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal plate 784, it is desirable to select “the number of winnings in the general winning opening”, “the number of winnings in the large winning opening”, “the number of passing gates”, and “normal symbol variation”. Game history information such as "number" is required. If the failure of the pachinko machine 1 is solved by repair or replacement of parts, there is no major problem. However, when a game ball is acquired by wrongdoing, the opportunity for a normal player to gain profit decreases, and Could eventually disrupt the operation of the hall and eventually cause the hall to be difficult to manage.

  When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as “winning in the general winning opening”, “winning in the grand winning opening”, “passing through the gate”, and “normal symbols fluctuate” occur frequently, if all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, and the burden on the hall increases.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment stores data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 inside the pachinko machine 1, and makes it possible to refer to the stored data later. As a result, the details of the process up to the occurrence of the error can be confirmed.

  In addition, the time of occurrence of the events (the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the grand winning opening, the number of passing through the gate, the number of changes in ordinary symbols, etc.) generated in the course of the occurrence of these errors is recorded. Can determine how many events have occurred. For example, it is found that the number of winnings in the general winning opening is 50 per minute.

  When the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of the error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of the error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events have occurred during a predetermined time (for example, one minute), the information may be output as error information and reported.

  For example, in any game state, it is possible to win a general winning opening, so it is good to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more winnings are made in a predetermined time, but a big winning opening is won only during a big hit game. Therefore, the predetermined time may be set from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and error information may be output and notified when a predetermined number or more of the winning prize holes are won in the predetermined time.

  In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records a game history and outputs the data in a predetermined format.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed when the peripheral control unit is turned on according to the present exemplary embodiment. The peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 120 is obtained by adding the game history recording processing (step S1023) to the peripheral control unit power-on processing described above with reference to FIG.

  In the game history recording process, when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory. The game history is recorded as the date and time of occurrence of the event, for example, in a format as shown in FIG. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is turned off, it is preferable that the memory be recorded in an SRAM which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power.

  The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit regular process, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped halfway and some effects are not executed. That is, even if some effects are not executed (even if all effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is no effect, the game history is recorded prior to the effect. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of pachinko machines.

  Next, a process when the capacity of the memory of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit will be described. When the data amount of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory need not be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, Processing can be reduced.

  When the capacity of the memory of the game history to be recorded has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and the oldest game history may be deleted and the latest game history may be recorded. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 each time can be reduced.

  Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent useless processing from being executed. Therefore, other processes performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 (effect control, ramp) Control, sound control) and new processing (for example, processing performed over a plurality of peripheral control unit regular processings due to lack of processing time, using the available processing time) Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching a selection table) that is executed once in several peripheral control unit regular processes because it is not necessary to execute the process each time may be executed.

  Note that the received command may be analyzed immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) (step S1022), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table.

  The game history record condition setting table registers the types of commands recorded as the game history among the commands received by the peripheral control unit 1511 from the main control board 1310, that is, the events recorded as the game history.

  For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the purpose of recording the command occurrence conditions and the game history are as follows.

  For example, the start-up port 1 winning command and the start-up port 2 winning command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game balls are detected to enter the starting port 2002 and the starting port 2004, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the special symbol change, and the peripheral control unit 1511 The number of fluctuations can be counted.

  The power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The change start state command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the special symbol change, so that the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the special symbol change. The states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation are the four states of low probability / time saving, low probability / non time saving, high probability / time saving, high probability / non time saving. The number of fluctuations that have occurred can be counted. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that the jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol change display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is the jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol change display game. Is higher than usual. The time saving is such that the probability that the above-mentioned second starting door member 2549 is opened (or enlarged) becomes higher than the non-time saving time, or the time from when the symbol starts to change until the symbol is determined is usually determined. The second starting port door member 2549 is in a state of being opened (or enlarged) more frequently than a non-time saving state, such as being shorter. Along with this, the probability that an effect in which the time of one special symbol change display game is short is selected increases.

  The special winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the special winning opening 2005 and the special winning opening 2006, respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each of the special winning openings.

  The special winning opening 1 winning command (specified winning or less) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (specified winning or less) are won only in the special winning opening 2005 and the special winning opening 2006, respectively, by the number of game balls equal to or less than the specified number by the end of the round. Otherwise, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses (for example, from one second to before the next opening) after the closing of each special winning opening, and the peripheral control unit 1511 The winning state in one round to each winning port can be obtained. The special winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the regular winning) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the regular winning) are rounded when the game balls exceeding the specified number win in the special winning opening 2005 and the special winning opening 2006, respectively. Is completed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses (for example, from one second to before the next opening) after the closing of each special winning opening, and the peripheral control unit 1511 The status of winning in one round to each winning port can be obtained. This command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed after the closing of each of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, because a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls determined in one round is detected and the special winning opening is detected. There is a possibility that an undetected game ball may be present in the big winning opening when the game is closed, so that the winning situation can be accurately grasped even in such an over winning.

  The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous operation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a change to the jackpot state. Yes, you can count the number of jackpots. At the end of the jackpot operation, the destination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, so that the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the status after the jackpot.

  The small hit OP command is issued when the large winning opening is opened for a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds or a total opening time of a plurality of times is less than 1.8 seconds). Then, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

  The ordinary symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the ordinary symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol and count the number of fluctuations of the ordinary symbol. When a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

  Even when a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn (eg, when there is no overflow or memorization) even when a prize is entered in the starting port or passes through the gate, the main control board 1310 sends the starting port 1 prize to the peripheral control unit 1511. An hour command, a start port 2 winning command, and a general-purpose gate passing command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

  The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire an error occurrence timing and can count the number of error occurrences.

  The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins in each general winning opening 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. It should be noted that the number of the general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the case where three general winning opening 2001 are provided is illustrated above. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general prize ports 2001, so that four types of general prize ports from a general prize port 1 prize command to a general prize port 4 prize command are provided. Commands are defined.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the game history recorded in the memory.

  The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of the event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time at which the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time is recorded with a granularity up to minutes, but may be recorded up to seconds.

  By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the event (for example, a change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, and the like) generated in connection with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310. . For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and the RAM was cleared from the content of the command, and the game started in a low probability / non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the history of the hall starting business at 15:30, turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and starting playing after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), and winning the general winning opening 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 change start event of the history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol change event is determined based on the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (the type of the stopped symbol). You can see the result of the display game. The special figure 1 change start event of the history number 6 is generated at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special design change display game is executed based on the content of the received special design 1 design classification command (type of the stop design). You can see the result of Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variation display game is represented by a numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the variation of the special symbol. And the result of the variable display game (loss, usually 4 rounds, high probability 4 rounds, high probability 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

  Next, a method of referring to information (game history) recorded in the memory by the hall will be described.

  First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting information recorded in the memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. Then, when receiving the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

  When a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured with a history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be owned by a hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

  The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a connection via a cable via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via a short-range wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

  The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a history reference command dedicated to game history output, and a command that is not transmitted when a normal game is played after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (FIG. 121). May be used as a history reference command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command not defined in the command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. A history reference command may be transmitted on the condition of an event that cannot be performed (or is unlikely) even if the command is transmitted during a normal game. For example, this is a case in which 50 start-up ports or general prize ports are won in one minute. Further, the game history may be output when the commands used for the game control are received in a special order that is not normally possible.

  Note that an operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (a place invisible to the player) to display the game history.

  FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its periphery.

  The peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and transmits control commands and various information (various data) to the effect display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. A liquid crystal display that controls drawing of the exchanged peripheral control unit 1511, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the door frame side effect display device 460, and also controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The control unit 1512 includes a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that stores calendar information for specifying year, month, and day and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as a sub-control program for controlling the effecting operation to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various types of information (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and light emission modes such as various LEDs) that are continued across the peripheral control unit regular processing that is executed each time a signal is input. Information for managing schedule data, etc.) Peripheral control RAM 1511c and peripheral control for storing various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a jackpot game state or information for managing a special effect flag). It has an SRAM 1511d and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents in a state where power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. The stored content can be retained for about 50 hours by supplying backup power from the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d retains the stored contents. And lose their content.

  Further, power is supplied to a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. The game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is configured by a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of holding data of at least a part of the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to about one month.

  FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, an area for storing the game history may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in a package of the peripheral control CPU together with the peripheral control MPU.

  FIG. 124A shows a configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which an area for storing the game history is formed in a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown, the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Can be

  When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. The data in the area 1511d is not cleared.

  FIG. 124 (B) shows a configuration around the peripheral control SRAM 1511d which forms an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 124B, when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is not performed. The data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. For this reason, the effect control area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d and the game history storage area are desirably physically separated from each other.

  In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied without providing the backup power supply 1513.

  In each of the forms shown in FIGS. 124 (A) and (B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be any method having a procedure different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. Good. For example, when a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. It may be.

  When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from a normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The main control board 1310 continues to transmit a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a power-on command a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. In this case, or when a power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing the means for initializing the game history storage area as described above, for example, even if the gaming machine has been operating in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When this timer expires, a reset is performed by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each of the decorative boards of the game board 5 is based on the various commands. A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. A drive signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and a drive signal to an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 is transmitted. The door-side motor drive data for applying force is transmitted from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the door frame 3 A door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards from a frame decorative drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port to a peripheral control output circuit , Via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to a main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressing detection switch for detecting operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 220 are provided. Are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and are input to the serial I / O port for effect operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors and the like) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  As described above, according to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the game machine according to the present embodiment records an event that occurred during the game as a game history, so that the event occurred during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall is closed) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. Further, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power is input), the game history can be confirmed even after restarting the gaming machine.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the occurrence time. In addition, for example, when the starting opening 1 is won, (1) the fact that the starting opening 1 is won, (2) the time when the starting opening 1 is won, and (3) the event that occurs before the winning opening 1 is won. As described above, more information is stored in the pachinko machine 1 than information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. This is because the minimum necessary information (for example, (1) the information indicating the fact that the start port has been won) is output from the external terminal board 784 such as when the start port is won, and in a special case (for example, the cause of the error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed when the investigation is performed. This is because, when all of the information stored therein is output from the external terminal plate 784 when the winning opening is made, the output amount of information relating to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 increases, which may burden the hall. It is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and part of the information recorded inside the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal board 784. The information is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 so that the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked in special cases.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described. Note that some of the modifications described below change a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

  In the above-described embodiment, of the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, an event (command type) and an event occurrence date and time are recorded for a predetermined command. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the huge amount of events that occur during the game for a long time. For this reason, in the first modification (compact plan 1), a change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in the state are recorded.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table according to the first modification.

  In the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately as a command to count and a command that triggers a state change, and a command in which both attributes are set. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the obtainable state change column are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is required. .

  Upon receiving the command in which the attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that have triggered the command issuance as a result of the command analysis. In addition, when receiving a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of the command analysis, and counts the number of events. Add.

  For example, a power-on command, a fluctuation start state command, a jackpot OP command, a jackpot operation end transition destination command, and an error display command are commands issued according to a state change. It can be grasped as a change of the state of the jackpot state start, the jackpot state end, and the error state occurrence.

  Also, the number of events that triggered the issue of the counting command is counted using the counting command. Specifically, the number of winning balls to each starting port can be counted by the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of variations of each special symbol. The special winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls in each special winning opening. The special winning opening 1 winning command (specified winning or less) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (specified winning or less) can be used to count the number of rounds completed with the specified winning number or less. The special winning opening 1 winning command (greater than the regular winning) and the special winning opening 2 winning command (greater than the regular winning) can count the number of rounds that have exceeded the defined winning number (that is, over winning).

  The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol. The general-purpose gate passage command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit. The error display command can count the number of errors. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

  The game history of the first modification includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time at which the state change event occurred, and the state from the predetermined starting point. (Until the next state change event) and the total number of counting events detected until the end of the event. The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event). The predetermined starting point is a time when the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The states in which the counting events are separately recorded are assumed to be five states of a low probability / non-time saving state, a low probability / time saving state, a high probability / non-time saving state, a high probability / time saving state, and a big hit state. The state may be further subdivided.

  Next, the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 1 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as the counting events, the starting event 1 winning number, the starting event 2 winning number, the special symbol 1 changing number, the special symbol 2 changing number, the general winning opening 1 winning number, the general winning opening 2 winning number, The general winning opening 3 winning number, the grand winning opening 1 winning number, the grand winning opening 2 winning number, the number of passing gates, and the number of ordinary symbol changes are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those illustrated may be counted.

  It is sufficient that the storage area of the cumulative number of each counting event is 2 bytes. In particular, data that does not derive so frequently and does not increase the accumulated number (for example, the number of general winning opening prizes) may be 1 byte, and the other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange 2 bytes and 1 byte (or 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1 byte data and 2 byte data.

  When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and may be stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. Note that a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, while the counting event is counted, 0 may be stored as an initial value even if no data is stored in the created new record. Further, a new record may be created at the end of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event in the period is stored in the new record.

  When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and the total recorded in the work area is read. The numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event) is recorded as the game history, the count value of the count event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

  That is, each time a state change event occurs, the count value of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. Is initialized by a normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low-probability, non-time saving state, the information of the game history in which the number of wins to the starting port 1 is 50 in the work area (the peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the first modification. At 1, the game state is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d after the game state changes. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed in the low probability / non-time saving state, the 50 winning numbers are initialized to 0.

  Further, the count result of the count event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a counting event occurs, the count value of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by a normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  Even if the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, the recording of the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is continuously executed in the current state, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d need not be stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c from the peripheral control RAM 1511c when the state changes. Further, the game history (the cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  Even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, by executing the game history recording process, there is no need to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced each time. it can. Further, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

  Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, execution of useless processes can be prevented, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state during the switching is recorded. Long game histories can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the first modified example is characterized in that more information than the information output from the external terminal plate 784 is internally recorded.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, the condition under which a new record is created in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the condition is stored in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Information (game history) is not written. In other words, if a new record is not created in the game history storage area (while the same game state is being continued), it may be difficult to detect the wrongness. As described above, in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, the hole can confirm the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification, As long as the game state does not change, information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, even if information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function that can detect fraud at an early stage may be provided.

  Specifically, a first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the latest game history is recorded and a second record (a record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the current game history is recorded If the comparison result with the predetermined condition is satisfied, an error may be notified.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 that fires a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in the high probability / time saving state or the big hit game state, the so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1 transits from the high probability / time saving state to the big hit game state. When the state changes to the high-probability / time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, even if the state is switched, since the player usually makes a right-hand, there is a possibility that the general winning opening on the left side of the gaming area 5a may be won. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability / time saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. An allowable value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states may be one, and an error may be notified if a difference of two or more occurs. This is because when the player releases his / her hand from the firing handle, the firing force becomes uneven, and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

  Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects an error from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 by predicting a game (for example, a right-handed state because of a high probability and time saving state), so that an inexperienced player can There is a possibility of detecting an error when performing an unexpected hitting method. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error but only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. In this way, the clerk of the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a location away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and can prevent trouble with the player.

  As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described first modification, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the number of count events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of repeatedly occurring state is known. For this reason, in the second modification (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

  In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as the first modification.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the game history according to the second modification includes a history of state events and a cumulative count of each count event for each state. The history of the status event includes a status change event that triggered the status change of the pachinko machine 1, a status after the status change event, and a time at which the status change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the second modification, the cumulative count of the counting event is recorded in five states of the low probability / non-time saving state, the low probability / time saving state, the high probability / non-time saving state, the high probability / time saving state, and the big hit state. You. The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 2 includes a starter 1 winning number (starter 1 winning command), a starter 2 winning number (starter 2 winning command), special Number of symbol 1 fluctuations (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of special symbol 2 fluctuations (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning opening 1 winning (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of general winning opening 2 winning (general) Winning Port 2 Winning Command), General Winning Port 3 Winning Number (General Winning Port 3 Winning Command), Winning Win 1 Opening Number (Winning Win 1 Opening Command), Winning Open 2 Winning Number (Winning Open 2 Win Command) ), The number of passing gates (ordinary symbol gate passing command), and the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command).

  The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are separately recorded may be further subdivided.

  Next, the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the occurrence date and time of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative count of the count event counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the above-described count event corresponding to the state after the change is performed. Start recording the cumulative number of.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state is changed, the game history storage area (accumulated value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up when a power failure occurs, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  As described above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, and the like) for each type of state is recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the game.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In the above-described second modification, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the accumulated number of count events for each state is recorded. However, the timing at which the state is switched may not be important, and it may be sufficient if the number of events for each type of state is known. For this reason, in the third modification (compact plan 3), the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

  In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as the first modification.

  In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of the third modification is configured by the cumulative count of the count event in each state. Further, the game history of the third modification includes the accumulated time of each state. The reason why the cumulative time is included is to enable the hole to estimate the number of occurrences of the event (for example, the number of occurrences of jackpots) from the cumulative time. The states in which the counting events are separately recorded are five states of a low probability / non-time saving state, a low probability / time saving state, a high probability / non time saving state, a high probability / time saving state, and a big hit state. A counting event may be recorded.

  The counting event (and the command related to the event) recorded in the modified example 3 includes a starter 1 winning number (starter 1 winning command), a starter 2 winning number (starter 2 winning command), special Number of symbol 1 fluctuations (special symbol 1 symbol type command), number of special symbol 2 fluctuations (special symbol 2 symbol type command), number of general winning opening 1 winning (general winning opening 1 winning command), number of general winning opening 2 winning (general) Winning Port 2 Winning Command), General Winning Port 3 Winning Number (General Winning Port 3 Winning Command), Winning Win 1 Opening Number (Winning Win 1 Opening Command), Winning Open 2 Winning Number (Winning Open 2 Win Command) ), The number of passing gates (ordinary symbol gate passing command), and the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

  Next, the details of the game history recording process in Modification Example 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative count of the above-described counting event is recorded in accordance with the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state is changed, the game history storage area (accumulated value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up when a power failure occurs, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

  The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the accumulated value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the above-described game history initialization operation.

  As described above, in the second modification, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, and the like) for each type of state is recorded, so the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the game.

  As described above, with respect to the first to third modifications, when the game history recording process temporarily records the event in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) and writes the information in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, the data of the work area is written to the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. In the normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not deleted (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is deleted (initialized).

  Here is a brief description of the hall business. In many cases, the hall has business hours, for example, opening hours of 10:00 and closing hours of 23:00. For this reason, in a time zone in which there are many players, such as a time zone immediately after opening and a time zone in the evening, it may be difficult for the clerk to monitor whether the player is playing an illegal game. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of gamers decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine with a high probability / time saving state immediately before closing, the pachinko machine with a high probability / time saving state is initialized for business on the next day, and a low probability / May be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since there are few players, the pachinko machine in the high probability / time saving state can be monitored, so that it can be determined whether or not the latest game is fraudulent. In other words, considering the situation that some pachinko machines do not require the latest game history, an efficient game machine can be provided by allowing the clerk to select whether to keep the latest information.

  Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the latest event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area remains. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information that is recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately. By doing in this way, if you want to keep a record of all events recorded in the work area, if the clerk only needs to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine, if you want to erase the record of the event recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform the rum clear operation. As described above, the lam clear operation does not delete all the game histories but only deletes the game histories stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the latest event, as described above. This is because the event that has occurred before is not seen by the clerk (it is not seen because there are many players).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the information that the start port has been won, but also the winning in the general winning port unrelated to the lottery is once recorded in the work area. A symbol that starts to fluctuate due to winning in the starting opening, and a symbol indicating a lottery result of the winning in the stop mode of the symbol) does not fluctuate, even if the game ball is being shot in the game area 5a. It is characterized by collecting histories. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process executed at the time of the random lottery, but a process that may be executed at all times while power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

  If the player is in a low probability, non-time saving state, the game ball is fired so that the game ball wins to the starting port 2002, as in the so-called left-handed or short-shot beating. In such a case, the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 should be appropriately won. However, there is no (or extremely small) prize in the general prize port 2001, but there are many game balls in the starting port 2002, or conversely, no prize in the starting port 2002 (or extremely small). ), When many game balls are winning in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that cheating has been performed. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening where the game ball wins at the same time are set to be monitored, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined magnification of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. When the number exceeds the limit, an error may be notified.

  Further, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 instead of the error notification. In the above-described detection method, there is a possibility that an error is detected when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error but only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. In this way, the clerk of the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a location away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and can prevent trouble with the player.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, if one game (one change) is recorded, many games (long time) cannot be recorded. I have.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine according to the present embodiment has a setting function for changing, for example, the operating ratio of the condition device as the game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine having the setting section. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having the setting section viewed from the back side in an open state. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 in a closed state as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a setting unit of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch, and controls the display on the setting display 974.

  As shown in the front view of FIG. 132A, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and a setting for changing the setting value are provided on the setting board 970. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed set value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that receives a setting change operation.

  In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. The setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The determined setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As described later, the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970.

  The setting key 971 is used to insert a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion portion) and turn the key to a set position to maintain the short-circuit or open state of the contact, thereby changing to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode. Switch that outputs a signal that triggers the Note that another switch may be used instead of providing the setting key 971. In this case, by operating (long press) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started. A long press may end the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change mode may be started / terminated by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press) to start the setting change mode. The power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear processing is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 during the setting change mode.

  In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, the operation may be detected at the fall of the setting change switch 972.

  The setting change switch 972 is configured by, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select the set values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value increases by one, and when the setting value = 6, the setting value is set to 1 when the setting change switch 972 is operated. Note that the setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The set value is not limited to six steps, and may be smaller (e.g., two) or larger (e.g., eight).

  Further, the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972 without providing the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages, the key can be inserted and removed in the neutral position (normal position), the operation to start the setting change mode when turned to the left, and the setting to be set when turned to the right. This is an operation for selecting a value (turning to the right functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternate operation in which the left position and the neutral position can be held, and a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

  The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of a special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set values, the rate of probability change big hits, the rate of time saving (ST) after big hits, the number of time savings, the number of rounds and counts of big hits, the probability of hitting a regular figure, the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening. Various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

  The setting confirmation switch 973 is, for example, a momentary switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting the setting value to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so as not to operate both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be constituted by a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be constituted by a momentary toggle switch.

  Note that the setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be determined without providing the setting determination switch 973. Further, the set value selected in response to the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1 may be determined. For example, operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, operation of the operation button 220C, and ball lending button , The operation of the return button, the detection of winning of a game ball to the start-up ports 2002 and 2004, or the like, the selected setting may be determined. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by a player (used for a game) or a switch that cannot be operated by a player (provided on the back side of a pachinko machine).

  That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including the setting key) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the gaming performance on the pachinko machine 1, but one or two switches are provided on the setting board 970. It is enough if provided.

  Further, the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. For example, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press) to start the setting change mode. The power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear processing is executed. Further, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting change mode instead of the setting change switch 972, and the RAM clear switch is replaced with the RAM clear switch 973. The set value can be determined by the operation (long press) of the predetermined time 954 or more. Further, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

  The setting display 974 includes, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the setting key 971). . Note that the setting display 974 may be constituted by LEDs having a settable number of values instead of the 7-segment LEDs. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value is turned on to display the set value.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of a payout error is provided on the payout control board 951. The error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are used in combination. The selected set value or the current set value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dots may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dots may be turned on when displaying the set value. The display of the error type may be lit (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be blinking.

  In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated at the time of setting change are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of setting change is provided. Can be improved.

  In addition, as described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

  As still another form, the setting board 970 may be configured as a part of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, and the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 constituting the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5), and as shown in FIG. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so that it is difficult to operate keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. As described above, the right frame member 40 conceals the setting key 971, hinders insertion of the key into the key hole of the setting key 971, and makes setting change difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting substrate 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval. In this case, keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. As described above, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval, the setting is performed during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By making the operation of the board 970 difficult, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by the player.

  In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (setting change difficulties) in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a small interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a small interval. .

  The setting change difficulting means configured by a member provided to face the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970. In this case, the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting change mode may be covered with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover that prevents careless operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (eg, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 2. Note that the second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being started by an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to prevent an unauthorized player from changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

  The distance in which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is determined by the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

  The setting board 970 may be arranged near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when changing the setting are arranged near. By doing so, the operability when starting the setting change mode can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 131, a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1 is provided in the power board box 930, and the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 is initialized in the payout control board unit 950. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are different from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably, the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate the pachinko machine 1 from the back side during operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is operating. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is operating, thereby suppressing an illegal act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

  Similarly, it is desirable that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for selecting the platform of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a small interval so that the display is not visible. Normally, when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the set value is not known to the player. It is desirable. As described above, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-impairing unit that conceals the display contents of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display contents of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

  FIG. 132 (B) is a diagram of the setting board 970 viewed from above in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a small interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the setting key 971 The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

  On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the key hole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the key hole of the setting key 971.

  Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that the player can see from the front by the player. It is difficult to check the current settings of pachinko machines.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the setting board 970.

  Also in this modification, the setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in the present modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

  For this reason, the setting board 970 of the present modification is installed on the back side of the main body frame 4 instead of on the side, so that the keyhole faces the side. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is in the state of being housed in the outer frame 2 and the right frame member 40. , The head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and the setting board 970 is operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 even if the difficulty of arranging the boards is reduced. It is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided not on the main frame 4 but on the game board 5 and is connected to the main control board 1310.

  FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present modification. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting section as viewed from behind. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounts the game board shown from the back.

  The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132 (A) or the one shown in FIG. 133 (A).

  In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311 Controls the display of the setting display 974.

  The function and configuration of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those of the above-described embodiment, and the common description is omitted.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. For this reason, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may also be used, and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. Normally, the base display 1317 switches between a base value of a provisional section (section currently being measured) and a base value of a fixed section (straight line section) at predetermined time intervals and displays them. On the other hand, during the setting change mode, the selected setting value (to be set next) is displayed, and during setting confirmation (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

  In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, while the base value is displayed using four digits, the setting value may be displayed using only one predetermined digit (for example, the rightmost digit) and "-" may be displayed. The digits that are not used in the display of the set value may be not "-" but other numbers, characters, and symbols as long as they are not used in the display of the base value. When the set value is displayed, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set values are displayed in six stages of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

  Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the setting value is blinking while the setting value is selected, and the determined setting value is lit. Further, the current set value may be lit and displayed. In the base display, the first two digits represent the type of display data, and no numeral is displayed. Therefore, the set value may be displayed using the most significant digit. When the base display 1317 is used as the setting display 974, the setting value is displayed with priority during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation. Therefore, although the base value is calculated, the base value is displayed. Not done. Thereafter, when the confirmation of the setting change mode and the setting value is completed, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value.

  When the base display 1317 also serves as the setting display 974, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display content is displayed on the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation / display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game control area. By making the processing common, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

  On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is for calculating and displaying the base outside the game control area. When executed with the code 13135, processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and security can be improved.

  Further, the processing of setting change and setting confirmation may be executed outside the game control area.

  That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or doubles as the base display 1317 is included in the scope of the invention described in this specification. As described above, while confirming the setting change mode and the set value, the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 are displayed so as not to be confused, thereby preventing erroneous operation at the time of setting change and erroneous recognition of the set value.

  Further, even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not shared, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or fully lit while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Also in this case, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are finished, the base display 1317 restarts the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of indications on the main control board box 1320 during the confirmation of the setting change mode and the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of changing the setting and a misidentification of the set value.

  Although the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 in the illustrated example, the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

  The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting keys 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

  When the setting board 970 is sealed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening / closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 separates the setting board 970 vertically from the front and back of the setting board 970 or separates the front side box ( Or the cover) and the back side box may have a structure that can be opened and closed with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted in the direction in which the board extends from the side, the main control board box 1320 moves the extension direction of the setting board 970 between the front side box (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box. It is preferable to adopt a structure that slides in the direction of insertion of the key 975 and separates.

  In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. The setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is mounted on the right side (the left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 136, the game board 5 is mounted. When the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the interval between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. It is difficult to operate the switch. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting key 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting substrate 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval. In this case, keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. As described above, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a small interval, the setting is performed during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (setting change difficulties) in the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a small interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be disposed at a position facing the setting board 970 at a small interval. .

  The distance in which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is determined by the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

  As shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the dispensing control board unit 950 stores the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 in the initial state. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side, but the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are different from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be viewed and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably, the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize and operate the pachinko machine 1 from the back side during operation. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is operating. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is operating, thereby suppressing an illegal act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during a game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

  Similarly, it is desirable that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for selecting the platform of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a small interval so that the display is not visible. Normally, when the main frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the set value is not known to the player. It is desirable. As described above, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility-impairing unit that conceals the display contents of the setting display 974 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the display contents of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

  In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the top view of the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 132 (B) and 133 (B). . In this state, since the key holes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 are opposed to the right frame member 40 at a small interval, the head of the key 975 inserted in the key hole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

  Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and faces the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, so that the player can see from the front by the player. The current settings of the pachinko machine cannot be confirmed.

  Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initialization processing. The initialization processing shown in FIG. 137 is different from the initialization processing shown in FIG. 21 in that the RAM clear processing is performed when the setting key is operated (steps S17 and S30) and the CPU initialization processing (step S17). The difference is that the setting change processing is performed within S28). Note that the same steps as those of the initialization processing described above with reference to FIG. 21 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program to perform an initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510 or the like)) has elapsed. A determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, the data of the set value and the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the holding of special symbols and ordinary symbols, the prize ball) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312, ), And deletes the other data (step S30), and proceeds to step S24.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30), and step S24 is performed. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). The process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power-off is used in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. The area other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not deleted. Proceed to.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). When it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted because the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the setting of the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag abnormality that has not been performed (step S20), a RAM abnormality where the checksums of the RAM do not match (step S22), and an abnormality of the base calculation work (step S24). As shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) are detected. (E.g., probable change state, time saving state, holding special symbols and ordinary symbols, storing information on winning balls), clear other data, and do not clear the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area). . When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation is performed. The area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. In the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, unlike the illustrated case, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 May be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the gaming state will be lost and the normal processing cannot be executed. It is good to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. You don't have to clear it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is stored in the work control area 13126 (set value, game state data) for each data type. Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is deleted, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not deleted. If the set value is erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear operation is performed, and the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the set value is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch.

  For the processing after step S28, any of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

  138 and 139 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the setting change processing and the setting display processing. FIG. 138 illustrates a case where the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 (or configured integrally with the payout control board 951). FIG. 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

  First, a setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG.

  When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the main frame release switch. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main frame 4 may be omitted. .

  If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. As described above, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating unit. The start conditions of the setting change mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card). The setting change mode does not have to be started when there is a balance in the cash sand). Also, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of misconduct (for example, a magnetic error). The determination of these conditions may be performed after the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command instead of the payout control unit 952. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that a setting change operation is being performed by an unauthorized player. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. .

  (2) When the setting change mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

  (3) Upon receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear processing before the setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the special symbol and the normal symbol holding storage). , Prize ball information) and other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in the procedure (6), it is not necessary to clear the set value in this step.

  (4) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (5) When receiving the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the device is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode performs an initial operation of the accessory and performs a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, in the case of displaying the procedure or state of the setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting is changed. This is because it hinders the change operation.

  The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on), and the progress of the game may be stopped. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping detection of a winning ball or an out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, in the setting change mode, the base value is not calculated. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and notifies the setting change mode by functioning as the firing disabler. Is also good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

  (6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and the setting value = 0 is a state in which the setting has not been set. If the setting value = 0, the setting change mode cannot be ended, and the game (the game ball Launch, fluctuating game, etc.) does not start.

  (7) Thereafter, every time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

  (8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the procedure (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973 is determined. As described above, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating unit that determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is determined.

  (9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

  (10) If the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value has been confirmed. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may blink the decided set value for a predetermined time.

  (11) Thereafter, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

  (12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode ends, and the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. With this setting change end command, the determined set value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

  (13) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification that the setting is being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this is also ended.

  Note that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a predetermined time has elapsed. Assuming that the notification performed in step (5) is merely notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is captured from the viewpoint of detecting a fraudulent activity, the notification may be canceled after a lapse of a predetermined time after the setting change mode ends. This is because, when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to find that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

  When the firing of the game ball is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. May be.

  (15) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after the change of the setting is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) and the set value and the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol). , And the other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the setting value is not initialized in the RAM clearing process after the setting change.

  Then, the setting change mode ends.

  As described above, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or, the setting board 970 is formed integrally with the payout control board 951). The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 execute the setting change process in cooperation with each other.

  In the above-described processing, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (pulse of a predetermined frequency is transmitted a predetermined number of times), or a power supply voltage. Alternatively, an intermediate potential signal other than the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent a fraudulent act of starting the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key 971, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 by a signal which cannot be generated by short-circuiting the terminal. This is because transmission to the substrate 1310 is preferable.

  Next, a setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 illustrated in FIG. 138 (B) cooperate will be described.

  When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (while power is being supplied), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

  (1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main frame 4 may be omitted. .

  (2) When it is determined that the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

  (3) When receiving the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312, and transmits a set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

  (4) The payout control unit 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

  In the above description, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores the set value in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

  Next, a setting change process by the main control board 1310 illustrated in FIG. 139A will be described.

  When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Thus, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change allowable state generating unit. Whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the main frame release switch. The detection signal of the body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a body frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the body frame opening detection switch. Also, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the body frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main frame 4 may be omitted. .

  If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. The start conditions of the setting change mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and insertion of a prepaid card into the CR unit (prepaid card). The setting change mode does not have to be started when there is a balance in the cash sand). Also, it is better not to start the setting change mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of misconduct (for example, a magnetic error). In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that a setting change operation is being performed by an unauthorized player. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. .

  (3) When the setting change mode starts, upon receiving a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear processing before the setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the special symbol and the normal symbol holding storage). , Prize ball information) and other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in the procedure (6), it is not necessary to clear the set value in this step.

  (4) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (5) When receiving the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the device is in the setting change mode. The notification during the setting change mode performs an initial operation of the accessory and performs a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 may not perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, in the case of displaying the procedure or state of the setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting is changed. This is because it hinders the change operation.

  The main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on), and the progress of the game may be stopped. . Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping detection of a winning ball or an out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, in the setting change mode, the base value is not calculated. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the firing permission signal, stops the firing of the game ball controlled by the firing control device, and notifies the setting change mode by functioning as the firing disabler. Is also good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and the error may be detected if the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. .

  (6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, and the setting value = 0 is a state in which the setting has not been set. If the setting value = 0, the setting change mode cannot be ended, and the game (the game ball Launch, fluctuating game, etc.) does not start.

  (7) Thereafter, every time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

  (8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the procedure (1) described above, the determination may be made at least once before the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973 is determined. As described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is determined (especially, whether the detection signal of the body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951). It functions as an allowable state generating means.

  (9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

  (10) If the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and confirms that the setting value is confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the set value (for example, 8), or may blink the decided set value for a predetermined time.

  (11) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been turned off.

  (13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode ends, and the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  (14) Upon receiving the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification that the setting is being changed. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this is also ended.

  Note that the notification (including the game stop and the firing stop) may be released immediately after the setting change mode ends, or may be released after a predetermined time has elapsed. Assuming that the notification performed in step (5) is merely notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is captured from the viewpoint of detecting a fraudulent activity, the notification may be canceled after a lapse of a predetermined time after the setting change mode ends. This is because, when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to find that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

  When the firing of the game ball is stopped for a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period is regarded as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. May be.

  (15) Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 executes a RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after the change of the setting is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) and the set value and the game state (for example, the probable change state, the time saving state, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol). , And the other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, unlike the RAM clearing process before the setting change, the setting value is not initialized in the RAM clearing process after the setting change.

  Then, the setting change mode ends.

  As described above, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or when the setting board 970 is integrally formed with the main control board 1310) Since the main control board 1310 obtains the detection signal of the body frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. To change the settings.

  Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 illustrated in FIG. 139 (B) cooperate will be described.

  When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (while power is being supplied), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

  In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of the opening of the main frame 4 may be omitted. .

  When it is determined that the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set values stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays them on the setting display 974.

  In the setting change processing described with reference to FIGS. 138 (A) and 139 (A), if the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, the setting change mode may be invalidated and the setting change mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and the power is turned on again to restart the stopped setting change mode. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where the setting change mode is stopped due to error detection, or may be started from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value = 0 when no setting value is selected).

  The setting value may be changed by recording a history record a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is determined and the determined setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of the set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store the history in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Further, the recorded change history of the set value can be output. For example, the history of the change of the set value recorded may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

  The section for measuring the base value may be changed when the set value is changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out-balls in the section where the base value is currently being measured is less than 52,000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate a base value in which different gaming performances are not mixed, and to grasp the transition of the base value due to the change of the set value. .

  Further, when the set value is changed, the section where the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the section for measuring the base value. Although the set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device, a design in which the base value does not significantly change by changing the set value is also possible. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the section for calculating the base value by changing the set value.

  If both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. In the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971, the operation of the setting key 971 is less likely to be erroneously operated in consideration of the operation method and the arrangement of the operation means. Is considered to be the intention of the operator. In addition, in the setting change mode, since the storage contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared, it is considered that activating the setting change mode is sufficient even when the RAM clear is desired. .

  On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting change mode. This is because it is considered that when both are operated, the operator at least wants to clear the RAM. If both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the operation of turning on the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, neither the setting change mode activation nor the RAM clearing need be performed. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against an erroneous operation, it is preferable that an operation whose operator's intention is not clear is not accepted.

  In the above-described steps (3) and (15), the game state data is maintained in the RAM clear, but the special symbol holding storage may be deleted. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the determination result of the random number in the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to delete the reserved storage of the special symbol and newly perform a lottery.

  On the other hand, a special symbol lottery (extraction of random numbers) is performed when a game ball is awarded to the starting port, but since the determination of the lottery result is performed at the start of the variable display game, the lottery result is determined under the condition after the change of the set value. What is necessary is just to judge the random number value stored and stored. For this reason, the special symbol on-hold storage may be maintained.

  In the above-described procedures (3) and (15), the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear processing in the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is deleted (the game state data is also deleted), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not deleted. Normally, the setting change is performed between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, so the data of the game state (probable change state, time saving state, storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols on hold, information on winning balls, etc.) are erased. It is not necessary to maintain without.

[12-2. Performance on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special pattern and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed in the process of step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are also collectively referred to as a start port. In addition, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as a special winning opening. Also, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

  In the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing, the game ball is accepted into the starting opening, that is, when a start winning is achieved (start condition is satisfied), a big hit is made for each start storage information (start information) in which the start condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not a jackpot gaming state is to be generated based on the lottery result. If the random number for the jackpot matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied), it is usually determined. The game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 140.

  When the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the gaming ball B has won a special winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B has won the special winning opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has won the starting port (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 or the second starting opening sensor 2511 in the switch input processing (step S74) in the main control timer interrupt processing. The reading is performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  When the game ball has won the starting opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the starting opening winning process (step S116). In the start-up winning process, a start-up winning command transmitted when a new game ball wins the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special symbol is formed. For example, a process for executing a prefetch effect is executed.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which a type of branch process to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and after the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and special electric accessory control. The process ends. Note that the value of the game progress state variable and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information and are backed up in the main control-side power-off process.

  In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a special symbol change process (step S132), a special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening a special winning opening (step S140), processing of opening a special winning opening (step S142), processing during closing of a special winning opening (step S142) S144) or a special winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

  In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a process of starting the change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the starting port is performed.

  In the special symbol change process (step S132), a process of controlling the change display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been definitely stopped generates the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting port.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when a big hit game state is not generated, a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol and notifying the effect is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol and notifying the user of the change is performed.

  In the interval process before the opening of the special winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation for making the game balls easily enter each special winning opening by opening the special winning opening is performed.

  In the special winning opening closing process (step S144), processing related to a big hit operation in which a game ball is difficult to enter each special winning opening by changing the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146), when the big hit operation is ended, processing for notifying the end is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol change display is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, a preparation for starting the special symbol change display is performed.

  The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the change of the special symbol is suspended (Step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol operation reserved balls is not zero. Note that the number of special symbol operation reserve balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. If the change of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S420 is "no"), the display of the change of the special symbol is not started, so this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the change display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 sets a retained ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of starting opening winning.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as the command value (step S452). Further, a variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower-order command data (step S458). Further, the variable type type value is obtained from the variable type type area (step S460), and the variable type type value is added to the command value set in the process of step S452, thereby obtaining the upper byte of the variable pattern command corresponding to the variable type. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (Step S466). Further, a change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

  Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[12-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

  The main control MPU 1311 first obtains the number of special symbol operation pending balls (step S530). The special symbol operation reserve ball count is stored in the special symbol operation reserve ball count buffer. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets a big hit flag from the big hit flag area (step S538).

  Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process of selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of special symbol operation reserved balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing (Step S544). Then, data corresponding to the variation pattern value (variation time value) is searched from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a change type determination process for selecting a change type defined in the change pattern in the change display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type classification value acquired by the variation type determination processing is set (step S550).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the fluctuation time addition value data for a fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo runs. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the fluctuation time addition value searched in the processing of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the processing of step S546, and acquires a final fluctuation time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting processing ends.

[12-2-4. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

  The main control MPU 1311 first obtains a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (Step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The variation information source table includes a hit (hit variation selection information status table), a loss (a loss variation selection information status table), a reach (a reach variation selection information status table), and a reach probability (a special symbol reach probability) according to a game state or the like. This is a data table in which table information for referring to a change type (change type determination data table) is stored.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 obtains a hit determination value for deriving a result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). If a big hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big hit flag and a big hit symbol type are acquired (step S354).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a change information number search process based on the big hit flag and the big hit symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, a variation information number for determining a hit variation pattern selection value data table is obtained from the big hit variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

  On the other hand, when a big hit or a small hit has not been won (the result of step S350 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the winning start (step S350). S372).

  If the reach is not generated in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 obtains the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the outlier fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of retained balls (step S372). S376).

  On the other hand, when a reach is to be generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the state flag. (Step S382).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation information number search process based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the process of Step S360, Step S378, or Step S382 (Step S388). Then, a fluctuation pattern selection value data table is obtained by the fluctuation information number search processing, and a fluctuation pattern random number 2 is obtained from the fluctuation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, a variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A change pattern is selected based on the result of the change information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages based on two types of random numbers, a variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, and S378) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, a variation pattern type (variation pattern group such as XX-reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally variation-displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. In addition, the method is not limited to the method of performing the lottery in two stages, and a method of performing the lottery in three or more stages may be employed, or the variation pattern may be directly selected using one variation pattern random number.

[12-3. Description of production on pachinko machines with setting function]
Hereinafter, an effect in the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect indicating the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function, for example, as the setting is higher, the payout number of the game balls with respect to the number of the special lottery is increased. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability in the non-probable change state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270). , Setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 having the highest possible setting, the game willingness to play is increased by installing the setting suggestion effect.

  Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of description, the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a variation pattern using one variation pattern random number in the variation pattern selection determination processing in step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following processing in step S542.

  In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current gaming state (whether the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is being executed) or the normal state other than the time saving state) and the result of the special lottery (the big hit is won). Is selected or not) and a variation pattern table corresponding to the selected is selected. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 obtains the random number for the fluctuation pattern, and based on the obtained random number for the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, It is assumed that a variation pattern is selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, when the result of the special lottery is out of order, further determine whether or not reach has occurred, obtain a random number for the variation pattern, obtain the random number for the variation pattern, and sort each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, Based on the selected variation pattern table.

  FIG. 144 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 144B is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  The variation pattern table is stored, for example, in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a variation pattern determination random number distribution column. The variation pattern type column stores information for identifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information for specifying the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information for specifying the effect content executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

  The distribution random number field for fluctuation pattern determination stores the distribution for selecting the corresponding fluctuation pattern for each setting. Note that the distribution random number field for fluctuation pattern determination in the fluctuation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is out of order (that is, the fluctuation pattern table in FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. For each of the cases where the reach is not generated, the distribution for selecting the corresponding variation pattern is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect executed after temporary display of special lottery results]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144A will be described. First, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144.

  FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed in the outlier variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In the variation of the departure variation pattern 20, after a special lottery result is likely to be deviated on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after the SP Reach 1 is executed, the special lottery result is deviated thereafter. Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the variation of the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, after displaying a temporary display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be deviated after the SP reach 1 is executed, A setting suggestion effect is executed, and then a confirmed display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  As described above, in the variation patterns 25 to 29, after the provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be out of order is performed, the setting suggestion effect is performed, so that the provisional display is performed. The player can expect the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect thereafter, and can maintain the expectation. In addition, when a setting suggestion effect occurs due to a change in deviation, even if the special lottery result is deviated, discouragement of the player due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and thus a feeling of elation can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the fluctuation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 24, after displaying a special indication on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 that the possibility that the special lottery result is likely to be deviated after SP Reach 1 is executed, the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although a gassing effect suggesting execution is performed, a setting display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing the setting suggesting effect itself.

  Note that SP reach is a reach effect in which the ratio selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit is high, and the ratio selected when the result of the special lottery is out of order is low. In other words, the big hit expectation of the fluctuation at which the SP reach is executed is high.

  Hereinafter, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In each effect, in addition to the contents described below, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and / or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are simultaneously executed. May be.

  In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, first, a pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative symbols fluctuate on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, a normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative pattern in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is in the reach state. Specifically, for example, of the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a changing state.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of SP reach 1 is executed. In SP Reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the player plays a rock-paper-scissor game. In the first half effect of the SP reach 1 in the departure variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, an effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissor game. During SP reach, for example, the decorative pattern may be displayed at a position smaller and nearer to the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 as compared to during the pre-reach effect and during the normal reach effect.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the second half of SP reach 1 is developed. In the latter half of the SP reach 1 in the departure variation patterns 20 and 24-29, for example, a so-called resurrection effect is executed. For example, at the start of the second half of the effect, the main character's voice such as "not yet!" On the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect of performing a rock-paper-scissors game between the main character and the enemy character is performed again. In the second half effect of SP reach 1 in the departure variation patterns 24 to 29, on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect is performed in which the main character loses again to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissor game.

  Subsequently, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the off state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is The symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in such a manner as to swing with a small width.

  Subsequently, in the deviation variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result has deviated is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing any other effect. In the departure variation pattern 24, a setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result has deviated is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and thereafter, a final display indicating that the special lottery result has deviated is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the final display, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination as the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped state. In the provisional display and the fixed display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as that in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

  In the setting suggestion gassing effect in the departure variation pattern 24, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect is performed in which one hero character finds two enemy characters and follows the enemy character but cannot catch it. As in the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 24 in FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the setting suggestion gassing effect is executed is desirably equal or approximately equal in all the settings. This is because if the distribution is not equal, the setting suggestion gassing effect suggests the setting.

  In addition, it is desirable that the ratio of the distribution of the outlier variation pattern 24 to the total of the distribution of the variation in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). If the distribution is high, the setting suggestion effect is frequently generated when the SP reach 1 is developed, which may reduce the player's expectation of the setting suggestion effect.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one hero character finds two enemy characters and catches them after chasing the enemy characters. Is performed.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 25, an effect in which all three players play a good luck in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed. In addition, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is determined so as to be distributed only in the low setting (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is determined.

  In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 has the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). If it occurs, there is a possibility that the player may stop the game early. Therefore, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of the other setting confirmation effect in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern may be set. 25 itself may not be present.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 26, an effect in which all three players play a choki in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is determined so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is determined.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 27, an effect in which all three players play a par when playing a rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the outlier variation pattern 27 is determined so that it can be sorted only in the even number setting (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even number setting is determined.

  In the setting suggestion effect in the departure variation pattern 28, an effect in which all three players give different hands in a rock-paper-scissors game is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), it is determined that the deviation variation pattern 28 can be sorted only in the odd number setting (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is determined.

  In addition, for example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the odd number setting finalization effect or the even number setting finalization effect as described above is mounted, so that the player can be interested in the effect. .

  Specifically, for example, in the order of the settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), and the settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, The first jackpot 2002 and the second jackpot 2004 in the order of 2, the probability of the jackpot winning in the jackpot winning is high (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the settings are 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 in the order of the setting. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability change ratio in each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game ball payouts to the number of game balls won to the game is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

  In this case, even-numbered setting is higher in odd-numbered setting than in odd-numbered setting, but instead of a high probability of winning in the normal state, the probability of change is low, that is, although the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit is likely to be small, The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in one extended play from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, odd setting has a lower probability of winning in the normal state than the even setting, but has a high probability of change, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to be large, The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in a single villa from a single home tends to increase. In such a case, there is a possibility that a certain player prefers an odd-numbered ball-out tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball-out tendency. The player's interest in the performance increases. Further, the even setting may have a feature that the big hit winning probability in the normal state is higher than the odd setting, but a big hit with a smaller number of rounds is easily selected.

  In the above-described deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the effect until the setting suggestion effect starts is the same, but the content of the setting suggestion effect is different (results in a rock-paper-scissors game by three players are different). In addition, it is desirable that the rock-paper-scissors game effect of the three players is used only in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29. This allows the player to recognize that the setting suggestion effect has started at the time when the rock-paper-scissors game effect is started by the three players, and the euphoria further increases.

  Note that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect for determining the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect indicating that the possibility of the high setting is high is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is performed. Is an effect that does not confirm the high setting, but an effect that indicates that the possibility of the high setting is high.

  In addition, in addition to the variation pattern in which the effect in which the high setting is determined is executed, a variation pattern in which the effect indicating that the possibility of the high setting is high as described above may be determined. The same applies to the low-setting final effect, the odd-setting final effect, the even-setting final effect, the highest-setting final effect, and the like.

  According to the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (B) (the fluctuation pattern table at the time of normal and big hit), when the special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, other than the hit fluctuation pattern 34 for which the highest setting is determined. Is not performed. In addition, the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is out of order. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is an effect mainly executed when the special lottery result is out of order, and the player can obtain a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is out of order.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortened fluctuation]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed in the out-of-place variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A).

  In the variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a shortening variation is performed. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns. After the variation of the decoration pattern is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all the decorations are not developed without reaching the reach state. This is a fluctuation in which the symbol stops. In the normal fluctuation, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decoration symbols stop in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortening fluctuation, all the decoration symbols may stop at the same time.

  Subsequently, in the variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a temporary display indicating that there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is out of order is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of place is performed. The description of the provisional display and the confirmed display is the same as that described above, and thus will be omitted.

  The deviation fluctuation pattern 30 has a fluctuation time different from the fluctuation times of all other fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, such as the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2. In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is determined so as to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the departure variation pattern 30 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In addition, the distribution of the outlier fluctuation pattern 30, which is a fluctuation pattern in which the shortening fluctuation is executed and suggests the setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of other fluctuation patterns in which the shortening fluctuation is executed (for example, the other fluctuation pattern). 10% or less of the minimum distribution of In each variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the temporary display and the fixed display is the same, and only the time of the shortening variation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which another shortened fluctuation is executed is an extent that the player can recognize (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

  Thereby, at the time when the shortening fluctuation is executed, the player assumes the fluctuation time like the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 with many distributions, but when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the assumed fluctuation time and It is possible to recognize different things, and to enjoy an effect in which the highest setting is determined. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144 (A), since the fluctuation pattern including the shortening fluctuation is selected only when there is no reach, the player loses his expectation when the shortening fluctuation is executed, and becomes interested in the shortening fluctuation. I will not be able to have it. However, by performing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening variation in this manner, the player can have a sense of expectation even for the shortening variation selected only when the player has not reached the reach, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. can do.

  Further, in the departure fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are the same, only the time of the shortened fluctuation differs. This allows the player to concentrate on the performance so as not to miss the highest setting finalized performance.

  The outlier fluctuation pattern 30 is a fluctuation pattern in which the highest setting is determined and the shortening fluctuation is executed. However, for each setting other than the highest setting, the fluctuation in which the setting is fixed and the shortening fluctuation is executed is performed. There may be patterns. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of each of the fluctuation patterns is different from the fluctuation time of the other outlier fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect performed before temporary display of special lottery results]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed in the out-of-shift pattern 31 and the hit change pattern 34 in the change pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144, the outlier fluctuation pattern 31 and the hit fluctuation pattern 34 are determined so as to be distributed only in the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 flows on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the start of the variation. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation change pattern 31 and the hit change pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

  In the departure variation pattern 31, after the special movie 1 ends, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be deviated is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviated is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

  The deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are different from the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, and the setting suggestion effect is started before the temporary display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the start of the variation). Thereby, the player can obtain a feeling of excitement waiting for the notification of the jackpot lottery result in a state where the highest setting is determined. In particular, when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and thus the player Can feel a sense of superiority to the other player, and the hall can easily appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion that the winning or high setting will be finalized]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed in the out-of-shift pattern 32 and the hit change pattern 35 in the change pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is determined so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the highest setting is determined.

  In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 flows on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the start of the variation. The special movie 2 is an effect that is generated only by the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

  In the departure variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be deviated is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviated is performed. In the hit variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

  Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting and the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. In other words, if the special lottery result is out of order after the occurrence of the special movie 2, the high setting is determined, so that the player can be less discouraged from the fact that the special lottery result is out, and, consequently, the high setting. Is determined, a feeling of elation can be obtained.

  In particular, when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel a sense of superiority to other players, and furthermore, the special movie 2 may be generated. When the special lottery result is out of order, the hole can easily appeal to other players that the high setting is used.

[12-8. Proposal of setting suggestion in time-saving state]
In the following, a description will be given of a variation pattern selected when the game state is the time saving state. FIG. 149 (A) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 149 (B) is an example of a fluctuation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  In the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 at the time of the deviation without reach. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability is, if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and the The number of game balls to be paid out increases, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

  However, as in the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the more frequently the fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time is distributed, so that the number of game balls paid out per unit time in each setting can be equalized. it can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selectivity of the outlier variation pattern 3 having a longer variation time in the variation patterns including the shortened variation, so that the outlier variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern indicating a high setting. Can be.

  Similarly, at the time of the out-of-the-way operation with the reach, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the off-state fluctuation pattern 11 having the long fluctuation time and the smaller the distribution of the off-state fluctuation pattern 12 having the short fluctuation time. Similarly, at the time of winning the big hit, as the setting is higher, the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 2 having the longer fluctuation time is larger, and the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having the shorter fluctuation time is smaller.

  As described above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot probability is, if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the big hit, and the larger the number of game balls fired before the big hit is won. For example, if the setting is lower, the distribution of the fluctuation pattern having the longer fluctuation time becomes larger, and the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern having the shorter fluctuation time becomes smaller.If the player stops firing the game ball during the fluctuation, The number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting can be equalized.

  In addition, at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestive effects described in this chapter, a predetermined sound effect may be output, or a predetermined light emitting effect may be executed. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be a dedicated effect that is executed only during the setting suggestion effect. In particular, in a setting suggestion effect in which a high setting or a maximum setting is determined, a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emission effect, which is executed only by the setting suggestion effect, may be executed.

  In addition, it is desirable that the allocation of the variation pattern in which an effect indicating that the high setting and the maximum setting are determined or that the possibility that the possibility is high is high is extremely low compared to the allocation of other variation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the player loses expectation if the high setting suggestion effect or the maximum setting suggestion effect is not executed, even though the player has played only a small amount of game time, and eventually plays the game early. This is because there is a risk of being canceled.

  In addition, it is desirable that the allocation of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect indicating that the low setting or the minimum setting is determined or that the possibility is high is extremely low as compared with the allocation of other fluctuation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, and the player loses his or her sense of expectation, and may stop the game early.

  Also, the setting suggestion effect that suggests a group of settings such as a high setting, a low setting, a maximum setting, an odd number setting, and an even number setting has been described, but the setting group in the setting suggestion effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect for an arbitrary group of one or more settings may be executed. For example, the settings 1 and 2 may be grouped into low settings, the settings 3 and 4 may be grouped into intermediate settings, and the settings 5 and 6 may be grouped into high settings.

[12-9. Another form of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

  In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch, and controls the display of the setting display 974, but in the following description, , The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and controls the display of the setting display 974.

  FIG. 150A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 has a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

  FIG. 150B illustrates a state where the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 illustrated in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 150B, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310 in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and a driver circuit (not shown). Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310. In this case, the main control board box 1320 does not have the hole 954A.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) serving as a trigger for RAM clear are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 from which data is erased differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

  The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be a direct connection between the boards by a connector or a connection by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for firmly inputting the changed set value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  Outputs of the various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the ports of the main control MPU 1311.

  Alternatively, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization processing (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out the authentication code set on the setting board 970 and checks it. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 cannot start the game. That is, game balls can be fired toward the game area 5a, but even if a winning port is won, no prize balls are paid out, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine type, or a serial number for each pachinko machine may be set. The authentication code can be set by, for example, setting the authentication code using a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, or a short circuit of a pattern provided on the setting board 970, or a logic circuit (for example, A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

  The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. I do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs + 5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to specific ports of the interface circuit 1331 of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board based on the input signal to the port.

  In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), mounting of the wrong setting board 970 on the main control board box 1320 can be prevented. In addition, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

  FIG. 150C illustrates a state where the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 illustrated in FIG.

  As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a function of setting game performance. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine related to the prize balls acquired by the player, such as the probability of a big hit in the special symbol change display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 according to the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and there are some halls where the setting function is unnecessary. For this reason, it is necessary for the pachinko machine manufacturer to design and produce both a pachinko machine without a setting function and a pachinko machine with a setting function. There is a demand for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

  For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1 having no setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970, and the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. To Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine having no setting function and the pachinko machine having the setting function.

  The dummy substrate 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting substrate 970, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but the device is not mounted on the pattern.

  The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit formed of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970 without being constituted by a printed board.

  Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is neither open nor ground on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent the driver circuit from being damaged by overcurrent. When the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

  When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the main control board box 1320 does not have the hole 971A. The setting function is provided by providing a small door movable in the main control board box 1320 so as to close the hole 971A so that it can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be shared with a pachinko machine having no setting, a pachinko machine having a setting function, and the like.

  Note that an authentication code for the main control board 1310 to authenticate may also be set on a dummy board 979 to be described later. In addition, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and does not need to set an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

  The variations of the operation means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With the setting change switch 972 and with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. After the user operates the setting change switch 972 to select a set value to be set, the user operates the setting confirmation switch 973.

(2) With the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select a setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without the setting change switch 972, with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after the user operates the RAM clear switch 954 to select a set value to be set, the user operates the setting confirmation switch 973. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned clockwise to select a setting value to be set.

(4) Without the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select a setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned clockwise to select a setting value to be set.

  FIGS. 151 and 152 are diagrams illustrating another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

  The mounting examples shown in FIGS. 151 and 152 differ from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150 in that a small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320.

  FIG. 151A shows a main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, as described above. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating 976 is provided.

  The hole 976A is normally covered by the small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1322. By inserting and operating the key 975 in the key hole of the key unit 1322, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bar 1323 is at the maximum projecting position from the key unit 1322, and the bar 1323 is inserted into the seat 1324, and the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 are inserted. And the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the bar 1323 is retracted from the maximum projecting position, and the engagement between the bar 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. With the hinge 1325 as an axis, the small door 1321 can be opened. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152 (B)), the hole 976A is exposed, and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating still another example of mounting the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, a key unit 1322 is provided on a back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting and operating the key 975 in the keyhole of the key unit 1322, the back cover 980 is opened from the main frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (the setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

  That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side, The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

  When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have a configuration illustrated in FIG. 151C. More specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so as to be sealable in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating is provided. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. On the main control board 1310, a base display 1317, a display switch 1318, and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted in addition to the main control MPU and a driver circuit (not shown). Note that the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310. In this case, the main control board box 1320 does not have the hole 954A.

  The setting board 970 is provided near the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be a direct connection between the boards by a connector or a connection by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. Note that a setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for firmly inputting the changed set value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of the setting change process]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initialization processing. The initialization processing shown in FIG. 154 is different from the initialization processing described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear processing is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). Note that the same steps as those in the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 101 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes a main control program to perform an initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes the RAM 1312 writable (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activating the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510 or the like)) has elapsed. A determination is made (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

  The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected.

  If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30, and a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. That is, since the operation of the two switches and the operation of the power switch are required to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode by mistake.

  In the setting change mode, first, the set value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal plate 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality. However, it is extremely rare that the pachinko machine 1 is set to the setting change mode during a game, and an illegal act is possible. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during business hours.

  The security signal may be output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode, or may be output from the start to the end of the setting change mode, or may be output from the start of the setting change mode to a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode. May be output. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected is extended, and the security can be further improved.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed based on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the set value in accordance with the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value is changed by one step. When the setting key 971 also functions as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting change mode is terminated and the set value is determined (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode ends, and the process proceeds to step S30. The setting change mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. In addition, the setting change mode may be terminated by operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

  In the above-described processing, after the setting change mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the end of the setting change mode, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), whether the checksums match (step S22), and if the power failure flag is not set and the check is made. If the sums do not match, a predetermined area of the internal RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

  After the end of the setting change mode, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and the game state (for example, the probability change state, The data of the time-saving state, the storage of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and the information on prize balls are left, and the other data are deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24. The game state data may be deleted without being left. In this case, the storage area deleted by the RAM area deleted after the setting change operation is the same as the storage area deleted by the RAM clear operation.

  On the other hand, if an operation to end the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and further, a setting change operation is detected.

  If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, in step S30, the set value data and the base calculation work area (the base calculation area 13128) out of the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312. ), The other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24.

  If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not delete the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). .

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data (other than the base calculation area 13128) backed up in the work area. Then (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and uses the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power-off to check the data calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312. The sum is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The deleted data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not deleted. Proceed to.

  In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the main control MPU 1311 deletes the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag There are a power failure flag abnormality that has not been set (step S20), a RAM abnormality where the checksums of the RAM do not match (step S22), and an abnormality of the base calculation work (step S24). As shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the setting value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) are detected. (E.g., probable change state, time saving state, holding special symbols and ordinary symbols, storing information on winning balls), clear other data, and do not clear the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area). . When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack The area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. In the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

  In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, and a base calculation work abnormality, unlike the illustrated case, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 May be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the gaming state will be lost and the normal processing cannot be executed. It is good to initialize only. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared, as described above. You don't have to clear it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is stored in the work control area 13126 (set value, game state data) for each data type. Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is deleted, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not deleted. If the set value is erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear operation is performed, and the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes complicated. Therefore, the set value is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch.

  For the processing after step S28, any of FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of a process (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

  In the initialization processing described above, the setting confirmation processing is not executed, but is executed in the setting confirmation processing called from the timer interrupt processing described later (FIGS. 155 and 156). May be performed. By executing the setting confirmation processing in the initialization processing, the setting confirmation can be permitted only at the time of turning on the power, and the confirmation of the setting value due to an inadvertent operation during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

  In this case, an operation unit (for example, a push button switch) for setting confirmation is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the operation unit for setting confirmation), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312 to generate data for display on the setting display 974, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. Good to do. Also in this case, a security signal may be output along with the display of the set value.

  In some cases, the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment does not immediately execute the RAM clear processing even when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clear processing, and executes the RAM clear processing after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting change mode). During the setting change mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to store the execution of the RAM clear processing. On the other hand, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

  The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

  After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared at the same time. Further, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 need not be cleared. Further, whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit may be switched by an operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on. If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. In this way, by changing the operation method, it is possible to execute processing in which a part of the area of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

  When the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 are cleared, there is a difference between the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when detecting the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the payout control unit 952 clears the RAM immediately. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

  In addition to the case where the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 also operates the RAM clear switch 954 while changing the set value. When the power is turned on, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM according to the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on. It is determined whether the operation has been performed and whether the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared. By providing a RAM clear switch on the payout control board 951, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation processing]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is different from the timer interrupt process described above with reference to FIG. 23 in that a base calculation process (step S801) is provided in place of the update process of the accessory ratio calculation area in step S81. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation ratio of the condition device) is added. Note that the same steps as those in the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 23 and 104 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control program, first sets RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1, and switches the register (step S70).

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (Step S74), a timer update process (Step S76), a random number update process 1 (Step S78), and a prize ball control process (Step S80).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and sets the base calculation area 13128 ( The base value is calculated (step S801; see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the award ball control process (step S80), but may be executed in an earlier order to ensure execution at every timer interrupt. .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command receiving process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

  Thereafter, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation processing, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 974 by an employee of the hall performing a predetermined operation. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing ends, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pachinko machine setting confirmation process according to the present embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

  In the setting confirmation processing, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is being performed (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, the shift to the setting change mode is triggered (step S17 in FIG. 154). If the setting key 971 is operated during operation, the setting confirmation operation is performed, and the current setting can be displayed.

  If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, since the setting key 971 has been returned to the normal position, data for not displaying the set value is generated and the set value is not displayed (step S8065).

  On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

  As the setting display condition, it is determined whether or not the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the output of the frame release switch. Since the setting key 971 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected while the outer frame 2 is closed, it is estimated that some abnormality (failure or misconduct) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting is performed. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting display 974 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

  The set value may be displayed at any time during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, a setting display condition that enables display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) from when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the time elapsed since the power was turned on (or to initialize the CPU in step S28), and to display the set value until the timer expires.

  In addition, a setting display condition for enabling a set value to be displayed in a specific game state may be provided. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the change display of the special symbol or during the big hit game. That is, a setting display condition is provided to enable the display of the set value during periods other than during the special symbol change and during the big hit. The set value may not be displayed in a game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol change game or the big hit game, the set value may be displayed at a timing when the special symbol change game or the big hit game ends.

  If it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality. However, it is rare that the pachinko machine 1 confirms a setting during a game, and is a harbinger of fraud. In some cases, if a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours, the hall computer should be notified.

  The security signal may be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, may be output from the start to the end of the set value display, or may be output from the start of the set value display to a predetermined period after the end of the set value display. Good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the display of the set value, the period in which the abnormality can be detected is extended, and the security can be further improved.

  In the illustrated setting confirmation processing, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied. However, even when the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected, the security signal is transmitted even when the setting display condition is not satisfied. Good.

  After that, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data to be displayed on the setting display 974.

  If the setting display condition is not satisfied, the condition is checked until the setting display condition is satisfied.However, there is a possibility that the loop cannot be escaped for a long time. The confirmation processing may be ended. For example, if it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is being performed, and then the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the end of the special symbol variation display satisfies the setting display condition. And display the set value. If the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting check process may be immediately terminated without repeating the setting condition check.

  At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol change display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set value can be confirmed without obstructing other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are also used, the setting value is displayed with priority during the setting confirmation, so that the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a game state in which many prize balls are paid out in a short time, it may be desired to check a change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without hindering the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal upon setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing chart of a security signal output in accordance with setting change and setting confirmation.

  As described above, the security signal is output at the time of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

  In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

  Further, the security signal may be output during a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode, instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode.

  Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clear processing executed in association with the setting change mode.

  At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 for a predetermined time from the start of setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

  Further, the security signal may be output during a period from the start to the end of the setting check (a period during which the set value is displayed), instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting check.

  When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the detection of the error. If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, a security signal is output for a predetermined time after the error is detected, as shown in FIG. 157 (E). That is, the security signal resulting from the setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from the error detection are continuously output for a predetermined time (T seconds) (the predetermined time from the error detection). Note that even if an error is detected during the setting check, the output time of the security signal does not need to be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output, but is absorbed by the security signal being output.

  In the setting change mode, since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error, the security signal resulting from the setting confirmation does not overlap with the security signal resulting from the error detection. That is, in the setting change mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but the output time of the security signal is extended if an error occurs during the setting confirmation.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another example of the setting confirmation process will be described. In the above description, the example in which the setting confirmation processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing is mainly described. However, in the following, the setting confirmation processing is performed in the initialization processing when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1. An example will be described.

  Specifically, for example, if the setting key is on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. Hereinafter, the details of the processing will be described. The timer interrupt processing executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is the timer interrupt processing in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt processing not including the setting confirmation processing in step S802).

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the initialization processing. The differences from FIG. 154 will be described. When determining in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S18). S29).

  If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S29: Yes), the process shifts to the setting confirmation process in step S807, and then shifts to step S20. The setting confirmation processing in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the process proceeds to step S20.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the setting confirmation process (the setting confirmation process in step S807). 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the processing of Step S8061 (Step S8062). When determining that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the setting value (step S8064). When determining that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: NO), the main control MPU 1311 executes the processing of step S8062 again.

  Following the processing in step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is off (step S8071). If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), the main control MPU 1311 executes the determination of step S8071 again after a predetermined time elapses. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 hides the setting value (step S8075), and ends the setting confirmation processing. That is, when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the mode shifts to the setting confirmation state.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the special symbol is being changed, the number of reserved memories managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining variation time in the special symbol, and the like are stored as they are. Thereafter, when the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 being on), after the setting confirmation process is completed (the setting without turning off the power is performed). After the key 971 is returned to the initial position), the special symbol change restarts. At this time, for example, the effect (the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, the sound effect using the loudspeaker, the effect using the movable body, and the like) which is being executed together with the special symbol change is the special symbol. It will not be performed at all after the resumption of fluctuations.

  In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed, the special symbol change is restarted. The effect that has been executed together with may be restarted. For example, the effect using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker, which has been interrupted, is restarted. In addition, for the effect using the movable body, for example, after returning to the initial position after the restart of the special symbol change or when power is turned on, it is determined that the movable body is operated in the effect pattern of the effect. In this case, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

  That is, if the movable body shifts to the setting confirmation state when it is not at the initial position, it returns to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation processing is completed, and thereafter, based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. If the determined effect includes an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be moved (moved). Note that when the movable body moves (moves) to the setting confirmation state, the operation pattern of the movement (movement) may not be executed, or the movable body may be returned to the initial position once. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that can be operated even from above.

  In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed, the special symbol change is restarted. Among the effects that were being performed, the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, and the sound effect using the speaker were restarted, and the movable body was returned to the initial position after the restart of the special symbol change or when the power was turned on. It is not necessary to perform the effect using the movable body.

  Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, when the special symbol change is resumed after the completion of the setting confirmation process, the main liquid crystal display device is displayed. The change of the decorative symbol displayed in 1600 may be restarted (resume of the effect originally scheduled to be performed), or the change of the decorative symbol may be continued until the symbol is determined (or until the fluctuation immediately before the symbol is determined). The decoration pattern may be made to perform high-speed fluctuation with transparency, or the decoration pattern may not be displayed until the symbol is determined (or until the swing fluctuation immediately before the symbol is determined). When the symbol is determined, for example, a combination of decorative symbols scheduled before the power is turned off is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Also, in this case, at the end of the special symbol change after resumption, a combination of a predetermined decorative symbol, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the time of initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol not displayed at the time of normal special symbol change The combination (for example, “xxx” or the like) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol, the setting confirmation processing is performed at the next power-on, and the setting key 971 is turned off when the setting confirmation processing is completed and the operation returns to the normal state. An initial operation (for example, a predetermined operation of a movable body, an operation of confirming a predetermined light emission of an LED, or the like) similar to that performed when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally turned on) may be performed. (After performing the initial operation, the above-described effects and the like may be restarted.)

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off when the pre-reading effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special When the symbol variation is restarted, the prefetching effect and the prefetching effect for the special symbol variation held immediately before turning off the power are not executed (specifically, for example, performed before the power is turned off). The special zone displayed during the change of the special symbol that was being displayed (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the jackpot expectation is high across multiple changes, from rival horse production to horse racing production described later) Zones that evolve (horse racing productions are special zones in which the degree of expectation of themselves is set higher (for example, a higher expectation relative to the dialogue production described later)). Clearing or display effect in zones such, when aspects of the hold display was blue rather than for example conventional white, or return to normal white). However, a pre-reading effect may be executed for a special symbol change corresponding to a winning after the setting confirmation processing.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off when the pre-reading effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special When the symbol change is resumed, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is stopped (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the change of the special symbol that was performed before the power was turned off). The display in the standby state, the display effect in the special zone is erased, and when the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, the display is returned to normal white.) The pre-reading effect may be resumed from the special symbol change (the erased display may be returned to its original state, or if the effect pattern is such that the pre-reading effect is promoted at the start of the change, the pre-reading effect may be restored in the display mode after the promotion. Good . In this case, the look-ahead effect performed from the next special symbol change is restarted, for example, assuming that the prefetch effect during the special symbol change was not stopped. That is, before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the look-ahead effect that is to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new look-ahead effect pattern may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol change.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion effect]
Hereinafter, an example of a process in which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of setting 1 to setting 6 at normal time are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively, It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of the settings 1 to 6 at the time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. It is also assumed that the probability of change at the time of winning the jackpot is 50%.

[12-14-1. Variation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored, for example, in the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. In the description of FIG. 142 and the like, the example in which the fluctuation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. 160, the fluctuation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result is represented by one fluctuation pattern table. Is defined. In the example of FIG. 160, a common variation pattern table is used for all settings.

  The variation pattern table of FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one variation pattern table. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1311 selects a variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the variation pattern table. As in the example of FIG. 144, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern may be defined in the fluctuation pattern table.

  The movie reach listed in the summary column is a reach production where the ratio selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit is high, and the ratio selected when the result of the special lottery is out of reach is extremely low It is. In other words, the big hit expectation of the fluctuation in which the movie reach is executed is high. When a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  In addition, the “+1 symbol” in the case where the hit type is “losing” described in the summary column is a decorative symbol that fluctuates to the end after the decorative symbol stops in the reach state, Stop after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol “7”, the decorative symbol that fluctuated until the end stops at “8”. The “+1 symbol” when the hit type is “big hit” means that after the decorative symbol stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol fluctuating to the end stopped once after passing the decorative symbol in the reach state. After that, the decorative symbol stops as the same symbol as the reach-state decorative symbol. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol “7”, the decorative symbol that fluctuated to the end appears to have stopped temporarily at “8”, and then the decorative symbol stopped at “7” And inform the big hit.

  In the outline column in the example of FIG. 161, “+1 symbol” is selected only when the hit type is “big hit (non-probable change)” in the big hit, but is “big hit (probable change)”. May be selected, or may be selected in the case of “big hit (non-probable)” and “big hit (probable)”. Further, “+1 symbol” may be selected only when the winning type is “out”.

  Also, “+ pseudo 1” and “+ pseudo 2” described in the summary column indicate that two consecutive pseudo-continuous effects and three consecutive pseudo-continuous effects are executed, respectively. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and terminating the change of the decorative symbol is performed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. . "Ending the change of the decorative pattern" means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes that the change in the decorative pattern has been once ended, and a mode in which the decorative pattern is changed. There is a mode in which the pseudo-sequence symbol (a symbol in which the pseudo-sequence is determined if this symbol stops) is partially stopped. In addition, the pseudo continuous production in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous productions, and the variation of the Mth decorative pattern in the N consecutive pseudo continuous productions (M is 1 or more N The following natural number) is referred to as an M-th pseudo continuous production. In addition, during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the operation is actually executed again while suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again. An effect that is not performed is referred to as a “pseudo-gasse effect”. Hereinafter, pseudo continuous production is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous production”.

  The pseudo continuous effect is generated or continued, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and terminating the change of the decorative symbol is performed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. If it is determined that the pattern is to be performed, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous symbol in at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops characters such as "continue!" Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even and no reach occurs) may be used as the pseudo continuous symbol. Note that the pseudo gassed effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is “normal fluctuation” or the like. In addition, for example, even if the variation pattern is “+ pseudo 1”, a pseudo-gase effect indicating the occurrence of a third pseudo-repeated run in “+ pseudo 2” may be executed.

[12-14-2. Final hold color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored, for example, in the peripheral main control ROM. The final reserved color table is, for example, a display color (hereinafter referred to as a final reserved color) of a reserved display at the end of the variation for each variation pattern (a winning lot type of a special lottery result, a variation pattern identifier, and an outline of the effect of the variation pattern). ) Is maintained.

  In addition, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a suspended display area indicating the number of suspended first and second special random numbers. In the start-up winning process in step S116 in FIG. 142, a reserved number designation command for designating the reserved number of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU provides a display indicating the number of holds indicated by the hold number designation command in the hold display area.

  Specifically, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (start condition is satisfied), the number of holdings (number of holding storages) specified from the holding number designation command is increased. , One suspension display is added and displayed in the suspension display area. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold display (variable display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified by the hold number designation command is reduced. Then, the hold display in the hold display area is deleted.

  Note that the hold display may have a plurality of display modes. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there is a display mode of hold display using a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, and rainbow). Hereinafter, it is assumed that the expectation of the big hit of the special lottery result corresponding to the hold display increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow of the hold display. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161, the rainbow holding display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. Also, the peripheral control MPU responds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display during a display period from when the hold display is displayed in the hold display area until the hold display is deleted. It is possible to execute a hold announcement effect indicating the expectation degree of the big hit with respect to the variation display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol).

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the display period of the hold display, a hold change effect indicating that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed. Note that the hold change effect and the hold announcement effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as a hold look-ahead effect.

  For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a hold notice table (not shown) that defines a change timing of the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, for example, the hold notice table defines a change timing of the display mode of the hold display, and a display mode (display color) of the hold display at the time of winning and at each change timing for each final hold color. The start, during, and end of a special symbol change after the winning and before the special symbol corresponding to the winning is an example of the change timing.

  It is desirable that the display mode of the hold display at each change timing is a hold color having a jackpot expectation that is equal to or less than the jackpot expectation of the final hold color. Also, it is desirable that the big hit expectation indicated by the hold display is not demoted at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). It is to be noted that a different reservation notice table may be present for each of the number of stored reservations at the time of winning.

  Note that, for example, the start of the special symbol change held before the hold display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the hold display described above.For example, even during the special symbol change corresponding to the hold display, A change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

  The pre-reading effect including the reserved pre-reading effect is executed based on a pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the start-up winning process at step S116 in FIG. You.

  Hereinafter, the pre-determination processing in the start-up winning processing for the first special symbol will be described. Note that the same applies to the pre-determination processing in the starting opening winning processing for the second special symbol, and therefore, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-determination process, the main control MPU 1311 compares a pre-determination table (not shown) with a special random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number. If the type of the big hit does not become a big hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or a mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a big hit, if a big hit, a type of a big hit, and if no big hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, The type of the game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of held storages (the value of the held number counter) stored in correspondence with the obtained special random numbers. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first hold storage number. .

  By transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a special symbol based on the generated start winning is added to the number of retained storages stored corresponding to the starting opening in which the start winning is generated. Whether the display result of the variable display is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the type of the game effect to be performed before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

  FIG. 162 is an appearance rate of each last reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 1 when the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. FIG. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the hold display of the high-ranking jackpot expectation degree. Also, the bigger the hit expectation of each color is, the higher the setting is. Note that these appearance rates and expectations are calculated based on the jackpot probabilities of the respective settings described above. For the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. It is assumed that there is.

  The peripheral control ROM may hold a different final reserved color table for each setting. In this case, for example, in the same hold display mode, the selection rate of the last hold color table of the last hold color is set such that the higher the setting, the higher the expectation of big hits. Thereby, for example, when a big hit is won in the special symbol change corresponding to the red hold display, the degree of expectation for the higher setting is further increased, so that the player can get a sense of exaltation.

  In addition, for example, in the display mode of the non-white reserved display most frequently selected, for the same reserved display display mode, the final reserved color table of the final reserved color table is set such that the lower the setting is, the higher the jackpot expectation is. The selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation degree in the case where the hold display mode is red is 50% in the low setting 1 and 30 in the high setting 6). %). By this, for example, even if the special symbol change corresponding to the red hold display does not win the big hit, the degree of expectation to the high setting is increased, so that the discouragement of the player is suppressed and the game is continued. Can be promoted.

  Also, for example, in the most frequently selected display modes other than white, the last reserved color in the final reserved color table is set so that the jackpot expectation degree is substantially common in all the settings for the same reserved display mode. May be set. Thereby, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final reserved color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate on only the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the reserved display. Further, for example, when a big hit is not won in the special symbol change corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possibility of the low setting is increased.

[12-14-3. Notice Direction Table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice effect table. The notice effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The preview effect table holds, for example, the selectivity of the advance effect for each variation pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the effect of the variation pattern).

  In the example of FIG. 165, the notice effects include a line effect, a weather change effect, and a rival horse effect. The speech effect is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the fluctuation and the speech is spoken. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes in the fluctuation. The rival horse effect is an effect in which the rival horse of the horse raised by the hero character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the fluctuation.

  It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect using a notice effect, and the notice effect table stores a selection rate of each notice effect for each execution presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect. “No set” in the example of FIG. 165 indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and “set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the announcement effect to be executed based on the variation pattern and the selectivity of the announcement effect table.

  In each of the notice effects in each variation pattern of the notice effect table, it is preferable that the selectivity without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selectivity with the setting suggestion effect. If the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. This is because, in this state, if the frequency of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect indicating the high setting is low, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. That is, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 at a low setting is significantly reduced, which may impose an excessive burden on the hall. Conversely, for example, when the frequency of setting suggestion effects indicating high setting is high, the number of players who estimate that the setting of the other pachinko machine 1 in the hall is low increases, and the operation of the other pachinko machine 1 is increased. There is a risk that the rate will decrease and the hall will be overloaded.

  In addition, the selectivity of the variation pattern in the variation pattern table is determined so that the greater the number of pseudo runs, the greater the expectation of big hits. For example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is not substantially changed by the number of pseudo runs. In addition, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table is determined. In other words, for example, for the variation patterns whose outlines are “SP reach”, “SP reach + pseudo 1”, and “SP reach + pseudo 2”, the pseudo setting suggestion effect is performed so that the appearance rates of the setting suggestion effects are substantially the same. Has been determined. As a result, for a variation pattern with a small number of simulated repeats, although the big hit expectation degree is low, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect is not low compared to the variation pattern with a large number of simulated repeats. I can also be interested in fluctuations in small fluctuation patterns.

  Also, as the number of pseudo-runs increases, the selectivity of execution of the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases, or as the number of pseudo-runs decreases, The selection rate of the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect in the preview effect effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases. In addition, when the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo runs decreases, the above-described problem may occur. Therefore, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo runs decreases. It is also desirable to set them as substantially the same numerical values (specifically, for example, 15/256 when the speech effect is set when the variation pattern 5 is selected when the variation pattern 5 is selected, and is set when the variation effect is 6 when the variation pattern 6 is selected). 16/256).

  In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a high jackpot expectation (or an effect in which the expected degree of the produced effect is relatively high, although not a fluctuation pattern with a high jackpot expectation (for example, an effect in which the jackpot expectation is a predetermined value or more)) ), The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the announcement effect table may be determined such that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases. Specifically, for example, in order of "normal fluctuation", fluctuation including "normal reach", fluctuation including "SP reach", and fluctuation including "movie reach", the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined.

  In the example of FIG. 165, a setting suggestion effect may occur in all the announcement effects (line effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect). For example, a notice effect in which no setting suggestion effect occurs does not occur. May be present.

  Also, if the outline of the fluctuation pattern is the same, the special lottery result is a big hit without probability change, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the case where the special lottery result is a big hit with probability change, The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases when the jackpot is won without a probability change, and it is possible to reduce the discourage of the player who is not given the probability change. Note that, in the above example, three types of notice effects of the line effect, the weather change effect, and the rival horse effect have been described, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the three types.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
Hereinafter, the details of the speech effect among the notice effects will be described. The peripheral control MPU causes the character A to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the change, when the speech effect without the setting suggestion effect is selected as the announcement effect. , "What day is it today?" Then, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) after the display of the character A, and the character "B ..." Is displayed. Note that, for example, the dialogue of the character A and the character B may indicate the degree of expectation of the change.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU selects the speech of the character B (the speech suggesting the setting) from the speech production table described later, when the speech production with the setting suggestion production is selected as the announcement production. The peripheral control MPU sends the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change (for example, two seconds, that is, the same timing as the appearance of the character A in the absence of the setting suggestion effect described above). The character A appears, and the character of the character A is displayed as “Today, what day?” The peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) after the display of the character A, and displays the character of the selected character B. Note that the line of the character A may be, for example, a line that directly expresses a set value such as “Do you know the setting of this stage today?”.

  FIG. 166 is an example of the speech effect table. The speech effect table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM. The speech effect table holds the effect type of the speech effect and the selectivity of the content of the speech of the character B for each setting. The effect type includes a “pattern that is halfway together” and a “pattern that suddenly branches”, and for each of the two patterns, there is a line of “Kane” and a line of “Definite”. .

  Each line belonging to the “pattern together” includes the same line up to the middle, and then branches to a different line. In the example of FIG. 166, all the lines belonging to the “pattern together” start with “come ...” and then branch to different lines. On the other hand, a line belonging to the “pattern that suddenly branches” branches to a different line from the beginning. Note that it is desirable that the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “patterned together” is higher than the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “suddenly branched pattern”. This is to pull expectations.

  Dialogue belonging to “Kane-kei” is a dialogue that suggests the current setting but does not announce the setting definitely. For example, "But I feel like it was an even day ..." is a line of "Kane-kei" suggesting an even number setting. "But I feel like it was an even day ..." is a line of "Kamane", so the selectivity is determined so that it may appear even in odd settings. However, it is assumed that the selectivity of the dialog in the odd setting is sufficiently lower than the selectivity of the dialog in the even setting. Similarly, it is assumed that the selectivity of the line in the setting suggested by the line is sufficiently higher than the selectivity of the line in other settings.

  On the other hand, the lines belonging to the “determinate system” are lines that announce the setting definitely. For example, "Oh! Remembered! It's an even day!" Is a line of "determined" that definitely notifies the even number setting. Therefore, the selectivity of the line in the odd setting is 0, and the selectivity exceeds 0 only in the even setting.

  In addition, it is desirable that the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “Kamakane” is higher than the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “definite system”. If the selectivity of the lines belonging to the “determined system” is high, there is a possibility that the high setting will be notified to the player deterministically in a short time after the game is started. This is because there is a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, and there is a possibility that the operation of other gaming machines may be reduced.

  In a speech effect when performing a specific reach effect such as SP reach or a movie reach, or in a speech effect when performing a pseudo-ream, a line for suggesting the setting of the character B is written in red characters (for a big hit expectation effect or the like). Ordinary dialogue may be displayed in white characters. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish the words of the expected suggestive effect from the words of the setting suggestive effect, so that two types of effects (setting suggestive effect and expectation suggestive effect) coexist without causing the player to feel unnatural. Can be done. In addition, the expectation suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree in the special symbol change is a predetermined value, and specifically, a notice effect indicating the expectation for the jackpot within one change, Includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for jackpots across the fluctuations of.

  The surrounding control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect using a lottery table similar to the speech effect table, though not shown, for the weather change effect and the rival horse effect. For example, in a setting suggestion effect in a weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a number such as “246?” Is displayed by lightning (an effect of “Kamoneko system” indicating an even number setting), In the setting suggestion effect in the rival horse effect, a combined horse effect of the horse raised by the hero character and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, a number such as "135?" Yes (directing of "Kane-kei" suggesting an odd number setting).

  In the above-described example, "What is the day today?" Is displayed as the character of the character A in the line production, but in addition to this line, the character A is "What was the test last week?" Character B is "66 points! (" Confirmation type "where setting 6 is fixed)" or "I felt it was 55 points ..." A plurality of variations may be provided for an effect (for example, a line effect). In this case, the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the score of the test) may be more credible to the setting suggestion than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date). Specifically, for example, in the A production, the expectation of setting 6 when "I felt like it was the day with 6 ..." It is better to set the expectation, which is the setting 6 when it is said that 66 points were felt (...) to be 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of notice production table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the notice effect table. In the example of FIG. 167, the announcement effect table 173 holds the selection ratio of the announcement effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the announcement effect table of FIG. 167 does not hold information on whether or not a setting suggestion effect has been executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the notice effect in accordance with the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern in the notice effect table of FIG.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variation pattern and the type of the selected advance effect. FIG. 168 (A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of the setting suggestion effect execution presence / absence when the outline of the change pattern is “normal change” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect. is there. FIG. 168 (B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of the setting suggestion effect execution presence / absence when the outline of the fluctuation pattern is “normal reach + 1 symbol” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect It is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of the variation pattern and the notice effect as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

  In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the notification effect, but determines the content of the notification effect after determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. May be. By using such a method, although the data amount is larger than that of the table shown in FIG. 165, the appearance rate and reliability of the effect can be set in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this alternative example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect. 169 (A), (B), and (C) proceed in the order shown in FIG. 169. The setting suggestion in the case where "Day with 4 or 5 or 6!" This is an outline of the production.

  In FIG. 169 (A), a special symbol change starts. In FIG. 169 (B), after the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the main character LCD device 1600 displays the words “Character B is a day with 4 or 5 or 6!”. In FIG. 169 (C), the dialog is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol change.

  The production that proceeds in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (D), and (E) is an outline of a setting suggestion production in the case where “day 6 is added!” Is selected as the line of character B in the line production. is there. 169 (A), (D), (E), in the effect of proceeding in the order, the setting suggestion effect starts from the start of the special symbol change, while the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect during the special symbol change end has been edited. Specifically, in FIG. 169 (D), after the start of the special symbol change, the character B's dialogue “Day with 4 or 5 or 6!” Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169 (E), at the end of the special symbol change, the dialogue of the character B, “The day with 6!” Is displayed. That is, the setting suggested by the line of the character B is promoted.

  Specifically, for example, for each of the dialogues in the dialogue rendering table (the dialogues to be finally displayed), one or more scenarios indicating the timing of the dialogue change and the dialogue at each timing, and the selectivity of each scenario are set. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialog at the timing of the dialog change according to the selected scenario.

  In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue effect table does not hold a scenario in which the setting suggested may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which a dialogue saying "It is an even number of days!" Is displayed after a dialogue saying "It is a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" desirable.

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed in the special symbol change, but another effect (for example, an effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit, etc.) may be executed in parallel. Although the example in which the character of the character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol change has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character B may be promoted before the end of the special symbol change. In addition, the character A appears before the character B's dialogue, and the character A performs an effect of speaking to the character B, but is omitted in the drawing.

  FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect. In FIG. 170 (A), the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002 during the special symbol change without the special symbol change being held. Then, in FIG. 170 (B), immediately after the game ball B is awarded to the first starting port 2002, the character “The day when 4 or 5 or 6 is attached!” Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Is done. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is undefined, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the winning. Alternatively, the character A may be displayed before the character B is displayed. In FIG. 170B, the number of suspensions indicated by the display in the suspension display area is increased by one.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (C), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol change ends. In addition, the main character 1600 still displays the character B's dialogue “Day with 4 or 5 or 6!”. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (D), a special symbol change corresponding to the winning starts. Also, at the same time as the start of the special symbol change, the line of the character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to “It is a day with 5 or 6!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of the character B is promoted.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (E), all the decorative symbols stop, and the special symbol change corresponding to the prize ends. At the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the prize, the words of the character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 change to “day with 6!”. That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of the character B is promoted.

  For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a speech look-ahead effect table (not shown) that defines the speech of the character B and the change timing of the speech. Specifically, for example, the speech look-ahead production table defines the change timing of the speech of the character B and the speech of the character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start, during, and end of a special symbol change after the winning and before the special symbol corresponding to the winning is an example of the change timing. It is desirable that the setting suggested by the dialogue is not demoted at each change timing. It should be noted that a different line look-ahead effect table may be present for each of the number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the look-ahead effect based on the pre-determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the speech look-ahead effect by referring to the dialog look-ahead effect table at a predetermined ratio, for example. In the case of promotion, in FIG. 170, the promotion is performed one step at a time (“a day with 4 or 5 or 6!”, “A day with 5 or 6!”, “A day with 6! !) In the order of ")." Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue of (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue of (D).

  Note that the setting suggestion effect may be executed under a specific situation other than the above. For example, a setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the pending ream is satisfied. The hold sequence means that the next big hit is realized by the special random number held before the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the suspension and before the end of the big hit game. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern is repeated a predetermined number of times, a setting suggestion effect may be executed in the special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestive effects]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect under specific conditions will be described.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be described. Hereinafter, both during the setting confirmation mode and during the occurrence of an error are examples of the special state. Note that the setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying setting values, which is started when it is determined in the setting confirmation processing that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

  FIG. 171 (A) is an example of an effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171 (B) is an example of the effect restriction table when an error occurs. The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode and the effect restriction table in the event of an error are stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after setting check mode]
First, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. When the setting confirmation mode is started during the execution or suspension of the change determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change) in the setting check mode, the effect restriction table at the time of setting check mode starts. A restriction flag indicating whether to restrict setting suggestion effects is stored.

  The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed). 1701 that stores the restriction flag when the setting is started, and after the setting suggestion effect is started in the setting suggestion change (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is determined to be performed and the effect related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)) A record 1702 for storing a restriction flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

  When the setting confirmation processing shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation processing shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. . Thus, the setting confirmation mode effect restriction table stores a column 1703 for storing a restriction flag when the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and a restriction flag for the case where the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. A column 1704.

  Further, when the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion change may be suspended by a game ball winning at the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to a winning at the starting port in the setting confirmation mode. In addition, each restriction flag in the effect restriction table at the time of the setting confirmation mode is, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured or in a hall or the like, the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (even if the operation medium cannot be operated by the player, The setting can be made by operating the operation medium. When a game ball enters the starting port during the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to acquire lottery information and execute a prize ball for the entered ball. However, even in such a case, in the case of the special symbol variation already suspended, the special symbol variation is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the end of the setting change mode.

  When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one of the fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of the fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of the fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

  Also, when the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, one of the fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the other is 0, and the field 1710 And one of the values of the field 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of the fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0, One value of the field 1716 or the field 1717 is 1 and the other value is 0.

  The peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect restriction pattern in accordance with the restriction flags in each state defined in the setting confirmation mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) A case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

  (1-1) After the game is restarted, a setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and it is possible to provide a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. Can be given.

  (1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, when a sound or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed as described above, so that the setting confirmation mode is not executed. However, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the setting may have been changed to the high setting.

(2) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change in the case where the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts and the game proceeds during the setting confirmation mode.

  (2-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation does not drop. In the case where voices and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these voices and images are prioritized over voices and images in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to give the player any discomfort. . Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were provided. An image indicating that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

  (2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1708 is 0 and the value of the field 1709 is 1). For example, in the case where the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as “Is high setting?” When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may have a distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2 ′) When the setting confirmation mode starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and when the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion change corresponding to the winning at the starting port in the setting confirmation mode. About setting suggestion production.

  (2'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

  (2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1710 is 0 and the value of the field 1711 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode due to doubt about the set value, the set value may be changed thereafter. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while the display indicating that the even number setting is determined is displayed in the setting suggestion effect). There is a possibility that an odd number setting will be confirmed in a later setting suggestion effect), and a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not performing the setting suggestion effect, the occurrence of such a situation can be avoided.

  It is desirable that the image, sound, light, and the like indicating the above-described setting confirmation state should appear regardless of the value of the above-described field. In addition, if the game is stopped after transition to the setting confirmation state, a new prize may be made valid. In such a case, the same processing as the processing for advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect ends). And when the game stops at the start of the setting confirmation mode.

  (3-1) The setting suggestion effect is restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has been started is cancelled, the player may have a distrust that the setting may have been changed. The occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

  (3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, when a sound or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed as described above, so that the setting confirmation mode is not executed. However, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the setting may have been changed to the high setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed, and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect ends). And setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode.

  (4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, the operation does not drop. In the case where voices and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being performed are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these voices and images are prioritized over voices and images in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to give the player any discomfort. (The image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the character indicating the setting confirmation mode such as “during setting confirmation mode” are displayed so as not to overlap. ). Note that the same processing can be performed for this display and the like even when an error described later occurs. It should be noted that “not overlapping” here indicates that the appearance from the player does not overlap with the image data actually set in the RAM.

  Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were provided. An image indicating that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

  (4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, in the case where the player confirms the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as “Is high setting?” When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may have a distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4 ′) When the setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and when the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode, a new game corresponding to the winning at the starting port in the setting confirmation mode is performed. About setting suggestion effect of various setting suggestion change.

  (4'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

  (4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1716 is 0 and the value of the field 1717 is 1). For example, if the hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode due to doubt about the set value, the set value may be changed thereafter. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while the display indicating that the even number setting is determined is displayed in the setting suggestion effect). Since the display for confirming the odd number setting is made in the later setting suggestion effect), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not performing the setting suggestion effect, the occurrence of such a situation can be avoided.

  In the case where the game also proceeds in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting confirmation mode extends over a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU may start the setting confirmation mode based on a notification from the main control MPU 1311, for example. When the first symbol is determined or when the next fluctuation is started, it is determined whether or not the mode is the setting confirmation mode. If the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, the peripheral control MPU performs a setting suggestion effect together with a change corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and it is possible to provide a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. Can be given.

  The peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. In the case where the player has confirmed the setting value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect is different from the actual setting (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "Is high setting?" When an effect occurs), the player may have a distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

  As described above, in the case where the setting suggestion effect is performed and the case where the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. Amusement machines that meet the needs of the business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestions when an error occurs]
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. The effect production restriction table at the time of occurrence of an error indicates a setting suggestion effect of the change when an error occurs during execution or suspension of the change determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as setting suggestion change in this chapter). A restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict is stored.

  The error production effect restriction table includes a record 1801 storing a restriction flag when an error occurs before the setting suggestion effect starts, and an error occurring during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect starts in the setting suggestion change. And a record 1802 for storing the restriction flag in the case of the execution.

  In addition, the error includes a strong error that is notified by stopping the game, and a weak error that is notified while the game is in progress. An error that detects an illegal magnetism in the shooting sphere sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. A full tank error (an error indicating that the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

  Therefore, the error production effect restriction table, a column 1803 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error reported when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 for storing a restriction flag corresponding to an error reported while the game is in progress. ,including.

  In addition, when the game progresses even during the occurrence of an error, a new setting suggestion change may be suspended by a winning of the game ball at the starting port during the occurrence of the error. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion change corresponding to a winning in the starting port during the occurrence of an error.

  Note that the restriction flag in the effect restriction table at the time of occurrence of an error indicates that, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall, the operation medium provided to the pachinko machine 1 (even if the operation medium cannot be operated by the player, the player can operate it) The setting can be made by using an operation medium.

  Note that in the error-related effect restriction table, one of the fields 1806 and 1807 is 1 and the other is 0, one of the fields 1808 and 1809 is 1 and the other is 0, One of the fields 1810 and 1811 is 1 and the other is 0, one of the fields 1812 and 1813 is 1 and the other is 0, and one of the fields 1814 and 1815 is 1 and the other value are 0, one of the fields 1816 and 1817 is 1 and the other value is 0.

  The peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect restriction pattern according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) A case where an error starts before the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

  (1-1) After the game is restarted, a setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By performing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is canceled by the hall clerk, and to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. it can.

  (1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). Thus, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous to the player, in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the player proceeds with the game so as not to cause an error. Can smoothly proceed, and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (2) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change in the case where an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game proceeds even after the error occurrence starts (weak error).

  (2-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even during the occurrence of the error, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, when a sound and an image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sound and the image are output in preference to the sound and the image in the setting suggestion effect. I do. At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player uncomfortable. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were provided. An image indicating that an error has occurred may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

  (2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1808 is 0 and the value of the field 1809 is 1). Thus, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous to the player, in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the player proceeds with the game so as not to cause an error. Can smoothly proceed, and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (2 ') New setting suggestion corresponding to winning at the starting port during the occurrence of an error when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game proceeds during the error (a weak error) About setting suggestion effect of fluctuation.

  (2'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even during the occurrence of the error, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). As a result, since the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning in which an error has occurred, the player stops the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

  (3) A case where an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

  (3-1) The setting suggestion effect is restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If the setting suggestion effect that has been started is cancelled, the player may have a distrust that the setting may have been changed. The occurrence of a situation can be avoided.

  (3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). Thus, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous for the player such that the setting suggestion effect is stopped, and the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, Can smoothly proceed, and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

  (4) The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion change when an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses (weak error) even during the error occurrence.

  (4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even during the occurrence of the error, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, when a sound and an image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sound and the image are output in preference to the sound and the image in the setting suggestion effect. I do. At this time, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed so as not to make the player uncomfortable. Also, in order to provide the player with an expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" or "when the setting suggestion effect indicating high setting was displayed", hide all the setting suggestion effects. Then, an image indicating that an error has occurred may be displayed on main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  (4-2) The setting suggestion effect is stopped (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). Thus, when an error occurs, a situation may occur that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is stopped, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to cause an error, and It can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4 ′) When an error occurs during the setting suggestion change and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game proceeds during the error occurrence (weak error), a new game corresponding to the winning at the start port during the error occurrence is performed. About setting suggestion effect of various setting suggestion change.

  (4'-1) A setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even during the occurrence of an error, so that the operation of the gaming machine is not reduced. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect occurs even during the occurrence of the error, the interest of the player can be improved.

  (4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). As a result, since the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning in which an error has occurred, the player stops the launch of the game ball and releases the error early.

  As described above, in the case where the setting suggestion effect is performed and the case where the setting suggestion effect is not performed, the effect is exerted on both sides. Amusement machines that meet the needs of the business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on directing new start winnings]
Hereinafter, a description will be given of the limitation of the effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning during the special symbol fluctuation and the state in which the new fluctuation can be held. FIG. 172 is an example of the new start winning effect restriction table. The new start winning effect restriction table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

  The new start winning effect restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The condition in the condition column is defined by an assumption about the effect of the previous change, and an effect restriction on the effect in a new starting winning prize based on the assumption. Note that the pre-change in this chapter is a change immediately before a change corresponding to a new start winning. The condition of the effect of the preceding change includes a case where only an expected suggestive effect of whether the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit is performed, and a case where an expected suggestive effect and a setting suggestive effect are performed.

  In addition, as the production restriction of the look-ahead effect in the new start winning, only the setting suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect in the pre-fetch effect are restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect) (The suggestion effect and the expectation effect are not executed), and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation effect in the prefetch effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect and the prefetch effect are executed).

  The reference processing table column stores an identifier of a processing table that is included in the corresponding condition and that is referred to when executing the prefetching effect restriction in a new start winning. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is to be executed and which processing table is used to determine a process for a prefetch effect in a new start winning.

  In addition, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag columns corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start prize production restriction table may be, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (either an operation medium that cannot be operated by a player or an operation medium that can be operated by a player) at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or a hall. Can be set.

  When the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new start winning in a special symbol change and a state in which the new change can be held, and that only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the new start winning effect restriction table Of the "previous fluctuation effect" column is a flag column corresponding to "expectation suggestion only", and a condition indicated by a condition column corresponding to a flag column storing 1 as a value is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column to determine the content of the prefetch effect in the change corresponding to the new start winning.

  Similarly, the peripheral control MPU performs a new start winning when there is a new starting prize during a special symbol change and a state where a new change can be held, and an expected suggestive effect and a setting suggestive effect are executed in the previous change. Referring to the processing table corresponding to the flag field corresponding to “expected suggestion + setting suggestion” in the “previous fluctuation effect” column of the effect restriction table, and corresponding to the flag column storing 1 as the value, The content of the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning prize is determined.

  Hereinafter, each condition shown in the condition column will be described. The first condition (the condition under which the processing table 1 is selected) is that, when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Is to be done. Under the first condition, an expectation effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player has an increased sense of excitement due to the expectation of the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is performed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the consciousness of the player is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so There is a possibility that the feeling of elation will be reduced. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation effect effect and cause the player to enjoy the setting. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the first condition.

  In the first condition, the expected suggestion effect is performed in the previous change. In this state, if the setting suggestion effect is further performed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player may In addition, even if it is assumed that there is a deviation in the previous change, it is still possible to expect a change corresponding to the new start winning, so that a sense of security can be provided to the player.

  For example, in the case of selecting an effect using the notice effect table shown in FIG. 165, for example, the peripheral control MPU determines the effect based on the table, and then determines whether or not the flag in the condition column indicating that the setting suggestive effect is to be restricted is 1. (Restriction or not), and if it is 1 (restriction), even if “set” is selected, the display is rewritten and displayed without “set”, thereby limiting the setting suggestion effect. I do. In other words, the peripheral control MPU can determine the effect, and then execute the determination process, thereby using the notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 to limit the setting suggestion effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold the effect table for each effect restriction type, the data amount can be reduced. In the same manner, in the case of the expected suggestion effect to be described later, the peripheral control MPU uses the final reserved color table of FIG. The selected hold display is rewritten to white and displayed.

  The second condition (the condition under which the processing table 2 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion are set as the prefetch effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is to limit both productions. Under the second condition, an expectation effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player has an increased sense of excitement due to the expectation of the big hit. In such a state, when a setting suggestion effect and a period attitude suggestion effect are executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player's consciousness is directed to these effects, There is a possibility that the feeling of elation in the effect of the previous fluctuation may be reduced. Therefore, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed by executing the second condition.

  The third condition (the condition under which the processing table 3 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect and an expectation suggestion as a pre-reading effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change. It is not to limit any of the productions. Under the third condition, an expectation effect is performed in the previous change, so that the player has an increased sense of excitement due to the expectation of the big hit. In such a state, the setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, so that in addition to the excitement for the jackpot, the excitement for the setting suggestion effect (particularly, the high setting confirmation suggestion effect) Or, when a high setting confirmation effect is executed) can be given to the player.

  The fourth condition (the condition under which the processing table 4 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of a change corresponding to a new start winning when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. The only thing that is restricted. In the fourth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, a sense of excitement that the player may win the jackpot in the previous change, and (especially the high setting suggestive effect or the high setting finalized effect) If you run), you feel the excitement, and the setting suggests. In such a state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that a feeling of excitement to the expectation for the big hit in the suspension of the previous change may decrease. .

  Specifically, for example, when the setting 4 or more is determined in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting 5 or more is determined in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, The setting suggestion effect includes a lot of inaccurate information (it suggests that the setting may be the setting 4 even though the setting is originally 5 or more). In such a case, the player estimates that not only the setting suggestion effect in the previous change but also the expected suggestion effect includes a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, the display mode is red. It is possible that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is not high even if the reservation is held), and there is a possibility that the euphoria for the expectation suggestion effect may be reduced. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by executing the fourth condition.

  The fifth condition (the condition under which the processing table 5 is selected) is that, when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect is set as a pre-reading effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning. And the effect of the expected suggestion. In the fifth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, if the setting suggestion effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, a plurality of setting suggestion effects are performed in a short period of time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may guess the setting value with high accuracy (for example, when the odd setting suggestion effect and the high setting suggestion effect are performed, the setting is likely to be 5). In such a state, if it is determined that the setting is low for the player, there is a risk that the game with the pachinko machine 1 may be stopped, and if it is determined that the setting is high, another pachinko machine in the hall may be used. The operation of the machine 1 may be reduced. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by executing the fifth condition.

  In particular, if the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed as a look-ahead effect even in the change corresponding to the new starting prize, many effects occur in a short period of time. And the player may be confused. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by executing the fifth condition.

  The sixth condition (the condition under which the processing table 6 is selected) is that, when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, the setting suggestion effect is set as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. And expectation suggestion effects are not restricted. Under the sixth condition, since the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous change, the player assumes the degree of expectation of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, when the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are performed in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation due to the two expectation effect effects is increased.

  Specifically, for example, when a setting suggestion effect indicating a setting of 4 or more is performed in the previous change and a setting suggestion effect indicating a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in a new start winning, The degree of expectation at the setting of 4 or more is assumed for the expected suggestion effect in the previous change. However, since the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect in a new start winning prize suggests a setting of 5 or more, the degree of expectation for the expectation suggestion effect is assumed to be 5 or more. The sense of excitement increases.

  As described above, the effect is exhibited for each of the look-ahead production restriction contents corresponding to the new start winning, so that such a look-ahead production restriction content can be set by a hall or the like, so that a business style such as a hall needs to be set. Gaming machines can be provided.

  Hereinafter, each processing table and the look-ahead effect performed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored, for example, in the peripheral control ROM.

  FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, common contents of each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous change, the processing content related to a new start winning corresponding to the winning type, and the processing number that is the identifier of the processing content.

  It should be noted that the processing contents held by each processing table define processing contents for prefetching effects that are not subject to restriction. Specifically, for example, as the look-ahead effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing content of the processing table 1 which is a table referred to when only the setting suggestion effect is limited includes the expectation effect effect. Processing details are defined. Similarly, the processing contents of the processing table 3 which is a table referred to when restricting both the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning include the expected suggestion effect and The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the prefetching effect to be restricted and the processing table to be referred to in the new startup winning based on the flag of the new starting winning effect restriction table, and is not the restriction target based on the processing table. The processing for the look-ahead effect is determined.

  The processing table 3 and the processing table 6, which will be described later, store a flag for selecting a processing content related to a new start winning from a plurality of processing contents. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (an operation medium that cannot be operated by a player or an operation medium that can be operated by a player) at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or a hall. ) Can be set.

  Hereinafter, the processing content related to a new start winning prize defined by the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. In the following, an example in which a reserved look-ahead is performed as a look-ahead effect that performs expectation suggestion will be described.

  The process of the process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with a reduced time. In the processing of the processing number 1, the peripheral control MPU determines that the new start winning holding display mode is a specific mode (for example, blue, green, red, or the like holding display mode) with a high jackpot expectation. At the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won in the previous change, the state of the hold display of the new start winning is returned to the default (white display mode in the final hold color table in FIG. 161). However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is erased like other hold displays. Further, the peripheral control MPU does not return the new start winning hold suspension display mode to the specific display mode at the time of shifting to the time saving after the end of the big hit (that is, keep the default display mode). Note that the peripheral control MPU does not return the new start winning prize suspension display mode to the specific display mode even if the suspension of the new prize has not been completed at the end of the time reduction. Leave the default view).

  The process of the process number 2 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit without a time reduction. In the process of the process number 2, the peripheral control MPU determines that the hold display of the new start winning prize is a specific mode having a high jackpot expectation, for example, at the start of the opening screen of the jackpot winning in the previous change, The state of the hold display of the new start winning is returned to the default. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is erased like other hold displays. Also, at the time of transition to the normal state controlled after the big hit game is over, the mode of the hold display of the new start winning is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is maintained).

  The process of process number 3 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a small hit. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start winning (that is, the hold display is continued. Specifically, for example, if the hold display mode is blue, Is continuously displayed.) In addition, the peripheral control MPU may return the state of the suspension display of the new start winning to the default at the start of the small hit opening screen won in the previous change. However, when the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hit opening screen, the hold display in the specific mode is erased like other hold displays.

  The process of the process number 4 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is out. In the process of the process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start winning (that is, the hold display is continued. Specifically, for example, if the hold display mode is blue, Is continuously displayed.)

  FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are both limited as a look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there. The processing table 2 is a table referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation effect effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, and therefore, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning.

  FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation effect is limited as a prefetch effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. is there.

  The processing of processing numbers 5 to 6 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with a reduced time. One of the processing numbers 5 and 6 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 5 and 6, the processing of the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 1.

  In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize, specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous change The second special symbol is being reserved. By the processing of the processing number 5, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change, the player does not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

  In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. In addition, since the jackpot with the time saving is won in the previous change, the change corresponding to the new winning is likely to start after the end of the time saving (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 during the time saving). When a winning is made at a high frequency and the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are suspended, the second special symbol change is executed prior to the first special symbol change.) Accordingly, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the end of the time savings by the process of the process number 6, so that the discouragement of the player due to the end of the time savings can be reduced.

  The processes of process numbers 7 and 8 are processes relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with no time reduction. One of the processing numbers 7 and 8 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 7 and 8, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of processing number 2.

  In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he / she won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game by the processing of the processing number 7, the player is not disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

  In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 8, since the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the end of the big hit, it is possible to reduce the discourage of the player for the time saving not being given.

  Processing of processing numbers 9 to 10 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a small hit. One of the processing numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 9 to 10, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 3.

  In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. In a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player. However, the processing of the process number 9 causes the setting suggestion effect to start at an early timing, thereby discouraging the player. Can be reduced.

  In the process of the process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion times for the small hits is shorter than the series of digestion times for the big hits, if the player is aware that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect Otherwise, the player may feel distrust. By the processing of the processing number 10, it is possible to prevent such a distrust from being given to the player.

  The processing of the processing numbers 11 to 13 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is out. One of the processing numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 11 to 13, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 4.

  In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning.

  In the process of the process number 12, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start only when the hold display mode in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation. During the change corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect in the new starting winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) than usual. By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels discouraged to have lost the appearance despite the appearance of the hold display having a high jackpot expectation in the previous change. it can. In FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous change, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning.

  In the process of process number 13, when the mode of the hold display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation, the peripheral control MPU suggests setting as a prefetch effect in the new start winning prize. Do not perform the production. By the process of the process number 13, although the mode of the hold display having the high expectation of the big hit in the previous change appears, the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect does not appear even in the change corresponding to the new start winning. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting into the game.

  FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and only the setting suggestion effect is limited as a look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. .

  The process of the process number 14 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with a time reduction. In the processing of the processing number 14, the processing for the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 1.

  The process of the process number 15 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with no time reduction. In the processing of the processing number 15, the processing for the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 2.

  The process of process number 16 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a small hit. In the processing of the processing number 16, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 3.

  The process of the process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is out. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

  The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when restricting only the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, so that the new start regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change. It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the winning.

  FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. The processing table 5 is referred to when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are limited as the prefetch effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table to be performed. The processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when restricting both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect restriction of the change corresponding to the new start winning, and therefore, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous change, It is defined that no special processing is executed for the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning.

  FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expected suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect are executed in the previous change, and neither the setting suggestive effect nor the expectation suggestive effect is limited as a look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Table.

  The processing of processing numbers 18 to 21 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit with a reduction in time. One of the processing numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 18 to 21, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 1.

  In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize, specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous change The second special symbol is being reserved. By the processing of the process number 18, when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous change, the player does not forget that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

  In the process of the process number 19, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. (Specifically, for example, it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize) Only when it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize, specifically, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the jackpot game won by the previous change, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous change The second special symbol is being reserved.

  By the processing of the processing number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect at the latest during the time saving big hit, and thus can obtain a double elation feeling by the time saving big hit and the high setting suggestion. Also, for example, it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, and the setting 4 or more is determined in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Is notified, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player, and By the process of No. 19, such useless effects can be omitted. Conversely, for example, when it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, the setting 5 is set in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Even if it is not informed that the above is confirmed, the player is likely to continue the game, so that the setting suggestion effect is highly likely to be a useless effect. The effect can be omitted.

  In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 20, since the setting suggestion effect often starts immediately after the end of the time reduction, the discouragement of the player for the end of the time reduction state can be reduced.

  In the process of the process number 21, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of the process number 21, it is possible to omit useless setting suggestion effects as described in the process of the process number 19, and to reduce discouragement of the player when the time-saving state ends.

  The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is a big hit without a time reduction. One of the processes of the process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of processing numbers 22 to 25, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of processing number 2.

  In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. Although the player feels disappointed that he / she won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, the processing of the process number 22 indicates that if the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the jackpot game, the discouragement is made. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

  In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when is better, a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the big hit game won by the previous change, or the like. By the processing of the processing number 23, when the setting suggestion effect starts at the latest during the big hit game, the big hit game can be enjoyed with the disappointment reduced.

  In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 24, the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the end of the big hit, so that discouragement of the player for not entering in a short time can be reduced.

  In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit useless setting suggestion effects as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the discourage of the player for not entering the time reduction. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, If the setting suggestion effect is performed as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the player who is discouraged not to enter the time reduction will show a further useless setting suggestion effect, May be turned upside down.

  The processes of process numbers 26 to 29 are processes relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is the small hit. One of the processing numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 26 to 29, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 3.

  In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. In a small hit, the player may be discouraged because only a small privilege is given to the player, but the processing of the process number 26 causes the setting suggestion effect to be started at an early timing, resulting in discouragement. Can be reduced.

  In the process of the process number 27, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when is better, a setting suggestion effect as a prefetch effect is executed before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning. Specifically, before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is, for example, during the change of the previous change, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous change, or during the small hit. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit useless setting suggestion effects as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce discouragement of the player due to the fact that only a small merit is given in a small hit.

  In the process of the process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. Since the series of digestion times for the small hits is shorter than the series of digestion times for the big hits, if the player is aware that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the previous fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect Otherwise, the player may feel distrust. By the processing of the processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling such distrust.

  In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU sets the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, from the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning. By the process of the process number 29, it is possible to omit useless setting suggestion effects as described in the process of the process number 19, and to reduce discouragement of the player for giving a small merit in a small hit. Also, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new starting prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change, If the setting suggestion effect is performed as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, a more useless setting suggestion effect is given to a player who is discouraged that only a small merit is given in a small hit. This may cause the player to be upset.

  The processing of the processing numbers 30 to 34 is processing relating to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous change is out. One of the processing numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. In the processing of the processing numbers 30 to 34, the processing of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the processing of the processing number 4.

  In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the change corresponding to the new start winning. By the processing of the processing number 30, it is possible to reduce the discourage of the player due to the loss of the previous fluctuation.

  In the process of the process number 31, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start only when the hold display mode in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation. During the change corresponding to the winning, a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect in the new starting winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a dialogue suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) than usual. By the process of the process number 31, it is possible to reduce such discouragement for a player who feels discouraged to have lost the appearance despite the appearance of the hold display having high jackpot expectation in the previous change. it can.

  In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the pre-variation when the mode of the pending display in the pre-fluctuation pending prefetching effect is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation. Only when the setting suggested in the suggestion effect is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, the new start winning effect is set. During the change corresponding to (1), a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect in the new starting prize is executed. By the processing of the processing number 32, the discouragement of the player for the fact that the previous fluctuation, which is the mode of the hold display with a high jackpot expectation, is out of the way can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect.

  In the process of the process number 33, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start winning prize only when the mode of the hold display in the hold prefetch effect of the previous change is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation. During the change corresponding to (1), a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect in the new starting prize is executed. By the processing of the processing number 33, such discouragement can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect for the player who has not been able to obtain the expectation for the big hit and has been discouraged in the pre-change prepending effect.

  In the process of the process number 34, the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode of the hold display is not the specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high jackpot expectation, and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the previous change. Therefore, only when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect is better before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning, only during the change corresponding to the new start winning, A setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect in the new start winning is executed. A situation in which the processing of the processing number 34 amplifies the frustration of the player that the mode of the pending display of the previous change indicates a low setting in the setting suggesting effect in the change corresponding to the low expectation and the new start winning. Can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the above-described processing, even in a situation where the setting suggestion effect is not limited as a prefetch effect restriction of a change corresponding to a new start winning, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU determines the setting suggestion effect. There is no need to perform the effect. For example, when the new starting prize is performed during a big hit, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after the jackpot game, the player is likely to continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

  As in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, since the effect is exerted in each of the processes related to the new start winning determined by each process number, it is possible to set the process related to the new starting winning in the hall or the like. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of a business style such as a hall.

  Also, for example, immediately before the end of the new start prize (a probable change state in which a big hit is won or a predetermined number of special symbol changes are executed) (specifically, for example, a special until the end of the ST state) The state where the number of remaining fluctuations of the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of special symbols held, or the state where the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc.) In this case, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the greatest concern of the player is whether or not to win a big hit in the ST. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect related to a new start winning, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion effect for a high hit expectation effect, causing a situation where the player is delighted. There is a possibility that. With the above-described processing, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  Also, for example, a predetermined number of special symbol changes (specifically, for example, four special symbol changes, which is the maximum number of special symbols to be held, or a change from the ST state) after the ST state ends and the normal state is entered. Immediately after shifting to the normal state, the second start port 2004 may be open, and the new start port 2004 is opened until the predetermined number of times (for example, five special symbol changes) is performed in consideration of this. When the start winning is performed, the peripheral control MPU need not execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the greatest concern of the player is whether or not to win the big hit immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the suspension of the second special symbol that is likely to be won in the type of big hit for the player is executed. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect starts as a look-ahead effect related to a new start winning, the player immediately mistakes the setting suggestion effect for a high hit expectation effect, causing a situation where the player is delighted. There is a possibility that. With the above-described processing, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect that is completed independently in each of the plurality of holds is executed, one setting suggestion effect across the change corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example 1 of setting change / confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954, In order to distinguish between the setting change function and the setting change function, an operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  FIGS. 179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 at power-on. The power-on processing shown in FIG. 179 and FIG. 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the fetched level data in a register (step S201). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. Therefore, if the employee of the hall interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 by mistake while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to be activated, the RAM of the hall is cleared unintentionally by the employee of the hall. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By judging the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in the temporary storage means such as a register, even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power supply is stopped. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of the closing operation is reliably detected.

  Note that the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 may be different from the ON level of the setting key 971. For example, by changing the sign of the logic between the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 may be turned on at a high level, and the setting key 971 may be turned on at a low level. Further, the voltage determined to be ON by the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a fraudulent act of activating the setting change mode by changing the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves. Further, as described later, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to monitor the level of the signal of the sensor for detecting fraud.

  Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in the stages from 1 to 6, the values of the work in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 0 for setting 6). In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within a predetermined range.

  If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area, and the pachinko machine 1 waits for initialization by a reset signal (step S203). Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing relating to a normal game such as a special figure or a general figure is not executed.

  The set value is determined not only at the time of power-on, but also at the time of winning in the starting opening, at the start of the variable display game, or when the game state is switched (from the normal state to the big hit state, from the low probability state to the high probability state). , A non-time-saving state to a time-saving state, etc.). This prevents a lottery from being performed based on the incorrect set value even if the set value is incorrectly abnormal.

  When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the game is stopped and the state of the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) is maintained until the power is turned on again or the set value is changed. . If it is determined that the set value is abnormal, a predetermined value may be set. As the predetermined value, the setting value storage area may be updated using a value corresponding to setting 6 indicating the highest setting or a value corresponding to setting 1 indicating the lowest setting.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only through the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated only by turning on the power again. This is because, in addition to the malfunction, the RAM abnormality may be caused by fraud, and if the RAM abnormality caused by the fraud can be resolved by a power-on operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated without passing through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be eliminated unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since the operation of the setting key 971 which can be operated only by the employee of the hall having the key is included, the security performance against the fraud can be improved.

  In addition, in order to cope with a goto act of illegally changing the set value to an indefinite value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, the value is updated to a value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the minimum setting, and the security of the gaming machine is changed. Effectiveness can be improved.

  The setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, as shown in FIG. 201 (B), and includes, for example, a normal game state (a game startable state), a setting confirmation mode, and a setting change mode. The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

  On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 (step S204).

  Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power shutdown is compared with the checksum calculated at the previous power shutdown and stored in step S48. Instead of the checksum, a fixed value check code may be used. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup has been performed normally is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM is normally backed up when the power failure occurs (step S205).

  As a result of the determination, if either the value of the checksum or the value of the backup flag area is abnormal, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area (settings) of the main control RAM 1312 is set. (Including the area where the value is stored) (step S207), and the process proceeds to step S216. Note that erasing data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as “initialization”, and “RAM clear” is used in the same sense.

  On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and the backup flag area are normal, a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 ON, setting key 971 ON) is performed based on the value (contents) of the setting key stored in the register. Is determined. If the operation is not a setting change operation (both or both of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are OFF), the setting is made in the setting state management area to determine whether the state was being changed before the power was turned on. It is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating the change is being recorded (step S208).

  As a result, if it is stored in the register that the setting change operation has been performed, the operation to enter the setting change mode with the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power is turned on has been performed, and the setting change operation should be started. The state can be determined. If the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 to be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

  When shifting to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area in step S208, a value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the state.

  On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state is a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

  As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before turning on the power is a RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before turning on the power is not the RAM abnormality (the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S212).

  As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, so the RAM in the game control area excluding the set value and the set state management area The process proceeds to step S210 to initialize the area (clear area when the RAM is normal).

  On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is indicated in the setting state management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

  After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each unit at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S219). If a value indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220 and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so that the initial setting ends and the process proceeds to step S224.

  In step S220, an initial setting at the time of starting the game or an initial setting at the time of power recovery is performed. Thereafter, a power-on state command for notifying the state of each unit at the time of power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of power recovery is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing.

  Further, a set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), the interrupt is permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to a normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

  FIGS. 181 and 182 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 differs from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155 in that the setting change processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (Step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, determines a digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example is described in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are shared, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, LED common counters may be provided as many as the number of the indicators.

  Thereafter, a switch input process is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as step S74 in FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, there is no need to execute the setting change / confirmation processing (step S234 and subsequent steps) in the timer interrupt processing. (Eg, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt process of step S233, a performance display process (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game processing is not executed in the timer interrupt processing, and the setting change / confirmation processing is executed.

  In the setting change / confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon that the display before and after the LED display switching is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing / confirming the setting value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether an operation for changing / confirming the setting value has been performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

  If the setting change switch 972 has been operated, the set value is incremented by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the result of adding the set value exceeds the upper limit, the value is returned to the initial value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting state management area) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether an OFF edge of the output level 971 has been detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 has been operated to the normal position, so that the setting change / confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S245 without ending the setting change / confirmation mode.

  In the setting change / confirmation mode end processing, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a state in which a game can be started) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and an initial setting at the start of the game or a recovery from power failure is performed. (Step S241) to transmit a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying the state of each unit at the time of power-on (game state such as low probability / high probability, time-saving / non-time-saving). (Step S242). Then, a power-on return destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol upon return after a power failure is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing state of the special symbol / special electric accessory (the state of each processing (standby, changing, judgment, big hit, etc.) relating to the special symbol / special electric accessory) is transmitted as a command. . Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the game state related to the special symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory when the power is restored. Then, the setting value command for notifying the setting value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

  The command for notifying the setting value may be transmitted not only at the time of power-on setting change / confirmation mode end processing, but also at the start of fluctuation or at the time of game state switching. At this time, the command of the set value to be transmitted when the power is turned on and the command to be transmitted during the normal game such as the start of fluctuation may be the same command or a different command (for example, the value of the upper byte differs).

  When the set value command is made different at the time of power-on and at the time of the normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a series of commands including the set value (a change pattern command, a pattern command, etc.) at the start of the special symbol change display game. Upon receipt, it is determined whether the command is missing. By making the contents of the command different at the timing when the command is transmitted (when the power is turned on, during a normal game, or the like), the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the set value is correctly received when the power is turned on, or is different from the set value when the change is started. It is possible to determine whether a fluctuation pattern command or a symbol command is missing.

  In step S245, it is determined whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a setting for displaying an error on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate display) is performed (step S246). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting for displaying the current setting value on the base display 1317 (or the setting display 974 in the case of a separate unit) is performed (step S1). S247).

  After that, ON is output to the LED common terminal of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by a segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). As described above, after the timer interrupt process starts, the setting value change operation is determined (step S237), and thereafter, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt, and the setting value is displayed (display of the setting value). Switch). The setting value will be displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. More specifically, the setting change / confirmation process is not performed as a process at the time of power-on, but is performed within the same timer interrupt process as when a normal game is started, so that the setting change / confirmation process is being executed. Even if the power is restored after the setting key 971 is returned to the original state and the setting key 971 or the setting change switch 972 is not operated to the same position as that at the time of the power failure, the setting at the time of the power failure occurs It is possible to return to the state of change / confirmation processing. Further, in the setting change / confirmation processing, the processing executed in the normal game processing, such as the command transmission processing and the control of the dynamic lighting of the LED, can be shared.

  Then, a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt processing ends. That is, in step S249, the command stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244, and the like is actually output from the main control board 1310 as serial data.

  In the timer interrupt process described above, the process branches depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 in FIG. 181). May be provided, and different timer interrupt processes may be activated in the normal game state and the setting change mode and / or the setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all may be configured by different routines. That is, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the timer interrupt processing 1 (for setting change / confirmation) is called, and in the normal game state, the timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called. It has a process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing the output of various detection switches such as a winning opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, the register bank may be shared between the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When the bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, the bank 1 is used in both of the two timer interrupt processes. Since the two timer interrupt processes do not start at the same time, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched by a bank, and a main control side main process that is repeatedly executed and a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed. 1 (during a normal game) and a timer interrupt process 2 (setting change mode) that is executed periodically, and is common to at least two of the main control side main process, the timer interrupt process 1 and the timer interrupt process 2. Use the registers of the bank.

  The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may have different execution cycles. Since the sampling of the switches in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is performed only by the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is 4 ms. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be early (for example, 2 ms) or late (for example, 8 ms). If the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED for displaying the set value is delayed, and the display mode of the set value is different from the base display during the normal game. become. When there are eight LED commons, if the execution period of the timer interrupt process is 8 ms, the display period will be 64 ms (display ON: 8 ms, OFF: 56 ms), and if the timer interrupt process execution period is 4 ms, the display will be: The cycle is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time is lengthened in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the flickering of the LED is increased, thereby displaying the base display during the normal game. Can be recognized differently.

  When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started when the power is turned on, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is permitted, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is prohibited. On the other hand, when the game machine is started in the normal game state when the power is turned on (the mode does not shift to the setting change / confirmation mode), the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal game is permitted. At the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change / confirmation timer interrupt processing 1 is prohibited, and the normal game timer interrupt processing 2 is permitted.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart of a performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display processing, the performance (for example, base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

  The performance display process is executed at the above-described timer interrupt in the normal game state. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181, and in the base display output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 saves a stack address in the game control area, sets a stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves a register used in the game control area in a register saving buffer (step S260). S261). The save destination of the register used in the game control area in step S261 may be a work area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area. Note that the save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the first power-on flag is normal (step S262). The initial power-on flag is a flag indicating whether an area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether the power is initially turned on), and 5AH is set when the area outside the game control area is initialized. Is done. That is, if the value of the first power-on flag is 5 AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the parameter used for displaying the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, when the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the value of the parameter is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is determined in step S264. initialize.

  If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power failure flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within a predetermined range, various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and a discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and a base value is calculated ( Step S265).

  Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the section of the base value calculation (step S266), and if the switching time has come, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, the display control for each section includes displaying a test section with less than 500 out-balls, and blinking when the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out-balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000) ( Step S269).

  Thereafter, the value of the register is restored from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is restored (step S271), and the performance display processing is terminated.

  Next, a notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the main control RAM 1312 is notified when the power is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is notified, and the pachinko machine is notified to the employees of the hall. Inform the state in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The notification mode (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) described below is output in a mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The notification is controlled by selecting a notification pattern in step S246 and step S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181) together with the display setting on the base display 1317 to control the notification. Specifically, it is executed in the setting display processing in step S2069 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 190. The processing may be executed by providing a dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the main control RAM 1312 is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181). It should be noted that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified prior to the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off, or all LEDs blink at high speed at the same cycle Main liquid crystal display 1600 Display sound of "RAM error" Sound effect (sound effect) Output RAM abnormality notification sound (Change RAM abnormality notification sound The same as the notification sound other than the mode and the setting confirmation mode)
Sound (Voice) Outputs the sound of "RAM error." Volume The maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp (top lamp is provided on the door frame 3) (Excluding the ball exhaustion and stock notification LED) flashes in red Display panel decoration LED All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output re-alarm Release condition by changing setting on main control board 1310 RAM is cleared or power is turned on again to peripheral control board 1510

Next, setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights on, or all LEDs blink at medium speed at the same cycle Main liquid crystal display 1600 Display character of “Setting is being changed” Sound (sound effect) Sound of notification of setting change mode Output sound (voice) The sound of “Setting is being changed” is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). The maximum volume frame decoration LED that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player A predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 ( Display lamp decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (Game machine error signal) Output re-alarm Release condition Peripheral control board 1510 “A001H” was received as the power-on operation command.

Next, setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is activated in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights on or all LEDs blink slowly at the same cycle Main liquid crystal display 1600 Sounds "Setting is being confirmed" Sound (sound effect) Outputs notification sound of setting confirmation mode (Notification of setting confirmation mode) (The sound may be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode.)
Sound (voice) The sound of “Setting is being confirmed” is output a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). Output volume The maximum volume frame decoration LED that is not dependent on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player is provided on the door frame 3. Predetermined frame lamps (including the top lamp, excluding the ball exhaustion and stock notification LED) blink in white Display panel decoration LED All lights off External output (security signal) Output test signal (gaming machine error signal) Output release signal A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the peripheral control board 1510 receives “A001H” as the power-on operation command.

In the notification of the three states described above, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are notified in that order. More specifically, the priorities may be determined in the order shown in FIG. Note that the priority 1 has a higher notification priority, and the priority 9 has a lower notification priority. That is, when a plurality of notifications are to be given, a notification with a high priority (a small number) is given. In addition, when a plurality of notification conditions having the same priority are satisfied and the notification conflicts with each other, even if the plurality of conflicting notifications are switched and reported, the previously established notification is performed, and after the notification is released. If the conflicting notification satisfies the condition, the conflicting notification may be performed. Specifically, at the priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so that the notification does not conflict. At the priority level 4, the prize ball excess abnormality notification and the normal electric accessory winning prize abnormality notification occur at the same time, and the two notifications may conflict with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification priority when abnormality of RAM is detected 2: Setting change notification priority in setting change mode 3: RAM clear when main control RAM is initialized by operation of RAM clear switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clearing by setting change)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification priority in the setting confirmation mode 4: Excessive prize ball abnormality notification priority when a prize ball is paid out by a predetermined number or more 4: Normally a predetermined number or more when the normal electric accessory is not operated When a prize is detected or when one or more prizes are detected at the time of activation of the normal electric porcelain, the normal electric prize winning prize abnormality notification priority 5: the difference between the number of prizes and the number of discharges in the large prize port Is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, emission abnormality notification priority 6: vibration sensor abnormality notification priority when vibration is detected 7: door opening abnormality notification priority when door frame 3 or body frame 4 is opened 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a winning is continuously detected for a predetermined number or more when the large winning opening is not operated, or when a single big hit is made, a predetermined winning or more is won. Notification of abnormal winning prize winning when detected

  Next, details of the above-described power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) will be described. FIGS. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by main control MPU 1311 at power-on.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at the address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidation and the prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating an area to be used in the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In order to release the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). Thereafter, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). Once the power failure clear signal is set ON and then OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

  Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read out from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state where the employee of the hall is not intended. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on process, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage unit later, even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, Then, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of the power-on operation is reliably detected.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2006). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the process waits in step S2006 until the power supply voltage is stabilized.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in the stages from 1 to 6, the values of the work in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 0 for setting 6). In the case of 5), if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within a predetermined range.

  If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H) is recorded in the set state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is set. Wait for initialization by. Since the set value is not within the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the set value is abnormal, it is not corrected. For this reason, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. At the hall where the pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, clear the latent probability change (high probability non-time saving) and return to the normal state with low probability time saving) In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the set values are initialized by the RAM clear operation during business hours, the power is turned off and the setting change mode is started to reset the set values and the business is continued, and the original set values are reset. There is a need. In order to avoid such trouble, the set value is maintained without being cleared by the RAM clear operation.

  On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, and the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires. (Step S2008). The waiting for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time after the power is turned on and before the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even after the setting value is determined.

  Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2009). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the process stands by in step S2009.

  Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in a register (step S2010). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from data used as a game control area (excluding data saved to the stack) in the area backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power supply was last shut down, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that backup has been performed normally (the processing at the time of power failure has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. (The power-off process has not been executed normally), and it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal.

  If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). .

  Then, of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2013). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2014). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the flow advances to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the apparatus was in the setting change mode when a power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

  When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

  On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

  Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 in FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 is different. Size can be reduced.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, it is determined that a RAM clear operation has been performed, and the flow advances to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, when it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area and is maintained until the power is turned off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off by performing a setting change operation after the power is once turned off, the RAM abnormality can be canceled. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area is changed from the value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) to the value indicating the setting change. (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the return from the RAM abnormality always goes through the setting change. In other words, it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure occurrence is the RAM abnormality. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, the game state information at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred (step S2020).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022). Proceed to step S2036. That is, irrespective of whether the state at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is the setting confirmation, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

  Since steps S2018 to S2022 are executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019) and the setting key 971 (Step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2019), or after the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

  Next, FIG. 187 which is a continuation of the power-on process (FIG. 186) will be described.

  If YES is determined in the step S2014 or the step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the set value and set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). Thereafter, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, in step S2032, the determination can be made based on the determination result stored in the register.

  When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2033). The RAM (work area and stack area) used outside is initialized (step S2034). Details of the RAM abnormality initialization processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

  Thereafter, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initialized (step S2036), and the hardware random numbers (for example, random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2037). Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main control-side main process (FIG. 188).

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart of main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control-side main processing is executed after step S2039 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update processing 2 is executed (step 2041). Details of the random number update processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. In the random number update process 2, a random number other than the random number for performing the winning determination is mainly updated in the special lottery or the normal lottery.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off process (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2042). As a result, timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, and writing of data to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off is reduced, and the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off can be surely ended.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores the calculated checksum in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The target area for which the checksum is calculated is a setting state management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area after the power is turned on and before the main control side main processing is executed. And the value of the setting state management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been executed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2045). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the RAM protection is enabled (writing is prohibited) and the invalidation of the prohibited area is written into the RAM protection register, the writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the apparatus stands by until the power is restored. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating an area to be used in the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the entire prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed by setting the prohibited area as invalid. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart of a RAM abnormality initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization processing is executed in step S2034 of the power-on processing (FIG. 187).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP evacuation buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area as the stack pointer (step S2051), The value is stored in the register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the initialization is performed at the time of the first power-on, based on the value of the first power-on flag at the time of the power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means that the power is turned on for the first time as a pachinko machine, and that the power is turned on after the backup power is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is deleted. For example, when the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed on the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the supply of the backup power to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be retained.

  If it is the initialization at the time of the first power-on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if it is not the initialization at the time of turning on the power for the first time, it is determined whether or not the discharge sphere of the base calculation target is outside the predetermined range (step S2054). If the discharge ball to be calculated is outside the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball to be calculated is within the predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). Then, if the display parameters of the performance display monitor are within the normal range, the RAM abnormality initialization processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the calling source processing.

  On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is outside the normal range, 00H is written to all the work areas outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2056), and 00H is written to all the stack areas outside the used area. Is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5 AH) is set in an initialization flag at power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the calling source.

  FIG. 190 and FIG. 191 are flowcharts of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, and switches the register bank (step S2060). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1, and performs bank switching. Without using the registers of both banks. The register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to the original state. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the state is returned to the bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is allowed, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not the interrupt is permitted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as an EI instruction) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2061).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Note that the switch input processing 1 in step S2062 is processing relating to a winning signal, and the switch input processing 2 in step S2080 described below is processing relating to the input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). For this reason, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since the determination in step S2604 is NO, the winning detection is performed, but no fraud is detected. Note that, even if a winning is detected, payout of a prize ball, display of a change, and the like are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered that it is desirable that no fraud is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected.

  Note that even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input processing 1 and monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of forcibly activating the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like by a person who intends to perform an improper act (Goto).

  Subsequently, a random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. 188. In addition to these random numbers, respective values for changing the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random number and the small hit symbol determining random number updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control-side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon that the display before and after the LED display switching is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, only the game state error signal may be turned on, and otherwise, it may be turned off.

  Then, a setting process is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, a setting display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a transmission buffer of a plurality of bytes in a FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

  Next, FIG. 191 will be described. If it is determined in step S2064 in FIG. 190 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 performs switch input processing 2 for detecting the state of a sensor (switch) for detecting fraud. Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is read, and when a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input processing 2, it is determined whether fraud has been detected in the fraud detection processing in step S2084. In the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to the fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, it is also determined a winning prize such as a large winning prize port, an excessive winning of the ordinary electric accessory, and the like.

  Thereafter, a timer update process is executed (step S2081). In the timer updating process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is turned on in accordance with the variation display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol variation determined in the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process In addition to the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is transmitted to the effect that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written to the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of award balls, a self-check for creating award ball commands for paying out game balls or checking a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. Or create a command. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created award ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

  Subsequently, a frame command receiving process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is sent to the payout control board 951 in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, and the like), and stores the transmission information storage area described above. To memorize. Specifically, in the frame command reception processing, in order to perform notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command system conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the command is corrected and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) in the same manner as other generated commands. When a command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

  Subsequently, a fraud detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection processing, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormality, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the count switch detects that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 when the jackpot is not in the jackpot gaming state, the main control program is executed. Creates a prize abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Next, a command corresponding to a winning switch or a start-up switch is generated at the time of detection of the passage of various switches, and a switch passing command output process for setting the command in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2085).

  Then, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output processing is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, in order to secure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as a flag register is saved in a stack area in the game control area before and after execution of the base display output processing, and the base display is output. It is not updated during output processing. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

  Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the random number value for the big hit matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and based on the big hit symbol random value, the probability variation state is set. It is determined whether or not to shift. If the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the big wins 2005 and 2006. In the case of opening and closing the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the gaming state where the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or enlarged) so that game balls can be accepted in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player. In addition, when the certainty change condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the probability change state, and when the certainty change condition is not satisfied, the game state changes to a game state other than the certainty change state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low-probability state).

  Subsequently, a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal has been input to the input terminal, a normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the random number matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Usually called lottery). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state, so that the starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be received, and a game advantageous to the player is provided. Transition to state.

  Subsequently, an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or the big hit game When in the state, a drive signal is output to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), as a piece of output information to the hall computer, a probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information Output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output information during time reduction, start Various information regarding the game, such as a winning information output signal to output the (game information) signal and security signals to the external terminal board 784.

  In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out-balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (eg, 10 balls).

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a normal symbol or a special symbol.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2070 in FIG.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. When the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, the setting processing is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt processing, and mainly performs processing for changing the setting value.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the process returns to the calling source process without executing the setting process.

  When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process regarding the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality is caused by performing an operation of activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is once cut off and the power failure processing is executed. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original state, the setting change mode ends, and the normal game can be started.

  Also, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than the activation of the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, The RAM abnormal state continues and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal game state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode without fail.

  On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or detects whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF.

  If it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting state management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the calling source process.

  When the operation of terminating the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the output time value is set in the security signal output timer, so that the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the end of the setting change mode is set. Provide. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set in the security signal output timer as the output time value. The security signal can be reliably detected by the hall computer.

  In addition, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

  Further, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, when the power is restored, if a hot start is performed in the normal gaming state, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops the output of the security signal.

  When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting check mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is performed.

  When the mode is shifted to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. When the RAM abnormal state continues, since the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, a security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. In the case of a hot start, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, a period during which the output of the security signal is stopped is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to illegal detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during the security signal output due to RAM abnormality, the power returns and the RAM abnormality continues. -When the power is restored during the security signal output in the setting change mode, the power returns, and the setting change mode continues.- After the power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting check mode, the power returns. And the setting confirmation mode continues

  As described above, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the hall computer side outputs the security signal. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been released.

  In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for outputting the security signal. After the elapse, the output of the security signal is stopped. Also, in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether the operation has been performed (step S2106). Note that the configuration change switch 972 may be configured to double as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, the value is set to 1 (step S2107). Thereafter, the process returns to the calling source process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, in the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Without returning to the calling process.

  When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON. As described above, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the mode is the setting change mode when the power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned ON when the power failure is restored, the setting change switch 972 is not operated. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

  Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2113), and to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). Then, the process returns to the calling source process.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area as shown in FIG.

  Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is the initial value. The other bits should be set to 0 (step S2121). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 to 1 is because the switch bit is detected as 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. In order not to make it.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2122). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormality. Return to processing.

  On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, and the work in the game control area depends on whether the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized. The area is initialized (step S2123).

  Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). The power-on state command, as shown in FIG. 202 (B), is a command for notifying, based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area, whether or not the game can be started normally.

  Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). As shown in FIG. 202 (C), the power-on return destination command is a command for notifying a gaming state relating to a special symbol.

  Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). The setting value command is a command for notifying the setting value, as shown in FIG.

  A special symbol hold number command indicating the number of special symbol change display games to be held is transmitted together with the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command, and the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are transmitted. May be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. The order of transmission of the special symbol hold number command is transmitted during the transmission of these commands, even after transmission of the power-on status command, power-on return destination command and set value command, or before transmission of these commands. You may.

  Thereafter, the process returns to the calling source process.

  The power-on setting processing is executed when the power is restored after the power failure is not in the setting change mode or the setting check mode, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting check mode ends. , The power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command) are transmitted at the time of power failure recovery that is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for performing a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the interruption prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets the interruption permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 in step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt is prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process, Interruption is permitted after the initial value random number update processing. The initial random number is a random number for judging a big hit of a special symbol, a random number for a lottery for a normal symbol, and a type of a symbol at the time of a special symbol big hit (low probability / high probability / time reduction / non-time reduction, etc.). ) Is a random number for changing an initial value for each cycle, such as a random number for determining ()).

  Thereafter, random numbers other than the hit random number (excluding the initial random number) are updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the calling source.

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The same reference numerals are given to the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In another example 1 described below, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the setting confirmation mode as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It does not switch between the confirmation modes and has only a function as an operation to change the set value.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), executes switch input processing 3 (step S2141), and details of the switch input processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. I do. In step S2141, instead of the switch input process 3 described with reference to FIG. 197, the switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied.

  Then, a random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063), and a setting change / confirmation process is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change / confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, switch input processing 2 is executed (step S2080), timer update processing is executed (step S2081), and prize ball control processing is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, a frame command receiving process is executed (step S2083), a fraud detection process is executed (step S2084), and a command output process at the time of switch passage is executed (step S2085).

  Then, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), base display output processing is executed (step S2087), and the flag register evacuated to the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2087). S2088). Subsequently, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and an output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Further, the peripheral board command transmission processing is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), and the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption. I do.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input process 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt process, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs an input to the main control RAM 1312 as input information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and obtains the number of times of processing repetition from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of repetitions of the process is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address specified by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2162), and the input level data area address specified by the switch winning information data is obtained (step S2163). Further, input information is read from the obtained input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected using a logical correction value designated by the switch winning information data (step S2165).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode with reference to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). If it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, the bits of the input port used during the normal game can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the case of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during the setting change / confirmation specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode among the input ports can be acquired.

  Thereafter, input level data is generated from the bits obtained by the mask processing, and the input level data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

  Then, edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area specified by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

  Thereafter, the next block is set as switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether or not the processing of all switch input ports has been completed (step S2172). If it is determined that the processing has not been completed for all switch input ports, the process returns to step S2162 to process the next input port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing for all the switch input ports has been completed, the switch input processing 3 is completed, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption.

  FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch winning information data table.

  The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a mask during a normal game. This includes the value, the setting change / confirmation mask value, and the address of the input level data area.

  FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area.

  The switch input level / edge data area includes n pairs of an address of the input level data area and an address of the input edge data area.

  Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area as shown, it is not specified in the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set together with the input level data area in the same table. The address of the input level data area or the input edge data area is a 16-bit (2 byte) value, but is set as the address of the input level data area or the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a value of lower 8 bits (1 byte). That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change with the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table. FIG. 199 (A) shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 199 (B). Shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of repetitions of processing), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports having different logical correction values and mask values. That is, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A), the mask value is different between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. In this example, different switch winning information data tables are used for the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, and different switch winning information data can be obtained.

  In order to cope with such a configuration, the switch input process 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state, and the start address of the switch winning information data is set according to the determination result. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167 without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process. The setting change / confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change / confirmation processing shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (00H) indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change / confirmation processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the processing before the interruption. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, a setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and a setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

  FIG. 201A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

  The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is configured by 8 bits. In the illustrated example, at bit 7, a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 is detected at level 1. In bit 6, at level 0, a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected. In bit 5, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned ON, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door opening sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism, the level becomes 0. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

  FIG. 201B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting state management area.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

  The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting is changed from 08H to 02H in the setting change mode by the next setting change operation at power-on, and from 02H to 00H when the setting change mode ends.

  FIG. 202A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, and if the value transmitted as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware abnormality in which the output becomes 0. Is set to 1.

  The power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, it is created once in the case of a hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is created twice: power-on processing and setting change / confirmation end.

  Upon receiving the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification in the above-described manner according to the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the state of the RAM abnormality (see FIG. 184).

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the received game command may be inconsistent because the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game command during a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

  In a state where the game command is invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the operation corresponding to the received command is performed for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, and the like). May be performed), and the fact that the game state mismatch has occurred may be notified using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp. Further, the fact that the game state mismatch has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This means that if no effect is performed until a predetermined condition is reached, a player who cannot understand that the inconsistency in the game state has occurred will not start the special symbol variation display game even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a failure of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent a trouble that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing a normal game process, so that the function display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol on the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Is done.

  FIG. 202B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command for notifying, based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area, whether the normal game start is possible. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes. If the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game can be started. The series code of each pachinko machine may be notified using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, if bits 6 to 4 are used, eight series can be identified. Note that the power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. When the power-on state command illustrated in FIG. 220C is used, information recorded in the power-on buffer (game state before power failure) can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 202C is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on return destination command. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying a gaming state relating to a special symbol. For example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte is a gaming state relating to the special symbol. Show. The power-on return destination command notifies the special symbol state and the operating state of the special electric accessory at the time of the power failure. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a setting value command. The set value command is a command for notifying the set value. For example, the set value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A1H, and the lower byte indicates the set value. The set value command is transmitted at the time of recovery from a power failure that is not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode. In addition, it is transmitted when the special symbol starts to change or when the game state changes (at the start and end of a big hit, a certain change, a reduction of time, etc.). Thereby, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the set value command transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 is changed to a correct set value in a subsequent game (for example, the start of the change of the special symbol), so that the erroneous setting is performed. The effect is not performed based on the value. The effect based on the set value is an effect that suggests the set value using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, a sound, a movable body, and the like. The setting value is indicated by generating the signal. This setting value suggestion effect may also include effects in other aspects of the effects exemplified below, and may also include gasses. As a setting value suggestion effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the setting value, and changes the pattern variation mode from the normal state (for example, the left and right middle pattern variation). The timing of starting and fixing is different from the normal timing (normal symbols start to change at the same time, and if the setting is high, start changing in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), voice Is used, a notification sound corresponding to the set value is generated with a predetermined probability at the time of starting opening prize, or a sound during the production is generated as a sound different from the normal time (a normal time is a male voice, and a high setting is a female voice). Voice, etc.), etc.

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating a processing state related to a special symbol / special electric accessory, and m is a value corresponding to a set value.

  As shown in the figure, in the hot start in which the normal gaming state starts, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (310nH) → the setting value command (A10mH) Sent in order.

  When the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command ( A10mH).

  In the setting change mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation is performed. Command (A001H) → power-on status command (3001H) → power-on return destination command (3101H) → set value command (A10mH).

  In the setting confirmation mode, first, after the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, the set value is checked, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H). The power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (310nH) → the set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

  When the RAM is abnormal, first, a power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted, and a setting change mode is activated by a setting change operation (the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is turned off. The power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. Then, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH). Sent.

  When the RAM is abnormal, first, the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted. If the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after the power is turned off, the RAM abnormal state continues and the power-on operation command (A009H). ) Is sent. Then, after returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH). Sent.

  As described above, when the main control board 1310 is activated in the normal game state, a plurality of commands indicating a return of the power supply (a combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) are activated at predetermined timings. Sent to control board 1510. For this reason, when it is determined that the normal gaming state can be started after all of the series of commands from A001H to A10mH have been received, and when a part of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal game state cannot be started, and the start of the normal game state is notified.

  In other words, in the same manner as the above-described effect in which the game command is invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, and the sound are received. An effect corresponding to the given command is performed), and the fact that the game state is inconsistent may be notified using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game supplements the set value command that was missed at power-on, and starts the normal game. May be.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command when a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) is set as the set value when the peripheral control board 1510 is powered on. It may be updated to a setting value corresponding to the command.

  The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both indicate a normal game startable state and are normally transmitted continuously. It is enough to send it to the board.

  FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating a state transition of a value set after the power is restored from the state before the power is turned off in the setting state management area.

  The power-on operation of the pachinko machine having the setting function differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is operated. There are several patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An example of the operation shown in FIG. 204 (A) when the power is turned off immediately before and the normal game state (VALID_PLAY = 00H) and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value accompanying the setting change.

  If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power and the setting key 971 is operated ON, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. The main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the current set value for setting confirmation.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control area including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. The main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the display has been switched to the performance display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) as an initial display when the power is turned on.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 are maintained as they were before the power failure. In addition, even if not all the storage contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained, at least an area in which information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (a storage in which information on the game is stored). Areas (special symbols, areas related to ordinary symbols, areas related to winning balls, random numbers generated by the program (variable pattern random numbers, initial random numbers, etc.)) need only be maintained, and are necessary to return to the gaming state before the power failure. The area in which the information other than the information is stored may be in a state different from that before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Note that the same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the display has been switched to the performance display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) as an initial display when the power is turned on.

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204 (B), in the operation example 1 in which the setting change mode is set immediately before the power is turned off and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power failure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is performed when the power is turned on. Regardless of the presence or absence of the setting key 971, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value accompanying the setting change.

  Initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 is performed by initializing an area used as a game control area including a stack area together with a storage area initialized by an initialization process already executed when a power failure occurs. Good. For example, when the power supply is cut off during the initialization processing of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage areas for which the initialization processing has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, irrespective of the progress of the initialization process at the time of the power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored may be initialized.

  When a power failure occurs during the initialization processing, an area (for example, a RAM clear processing flag) for storing whether the initialization processing is being performed in the main control RAM 1312 is provided, and while the RAM clear processing flag is set, It is preferable to prohibit the writing of data to the storage area to be initialized.

  Further, the process of monitoring the power failure in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be repeatedly executed. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, a power failure notice signal may be monitored by a timer interrupt.

  The power outage monitoring process and the process at the time of power failure can be executed as a common process in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, or can be executed as separate processes. The mode may be executed by a common process, and the normal game state may be executed by another process. In other words, among the three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine, the power failure monitoring process and the power-off process may be common in at least two states.

  As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is shut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of restoration from power failure, the setting is always performed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during a setting change operation in a hall, the setting change mode may be activated when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 for starting the setting change mode when the power is restored may not be operated. For this reason, by performing control as in the pattern 2-1, it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

  For example, when only the setting key 971 is operated when the power is restored (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the operation is started in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. When the setting key 971 is not operated, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to start the normal game state, or when no switch is operated, the normal game state is started. However, when the control is performed as in the pattern 2-1, the control always starts in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the main control RAM 1312 is in the setting change mode when the power is turned off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power failure, unlike the pattern 2-1, even if the operation is performed in another pattern shown in FIG. Good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned ON, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value accompanying the setting change.

  When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main control RAM 1312 Does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312. The base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop in the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process.

  That is, in the pattern 2-1, the mode changes to the setting change mode unconditionally regardless of the state of the setting key and the RAM clear switch after the power is restored. When the operation for starting the setting change mode is performed with the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is started. When the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM abnormality). And That is, in the pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power return is operated, the normal game is not started as the RAM abnormal state, and the normal game is performed after passing through the setting change mode. Start the game. Therefore, when the operation for starting the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode such as the RAM abnormality or the setting confirmation mode, and the game stop state is notified to notify the hall stop state. May be prompted to operate the setting change mode.

  When the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are not initialized, and until the next setting change operation is performed. Stand by in the game stop state. The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop in the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process. After that, once the power is turned off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated in the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is updated. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Patterns 3-1 and 3-2>
An operation example shown in FIG. 204 (D) in the case where the setting confirmation mode is set immediately before the power is cut off, and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned ON, the main control RAM 1312 is set as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the used area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a set value accompanying the setting change.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power and the setting key 971 is operated ON, the content stored in the main control RAM 1312 does not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the current set value for setting confirmation.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF), the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. The main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the display has been switched to the performance display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) as an initial display when the power is turned on.

  If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored content of the main control RAM 1312 does not change. The main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. In addition, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the display has been switched to the performance display (for example, all blinking for 5 seconds) as an initial display when the power is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1311 may be activated in the setting confirmation mode as in a pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204 (E), and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (the original value). The same value (01H) may be set irrespective of the setting), the base display 1317 may display the current setting value for setting confirmation.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204 (F), an operation example in the case where there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of restoration from power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 stores the game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. The main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is 02H. The base display 1317 displays for setting change.

  If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, that is, if at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main The contents stored in the control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stop state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. The base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code).

  When there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the immediately preceding power shutdown, if the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized before the power shutdown, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized again at the time of restoration from power failure, and (1) Initialize the devices built in the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random numbers. (3) It is preferable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of the interrupt permission settings.

  Further, even if the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality at the time of the immediately preceding power-off, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined before the determination whether the state before the power failure is the RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). The presence or absence of the operation of is determined. Then, when a setting change operation (the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is started. The state of the RAM abnormality is maintained regardless of whether the operation for starting up is performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, or none is operated. That is, normally, when the setting change mode is started and when the setting check mode is started, the processing of the setting change mode and the processing of the setting check mode are executed in the timer interrupt processing. In this case, different processing is executed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again after returning from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the processing in the setting change mode is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but the operation is started in the setting check mode. When this is done, processing different from normal processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing.

  As described above, when the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
-Time chart for normal setting change (Fig. 205)
-Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
Time chart when the mode is changed to the setting change mode in the setting change mode during a power failure and the setting key 971 is turned off and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off after the power is restored (FIG. 207).
-Time chart when shifting to the setting change mode in the setting change mode at the time of power failure and with the setting key 971 ON and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (Fig. 208)
Time chart when the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode in the setting confirmation mode at the time of power failure and the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 209)

  FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned on and the setting key 971 is turned on, so that the main control MPU 1311 starts in the setting change mode.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Move to change mode. The main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184 described above.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 described above according to the received power-on command.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. Reference numeral 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6). Further, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N + 1 to N + 2, and updates the base display 1317. The subsequent set value N + 2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and is updated to 1 when the set value exceeds 6. You.

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal game state. (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the processing during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. Also, the main control MPU 1311 ends the full lighting of the function display unit 1400, and starts displaying in the normal gaming state. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. By displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined manner at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and operation errors at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In the setting change mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command is 01H. M in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both indicate a normal game startable state, and are normally transmitted continuously. It is enough to send to.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect of changing the setting by some of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. To continue the production of information. In addition, in the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is not output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot recognize the transition to the setting change mode. It is to secure.

  FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the normal game state or the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is turned ON. The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 01H in the setting state management area for setting. Move to confirmation mode. The main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after confirming the setting value. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T6). By setting the value of the setting state management area to 00H, it is possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. In the setting confirmation mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the power-on return destination command.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect of changing the setting by some of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. To continue the production of information. In addition, in the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

  FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting change mode because the setting change mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before. As shown in FIG. 204 (B), if the setting change mode is set immediately before the power is turned off, the main control MPU 1311 is in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power. It shows the case of starting.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Move to change mode. The main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state by power-off and returns to the initial state. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. Reference numeral 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

  Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power-off process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and resetting due to a drop in power (5 V) before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off processing. In addition, the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004 and the like may be turned off to stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

  Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and thereafter stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , And waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

  The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board start waiting time has elapsed. Move to When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again, as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed, and the power failure processing is performed thereafter, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power-off processing. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the game control area may not be initialized by executing the RAM clearing process at the time of power recovery. After the initialization, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and starts outputting the security signal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state by power-off and returns to the initial state. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value, and uses the updated setting value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317.

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the processing during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. M in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect of changing the setting by some of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. To continue the production of information. In addition, in the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

  FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, even in the case of the setting change mode when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a different operation mode by operating the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state by power-off and returns to the initial state. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and displays the base display. Reference numeral 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

  Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power-off process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and resetting due to a drop in power (5 V) before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off processing. In addition, the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004 and the like may be turned off to stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

  Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and thereafter stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , And waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed according to the level of the signal 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so as to enter the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting change (02H), the main control MPU 1311 is restarted in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board start waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Is done. Note that the same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized again, as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed, and the power failure processing is performed thereafter, the RAM clear processing is not interrupted by the power-off processing. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the game control area may not be initialized by executing the RAM clearing process at the time of power recovery. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power failure is a setting change, YES is determined in step S2015, and the process branches to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187) to execute the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). However, if the process branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before the power is shut down will be continued without executing the RAM abnormality initialization processing step S2034. After the initialization, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, in the setting change mode, the setting change mode is activated by turning on the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned on when the power is turned on. It is possible to start the setting change mode even if it is not ON.

  Although a broken line is shown at timing T12, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 00H may be recorded and restarted in a state where the normal game cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed at the time of power recovery, the RAM is restarted in a RAM abnormal state. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally terminated at some point.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. The peripheral control board 1510 resets its operation state by power-off and returns to the initial state. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

  When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, updates the setting value, and uses the updated setting value as a base. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the setting value has been changed. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the processing during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. In the setting change mode, since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the lower byte of the power-on return destination command is 01H. M in the set value command (A10mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value as shown in FIG. The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both indicate a normal game startable state and are normally transmitted continuously. It is enough to send it to the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect of changing the setting by some of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. To continue the production of information. In addition, in the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

  FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 starts up in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

  First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply rises (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 starts up (T2).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, at the timing T4, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, it starts a customer waiting effect. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1311 reads the level of the signal of the setting key 971 and the level of the signal of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area for setting. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

  Thereafter, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power-off process, and the main control MPU 1311 stops its operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 stops, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal stops (T8). In the power-off process, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power-off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

  By turning off the output port in the power-off processing, power consumption during the power-off processing can be reduced, and resetting due to a drop in power (5 V) before the power-off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power-off processing. In addition, the output port of the signal to the solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, the second starting opening 2004 and the like may be turned off to stop the driving signal of the solenoid.

  Thereafter, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply rises (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

  The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at timing T11, and thereafter stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in a register at timing T12. , And waits for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 until timing T13.

  The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is operated to be in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is Since the value indicates the setting confirmation (01H), the device is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at timing T13 when the peripheral control board activation waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. Note that the same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not turned ON. In other words, the setting check mode is activated when the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the setting key 971 is not turned on when the power is turned on. Can also activate the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

  During the setting confirmation mode, even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the main control MPU 1311 displays the set value without updating the set value. The display is continued at 1317.

  The hall employee operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position after confirming the setting value. When detecting the OFF edge of the setting key 971, the main control MPU 1311 ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal game state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, the processing during the normal game can be executed in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310nH), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The peripheral control board 1510 knows from the received power-on state command that the normal game can be started, and executes an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 starts an effect in the normal game state (for example, a customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the power-on state command indicates that the normal game can be started. May be. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time has elapsed after the power-on state command has recognized that the normal game can be started, and the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start a customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is good to perform the notification effect of changing the setting by some of the effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal game state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. To continue the production of information. In addition, in the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect, and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the effect of the normal game state. Good.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops outputting the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode is completed in a very short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the transition to the setting change mode cannot be grasped by the hall computer. This is to secure the output time.

  FIG. 210 to FIG. 212 are diagrams illustrating a configuration example of the big hit determination threshold value table. The big hit determination threshold value table stores a big hit determination random number hit determination threshold value for random determination of a special symbol big hit.

  The big hit threshold determination table shown in FIG. 210 includes a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example in which a big hit is determined when the random number for big hit determination is larger than the threshold defined in the table.

  In the setting value table selection address table, pointer addresses of the determination threshold value table selected for each setting value are defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. Each set value determination threshold table stores a threshold at the time of low probability (normal state) and a threshold at the time of high probability (probable change state).

  At the time of the jackpot determination, a pointer address defined in an address table for selecting a set value table is obtained, and a threshold determination table for the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, the threshold for big hit determination is acquired from the selected threshold determination table using the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset. Then, if the random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning of the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired threshold, it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it is less than the threshold, it is determined to be misaligned.

  The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 includes a set value table selection address table and each set value determination threshold table. The big hit determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 211 is an example in which a big hit is determined when the random number for big hit determination is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

  In the setting value table selection address table, pointer addresses of the determination threshold value table selected for each setting value are defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value includes a lower threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state), an upper threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state), a lower threshold value at the time of high probability (probable state), and a value at the time of high probability (probable state). Stores the upper threshold.

  At the time of the jackpot determination, a pointer address defined in an address table for selecting a set value table is obtained, and a threshold determination table for the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, using the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, it is determined whether the selected block is a low-probability block or a high-probability block in the threshold determination table. Get the threshold. Then, when the random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning of the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired lower threshold and equal to or smaller than the upper threshold, it is determined to be a big hit.

  The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes a low-probability setting value table selecting address table, a low-probability setting value determining threshold table, a high-probability setting value table selecting address table, and a high-probability setting. It consists of a value determination threshold table. The big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is configured integrally with a low probability table and a high probability table, but the big hit determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 is composed of a low probability table and a high probability table. It is configured separately.

  In the low-probability setting value table selection address table, pointer addresses of the determination threshold table selected for each of the low-probability (normal state) setting values are defined. Defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold value table selected at each set value of the high probability (probable change state). The data defined in each set value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the upper byte is a fixed value, only the lower byte may be defined. The determination threshold table for each set value for low probability stores a lower threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state) and an upper threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state). The determination threshold table for each set value for high probability stores a lower threshold value for a high probability (normal state) and an upper threshold value for a high probability (normal state).

  At the time of the jackpot determination, the address table for selecting the set value table for the low probability or the address table for selecting the set value table for the high probability is determined based on the probable change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability), and is determined. The setting value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the setting value table, and the judgment threshold table corresponding to the current setting value is selected based on the acquired offset. Then, when the random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning of the starting opening is equal to or greater than the acquired lower threshold and equal to or smaller than the upper threshold, it is determined to be a big hit.

[12-17. Another example 2 of setting change / confirmation processing]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954, In order to distinguish between the setting change function and the setting change function, an operation for changing the setting value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  FIGS. 213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when power is turned on.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing at the address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidation and the prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating an area to be used in the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). Thereafter, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). Once the power failure clear signal is set ON and then OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

  Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read out from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to the operation in the operation of the process) provided in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose register is divided into bank 0 and bank 1. In step S2205, the register of bank 0 is used. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312 and is erased without retaining information at the time of power failure, and is different from the area of the RAM where information is backed up at the time of power failure. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state where the employee of the hall is not intended. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on process, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage unit later, even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, Then, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of the power-on operation is reliably detected.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2206). If the power failure notice signal has been detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, and the process stands by in step S2206 until the power supply voltage is stabilized.

  Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited (step S2207). Waiting for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be performed at any time during a period from power-on to transmission of a command to the peripheral control board 1510 for the first time.

  Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2208). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the process stands by in step S2208.

  Thereafter, a set value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range, and it is determined whether the value of the set state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the setting value confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game control area (step S2210). This is because information used in one process is not affected by the other process in order to ensure independence between the process outside the game control region and the process inside the game control region. Thereafter, a power-on-out-of-game-area RAM confirmation process is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the RAM check processing outside the game area at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

  Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is provisionally set in the B register (step S2214). The B and C registers used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. It should be noted that the general-purpose registers of bank 0 are used in the processing at the time of power-on.

  In the second embodiment, the value set in the setting state management area is different from that shown in FIG. 201B in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

  The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting is changed from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, and from 02H to 00H when the setting change mode ends.

  Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215, S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from data used as a game control area (excluding data saved to the stack) in the area backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power supply was last shut down, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that backup has been performed normally (the processing at the time of power failure has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. (The power-off process has not been executed normally), and it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal.

  If there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2217), and the information of the setting state management area is stored in the B register. Is set (step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

  Thereafter, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

  Then, of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). The register that stores the value of the PF port is different from the general-purpose register that is different from the register provisionally set in S2213 and S2214. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2221). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the flow advances to step S2230.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether or not the apparatus was in the setting change mode when a power failure occurred (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is in the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

  When it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, an abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination results stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2236.

  On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

  If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2226 and S2231 to step S2235 is different. As described above, since the value of the setting state management area is different between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process accompanying the setting change process, the caller can be distinguished even if the program for both RAM clearing processes is common. It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2226). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, the process advances to step S2235.

  In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is turned off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off by performing a setting change operation after the power is once turned off, the RAM abnormality can be canceled. That is, if it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from a value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to a value indicating setting change. (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the return from the RAM abnormality always goes through the setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure occurrence is the RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only when the setting value is changed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure occurrence is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred (step S2227).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. . In other words, even if the state at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is the setting confirmation mode, the normal game state is set if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on. In addition, when the state at the time of the power failure is the setting confirmation mode, and the setting key 971 is not operated at the time of turning on the power, the mode may shift to the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure occurs, instead of the normal game state.

  Steps S2225 to S2229 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. Therefore, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226) and the setting key 971 (Step S2228) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2226), or after the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

  If “YES” is determined in the step S2221 or the step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

  On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, a RAM clear process outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game area (step S2322), and the RAM abnormal processing outside the game area is executed (step S2233). Details of the processing when the RAM outside the game area is abnormal will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

  Then, the set value in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the area other than the set state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). In other words, the RAM clear processing outside the game control area is not executed unless the setting is changed. When the RAM is out of the game control area, as in the case of the RAM in the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is stopped. I cannot do it. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the game control area is only the setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM inside the game control area is the setting change and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (even when no RAM abnormality has occurred). (When the RAM is forcibly cleared by the operation of the employee).

  Excluding the setting value and the setting state management area in the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235 causes damage to the hall side when the setting value is set high by an illegal RAM clear operation by the player. That is, if a failure (RAM abnormality) occurs during the game at the high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clear operation changes the setting from the high setting to the low setting, causing damage to the player.

  Thereafter, all the command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because if the power is turned off without clearing the RAM after the power is turned off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the unsent command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is turned off during the transmission of the fluctuation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent fluctuation pattern command may not be transmitted. When only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the command that has not been transmitted during the setting processing after the power is restored is transmitted, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is configured based on the command. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

  Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when starting the setting change processing and when starting the setting confirmation processing. In the setting change processing, since the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, it is not necessary to separately clear the command buffer. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is preferable to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

  After that, the function of the device (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S2237), and the hardware random number (for example, random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is started (step S2238). By starting the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is updated also in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, the hardware random number is started when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. You may. Then, a power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be permitted (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main control-side main process (FIG. 221).

  FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the setting value confirmation process. The setting value confirmation processing is executed in step S2209 of the power-on processing (FIG. 213), and determines whether the setting value of the setting state management area is within the normal range and determines whether the value of the setting state management area is within the normal range. I do. The setting value confirmation process may be executed when the power is turned on, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends. In addition, it may be executed at the start of a special symbol change or at the time of a change in the game state (at the start and end of a big hit, a certain change, a reduction of time, etc.).

  In the setting value confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220A, 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area. If a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2252.

  On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in the stages from 1 to 6, the values of the work in which the setting values are stored correspond to 0 to 5 (0 for setting 1, 0 for setting 6). In case 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined that the value is outside the predetermined range.

  If the set value is out of the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on state. . On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on process.

  Regarding the values and set values recorded in the set state management area, it is also determined whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal even during the progress of the game (every start of change, at the time of switching the game state, etc.). For this reason, the condition for determining that the RAM is abnormal with respect to the set state management area and the set value during the game, and the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area in the game area excluding the set state management area and the set value, and the RAM outside the game area) The two conditions that are determined to be “work RAM abnormality” are different. Note that some of the two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, when it is determined whether the setting state management area and the setting value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two determination conditions are partially the same.

  As described above, the RAM abnormality determination conditions are different because the determination of the RAM abnormality relating to the set value is performed only when the power is turned on. This is because it is desirable to detect an abnormality at an early stage and shorten the period in which the disadvantage occurs, since the disadvantage occurs to the user.

  In addition, by substituting a RAM abnormality determination process relating to the set state management area and the set value during the game into a subroutine, the subroutine is called as necessary during the progress of the game to determine the RAM abnormality, whereby the same program is executed. The size of the program can be reduced without providing it at a location.

  Although the setting state management area is excluded from the RAM abnormality determination target at the time of power-on, it may be handled as the RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as a RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is set before the power failure, and when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal when the power is restored, the RAM abnormality has priority. For this reason, if an abnormality (that is, a RAM abnormality) occurs in the value of the setting state management area, it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the set value is stored may be a RAM abnormality determination target at the time of turning on the power, or may be a RAM abnormality determination target.

  The priority in the determination at the time of power-on is such that the RAM abnormality has the highest priority and the normal game state has the lowest priority. Furthermore, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode and executing the RAM clear processing by the RAM clear operation. As described above, by executing the determination processing in the order of the priorities of the states to be derived, a state having a high priority can be accurately derived even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

  FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at power-on. The processing for checking the RAM outside the game area at power-on is executed in step S2211 of the processing at power-on (FIG. 213), and determines an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP evacuation buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value as the stack pointer (step S2261). Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the caller are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). In the processing executed outside the game control area, a stack area outside the game control area may be used as an evacuation buffer for storing all registers.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized when the power is turned on for the first time (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5 AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like.

  If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized by turning on the power for the first time or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized at the first power-on or the like, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and whether the calculated checksum is normal. Is determined (step S2265).

  If the calculated checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the flow proceeds to step S2271. In addition, based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266, the RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2267), and the blinking cycle value (600) is set in the LED blinking cycle timer. (Milliseconds) (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking and displaying the first two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and becomes one blinking cycle when the LED blinking cycle timer times out. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and switches to the base display mode when the mode switching time timer times out.

  Thereafter, the performance display monitor display management area is set to 0 for initialization (step S2270), and the flow advances to step S2271.

  Thereafter, the power down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

  Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2272), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on process.

  FIG. 217 is a flowchart of RAM abnormal processing outside the game area. The RAM abnormal processing outside the game area is executed in step S2233 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214), and an area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP evacuation buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area as the stack pointer (step S2281), All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the calling source are stored in a register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). In the processing executed outside the game control area, a stack area outside the game control area may be used as an evacuation buffer for storing all registers.

  Then, an out-of-use-area RWM initialization process is executed to initialize an area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the out-of-use-area RWM initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the RAM normality determination value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERERROR) outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area at step S2284, it is determined at step S2231 whether the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal at the next power-on.

  Then, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is started (step S2285), the blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set to the LED blinking cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode is set to the mode switching time timer. The switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

  Then, all register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the caller saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). The stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the power-on process of the caller.

  FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the out-of-use-area RWM initialization process. The out-of-use-area RWM initialization processing is executed in step S2283 of the out-of-game-area RAM abnormality processing, and initializes an area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 initializes the main control RAM 1312 by writing 00H to a work area outside the game control area (step S2290). Then, 00H is written to the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2291). After that, the process returns to the abnormal RAM process outside the game area.

  FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214), and performs an initial setting at power-on.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). The power-on operation command is a command composed of two bytes for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 220 (B). The upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting state management. It is a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the area.

  Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 in the input level data 2 area are set to 1, which is the initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2301). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 to 1 is because the switch bit is detected as 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. In order not to make it.

  Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2303). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is either the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormality. Return to processing.

  On the other hand, if the value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, and the work in the game control area depends on whether the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized. The area is initialized (step S2304).

  Thereafter, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220 (C), the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, where the upper byte indicates 30H and the lower byte indicates the state before the power failure.

  Then, a power-on return destination command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). The power-on return destination command is, as shown in FIG. 202 (C), a command composed of 2 bytes for notifying a gaming state relating to a special symbol, and the upper byte is 31H and the lower byte is a special command when a power failure occurs. The state of the symbol and the operation state of the special electric accessory are shown. The power-on return destination command is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

  Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202 (D), the set value command is a command composed of two bytes for notifying the set value. The upper byte indicates A1H and the lower byte indicates the set value.

  In addition, the power-on state command, the power-on return destination command, and the set value command are transmitted together with a special symbol hold number command indicating the number of holds of the special symbol change display game, and the hold number display is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The state before the power failure may be restored. Note that the transmission order of the special symbol hold number command is transmitted during the transmission of these commands, even after transmission of the power-on state command, power-on return destination command and setting value command, or before transmission of these commands. You may.

  Thereafter, the process returns to the calling source process.

  The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of the setting change mode. The power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the setting key 971 is detected to be OFF and the setting change / confirmation process ends. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

  When the setting change / confirmation process is executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted twice because the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process. On the other hand, when the setting change / confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted in order for the peripheral control board 1510 to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.). By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification corresponding to a state such as a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, or a RAM abnormality.

  In the setting / confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjustment of volume and brightness by operating a button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and adjustment by the employee of the hall (the peripheral board box 1520) The adjustment of the volume and the brightness by the volume provided in the) may be effective. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until a power-on operation command indicating a normal game state is received.

  In both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, whether the operation mode is the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM abnormal state may be displayed using the entire screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. . In this case, a voice message indicating whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be output. Further, the notification may be made using a part or all of the lamps or all the lamps (including the lamps provided on the door frame 3).

  FIG. 220B is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, and the value of the lower byte stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202 (A), in another example 2, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the lower byte becomes 04H.

  Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded contents of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, and if the value transmitted as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware abnormality in which the output becomes 0. Is set to 1.

  The power-on operation command is generated at least once in the power-on processing. Specifically, an A001H or A004H command is created once in response to a hot start, a RAM clear, and a RAM error. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, an A002H or A003H command is created in the power-on processing. After that, the command is generated twice as an A001H command when the setting is changed / confirmed.

  Upon receiving the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command according to the normal game startable state (A001H), the setting confirmation mode (A002H), the setting change mode (A003H), and the RAM abnormality state (A004H). The notification is performed in the manner described above (see FIG. 184). The notification of the normal game startable state is not shown in FIG. 184, but a demonstration screen is displayed, and an effect of a standby state for explaining the game content is performed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the received game command may be inconsistent because the game state may be inconsistent. It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game command during a normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is preferable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform an effect corresponding to the game command.

  In a state where the game command is invalidated, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition among the received game commands is performed (for example, the operation corresponding to the received command is performed for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, and the like). May be performed), and the fact that the game state mismatch has occurred may be notified using the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp. Further, the fact that the game state mismatch has occurred may be notified at a low volume. This means that if no effect is performed until a predetermined condition is reached, a player who cannot understand that the inconsistency in the game state has occurred will not start the special symbol variation display game even if the player wins the starting opening. This is to prevent such a failure of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent a trouble that may occur in the hall. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, the main control board 1310 is executing a normal game process, so that the function display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol on the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Is done.

  FIG. 220 (C) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a power-on state command. Unlike the embodiment shown in FIG. 202B in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of another example 2 defines four states of 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command for notifying, based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, whether or not the normal game can be started, and for notifying the state before the power failure. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify RAM clear. If the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is a low probability / non-saving time state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and is in a normal game startable state. If the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the high probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and is in the normal game startable state. If the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and is in the normal game startable state.

  As described above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area for storing game state information at the time of the power failure in order to restore the state before the power failure occurred. , A value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer. For example, in the case of low probability non-time saving, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. In addition, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, the power-on state buffer is set to 0, so that 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it can be notified that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

  FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control-side main processing is executed after step S2240 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2310). In the second example, the power outage is monitored in the main processing. However, the power outage may be monitored by monitoring the power outage in the timer interrupt processing and detecting the occurrence of the power outage. For example, when at least one of the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is ON, the period during which the power failure notice signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. May be determined that a power failure has occurred.

  If the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for performing a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2312). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off is reduced, and the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off can be surely ended.

  After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2314), the power-off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is turned off (step S2315). Details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the flag register evacuated to the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2316).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The target area for which the checksum is calculated is a setting state management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area after the power is turned on and before the main control side main processing is executed. And the value of the setting state management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been normally executed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2318). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the RAM protection is enabled (writing is prohibited) and the disabled area is written to the RAM protection register, and writing to a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2319). (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating an area to be used in the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. For this reason, by setting the prohibited area of the RAM protect register to invalid, the reset function by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is released (not reset), and access to the entire area is enabled. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the power-off processing. The power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main control-side main processing (FIG. 221), and executes necessary processing before the power is turned off.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP evacuation buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area as the stack pointer (step S2321), All register values are stored in a register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

  Subsequently, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in a check sum storage area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). Thereafter, 5AH is set in the power down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area of the main control RAM 1312 outside the game area has been initialized (step S2324). If 5AH is recorded in the power down check area, the power outage process has been executed normally. In this sense, the power-down check area and the backup flag of the RAM in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power failure processing has been executed normally, it is determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if 5AH is set in the power down check area, the main control The initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power failure processing has been executed normally are provided in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and outside the game control area. . This is because the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area are determined twice, and since one storage area is not shared between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, they are independently determined. This is because it is desirable to process. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed, 5AH is erroneously set in the flag, and if the operation returns without performing the power failure processing, it is erroneously determined that the power failure processing has been normally executed. Is determined. The possibility of erroneous determination is reduced by performing double determination in this way.

  Furthermore, the two flags are provided in a separate area as an area (for example, an area where the lower byte (** 00H to ** FFH) or the upper byte (00 ** H or 01 ** H) of the address does not overlap). Thus, even if data is rewritten due to a defect such as noise, the data can be restored correctly.

  Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the caller saved in the register save buffer outside the game area are restored (step S2325), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the process returns to the caller.

  FIG. 223 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1, and performs bank switching. Without using the registers of both banks. The register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to the original state. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the state is returned to the bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is allowed, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not the interrupt is permitted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as an EI instruction) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2331).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2332). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  The switch input processing 1 in step S2332 is processing relating to a winning signal, and the switch input processing 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is processing relating to input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). For this reason, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since the determination in step S2335 is NO, the winning detection is performed, but the fraud by the fraud detection sensor is not detected. Note that, even if a winning is detected, payout of a prize ball, display of a change, and the like are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered that it is desirable that no fraud is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected. For example, since the operation of setting change and setting confirmation is performed in a state where the door is open, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are easily shaken. Vibration may be erroneously detected. For this reason, such false notification can be prevented by stopping detection of fraud by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In addition, the hall employee has a magnet for collecting the ball that has fallen on the floor, and it is possible to prevent false notification of the magnet held by the employee at the time of setting change or setting confirmation operation. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has means for invalidating (or restricting, restricting, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at power-on). After the end of), the fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific game state (for example, during the setting process), the fraud detection is invalidated (or restricted, restricted, suppressed, or the like) by the means.

  Note that even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input processing 1 and monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of forcibly activating the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like by a person who intends to perform an improper act (Goto).

  Subsequently, a random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, respective values for changing the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random number and the small hit symbol determining random number updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when the setting process for changing the set value is executed. This is because the hardware random number that determines the hit is updated regardless of whether the setting change or the setting confirmation is being processed, and the random number generated by software is also updated at the same timing as the activation of the hardware random number, that is, By updating even during the process of setting changes and setting confirmation, it is difficult for hardware random numbers and software random numbers to be inconsistent, and the expected value of an effect in a game or the expected value at which a big hit is derived at a specific effect Can be suppressed.

  Thereafter, a set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). Note that the set value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process. However, even if the set value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, when the fluctuation starts, when the game state is switched (for example, when the big hit probability is large). It may be performed when certain conditions such as switching, start and end of a big hit game, start and end of a time-saving state, and detection of fraud (for example, when a door is opened or magnetic detection) are satisfied. Even if it is not determined periodically in a short cycle as in the execution of the timer interrupt processing, if the determination is made when the specific condition is satisfied, the resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By confirming the value of the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation processing (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the immediately following setting state management area is confirmed (S2335). The normal game process is controlled so as not to be executed. If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon that the display before and after the LED display switching is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game area (step S2338). Then, a test signal output process is executed to output a test signal (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved to the stack area in the game area (step S2340). Before and after the execution of the processing for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and the register are saved as in the other out-of-game-area processing, and the processing returns after the processing is completed. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as processing outside the game control area. Note that the test signal processing may be executed as a process in the game control area as long as the test signal processing does not affect the game even if the processing is executed in the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as processing in the game control area, the saving and restoring (steps S2337 and S2340) of the flag register executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339) are not required.

  Then, a setting process is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, a setting display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area in a FIFO format of a plurality of bytes. The transmission information storage area stores commands generated each time a command is generated, and sequentially transmits the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that the generated command may be directly stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit in the FIFO format every time the command is generated.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2345), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

  The process after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is the same as the process described above with reference to FIG. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process advances to step S2343 in FIG. 223.

  FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. When the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, the setting processing is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 223), and mainly executes processing for changing the setting value.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the calling source.

  Thus, in the case of a RAM abnormality, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM abnormality is transmitted every timer interrupt until the RAM abnormality is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating the RAM abnormality is sent only once, the RAM abnormality is not re-notified when the command is lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine. It is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the gaming machine, the abnormality notification is not performed, so that the state of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. In addition, when the RAM is abnormal, since the game is not performed, no command other than the power-on operation command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted as long as the RAM abnormality state continues. are doing.

  That is, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is configured to execute a predetermined number of times (for example, a timer interrupt process) for a command of the same system (for example, an operation command at power-on) by executing a periodic process (timer interrupt process). The first case of transmitting only a small number of times, such as one time, two or three times, and the second case of repeatedly transmitting at predetermined intervals without limiting the number of times during operation of the pachinko machine. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted irrespective of whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 has received correctly, and no other game-related commands are transmitted when the normal game is stopped. But it is a command sent.

  When receiving the command related to the RAM abnormality, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the user about the RAM abnormality. Note that even if the same command is received again during the notification of the RAM abnormality, it is preferable to invalidate the received command related to the RAM abnormality and continue the currently performed notification. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the notification by voice from being repeated from the beginning, and normal notification can be performed.

  The command related to the RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may be different depending on the transmission timing. The command consistency may be determined by changing the command relating to the RAM abnormality according to the transmission timing. For example, a power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on, and a power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal when a normal timer interrupt occurs. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at the time of power-on is continued. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the set value and the setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during a normal game). Can be determined to be abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be different for each of the two states determined. For example, when the RAM abnormality at the time of turning on the power is continued, it is notified that the RAM is abnormal, and when the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it is possible to report that the set value is abnormal.

  During the notification of the RAM abnormality, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, adjustment of the volume and brightness by operating a button provided on the door frame 3) may be stopped. This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, the setting adjustment function by the player may be stopped until a power-on operation command indicating a normal game state is received.

  When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process regarding the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality is caused by performing an operation of activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is once cut off and the power failure processing is executed. And the RAM abnormality is eliminated. Then, by returning the setting key 971 to the original state, the setting change mode ends, and the normal game can be started.

  Further, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than the activation of the setting change mode by the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained, The RAM abnormal state continues and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and enter the normal game state, it is necessary to go through the setting change mode without fail.

  On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or detects whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF.

  If it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (it is determined that the setting change or the setting confirmation has been completed), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting state management area is initialized (step S2353). S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the calling source process.

  When the operation of terminating the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the output time value is set in the security signal output timer, so that the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the end of the setting change mode is set. Provide. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set in the security signal output timer as the output time value. The security signal can be reliably detected by the hall computer.

  In addition, when a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

  Further, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, when the power is restored, if a hot start is performed in the normal gaming state, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Alternatively, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 starts.

  When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting check mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is performed.

  When the mode is shifted to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and the security signal is output until the delay time elapses. When the RAM abnormal state continues, since the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, a security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or in the case of a hot start after the power is restored, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time for starting the peripheral control board 1510). After the transition, the output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, a period during which the output of the security signal is stopped is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to illegal detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during the security signal output due to RAM abnormality, the power returns and the RAM abnormality continues. -When the power is restored during the security signal output in the setting change mode, the power returns, and the setting change mode continues.- After the power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting check mode, the power returns. And the setting confirmation mode continues

  As described above, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the hall computer side outputs the security signal. It is possible to determine whether there is an abnormality or whether the state accompanying the output of the security signal has been released.

  In the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time for outputting the security signal. After the elapse, the output of the security signal is stopped. Also, in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356). If it is determined that the mode is set, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). Note that the configuration change switch 972 may be configured to double as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and that the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). Thereafter, the process returns to the calling source process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting state management area (that is, in the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Without returning to the calling process.

  When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON. As described above, when the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the mode is the setting change mode when the power failure occurs, and even when the setting key 971 is not turned ON when the power failure is restored, the setting change switch 972 is not operated. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. When the setting state management area is not the value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state, the setting display processing is executed in step S2342 of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 223), and executes processing for displaying the setting value.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

  Then, it is determined whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the segment terminal of the LED is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

  Thereafter, the driver is driven to output an LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2374), and to output display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). Then, the process returns to the calling source process.

[12-18. Another example 3 of setting change / confirmation processing]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In the third example described below, the main difference from the second example described above is that the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing is provided separately from the timer interrupt processing for the normal game. The processes other than those described below are the same as those of the above-described second example.

  In the third example, similarly to the second example, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 is used. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  FIGS. 226 and 227 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 at power-on.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from the address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidation and the prohibited area invalidation of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protection register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating an area to be used in the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In the third example, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Note that, when an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and when an access to the designated prohibited area is detected, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset. Good.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match, or if the backup flag is not set properly, the setting change operation is not performed after the function of the gaming machine is stopped as a RAM abnormality and the game cannot be played. The main control RAM 1312 is controlled not to be initialized and the game is not executed.

  Therefore, when the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is set to be valid, a reset occurs due to erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to malfunction or failure, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes power-on processing, Since the power failure processing has not been executed, the checksum has not been calculated, and the backup flag has not been set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is not only initialized by the RAM clearing process, but the game cannot be restarted unless a RAM abnormality canceling operation (setting change operation) is performed by an employee of the hall, so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area as “invalid”.

  Note that the prohibited area may be set valid. By setting the prohibited area to be valid, if the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed due to fraud or the like, the game cannot be restarted unless a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) is performed by a hall clerk. Therefore, it is possible to improve the tolerance against wrongdoing.

  Next, a simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set as a watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). Thereafter, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (non-power failure state).

  Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read out from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably started. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state where the employee of the hall is not intended. For this reason, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on process, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the state of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like as a temporary storage unit later, even if an employee of the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, Then, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 at the time of the power-on operation is reliably detected.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2406). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the process waits in step S2406 until the power supply voltage is stabilized. Since the watchdog timer is not cleared in the loop of step S2406, the watchdog timer generates a reset unless the power failure is released. In the reset by the watchdog timer, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing the security check unlike the system reset, and the power-on processing is executed. For this reason, unless the power failure notice signal is canceled in the loop of step S2406, the loop does not escape.

  As described above, the power outage determination process for detecting the power outage notice signal is firstly performed in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on process, and secondly in step S2450 in the main control side main process during the normal game. Running in places. In the latter (step S2450), the power failure processing after step S2462 is executed by detecting the power failure. However, in the former (steps S2406 and 2408), the power failure processing is not executed even if the power failure is detected. Note that, during the loop, the value of the checksum and the value of the backup flag are maintained, so that it is possible to correctly return to the state at the time of the occurrence of the power failure without executing the power failure processing.

  The reset in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a system reset generated by a reset circuit and a user reset generated by an access outside a designated area of the watchdog timer or the game control RAM 1312. In a system reset, the program starts after a security check of several hundred milliseconds is executed. In a user reset, the program is started immediately without executing the security check when the reset is released.

  Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs by the watchdog timer during normal game processing, the power failure processing is not performed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so that it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. You. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by the RAM clearing process, and the game cannot be restarted unless a RAM abnormality canceling operation (setting change operation) is performed by a hall clerk. On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, even if a reset is generated by the watchdog timer, the RAM clerk does not perform the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation) by the clerk of the hall, and correctly sets the state at the time of the power failure I can return.

  As described above, for the reset generated by the watchdog timer, the case where the setting change operation for canceling the RAM abnormality in order to restart the pachinko machine 1 is required and the case where the setting change operation is not required are usually provided. The occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer during a time game is when a software failure occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and contents different from the game state at the time of the occurrence of the power failure are stored. Therefore, it is desirable that the main control RAM 1312 be initialized. On the other hand, the occurrence of a reset by the watchdog timer in the power-on process is when a hardware failure occurs, and it is unlikely that the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 will be destroyed. It is because the necessity to convert is low.

  Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, the same processing is performed in other types of user resets generated by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described processing can be executed by a reset generated by one of the reset factors (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer).

  Thereafter, a sub-activation wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited (step S2407). The waiting for the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time after the power is turned on and before the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even after the setting value is determined.

  Thereafter, it is determined again whether the power failure notice signal indicates that the power failure is occurring (step S2408). If the power failure notice signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the process stands by in step S2408. Note that the determination whether the power failure notification signal is during a power failure may be made in either step S2406 or S2408, but not in both.

  Thereafter, a set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

  Thereafter, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2410), and a power-on outside game area RAM confirmation process shown in FIG. 216 is executed to determine an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (Step S2412).

  Thereafter, the RAM abnormality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is provisionally set in the B register (step S2414).

  In the third example, the value set in the setting state management area is different from that shown in FIG. 201B in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used, and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal gaming state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

  The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the value is updated from 01H to 00H, and when the setting change mode ends, the value is updated from 02H to 00H. Furthermore, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, the setting is changed from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the next setting change operation at power-on, and from 02H to 00H when the setting change mode ends.

  Further, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, a checksum calculated and stored from data used as a game control area (excluding data saved to the stack) in the area backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power supply was last shut down, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if they are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that backup has been performed normally (the processing at the time of power failure has been performed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. (The power-off process has not been executed normally), and it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal.

  Then, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 or outside the game control area, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is provisionally set in the C register (step S2417), and the information of the setting state management area is stored in the B register. Is set (step S2418), and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of the “RAM abnormality” and the “game state before the power failure” There is no need to execute the process (the process of determining whether the checksum and the backup flag match) again, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  In the B register, the value of the setting state management area when a power failure occurs or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 when the power is restored is set. In step S2419, the RAM abnormal value is temporarily stored in the setting state management area. By setting, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, when the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424 are YES, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area, and step S2436 is performed. JUMP instruction must be executed. However, since the RAM abnormal value has already been provisionally set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of the determination in step S2423, the JUMP is executed as shown in the source code example illustrated below. Instructions can be reduced.

Example of source code when the RAM abnormal value is not provisionally set in step S2419
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421 (bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR Z, $ 111;
$ 000:
LD W, 03H; S2419 equivalent
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436; Jump instruction to S2436
$ 111:
CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, $ 000;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

Example of source code when temporarily setting a RAM abnormal value in step S2419
LD W, 03H; S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR NZ, S2436;

CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, S2436;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

  Thereafter, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

  Then, of the register value in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2421). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the flow advances to step S2430.

  On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated and the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, it is determined whether the apparatus was in the setting change mode when a power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is in the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

  If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, an abnormality in the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area or outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2436.

  On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in both the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality process (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

  If it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process advances to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as the temporary setting value. Also, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2426 and S2431 to step S2435 is different. For this reason, since the value of the setting state management area differs between the normal RAM clearing process and the RAM clearing process accompanying the setting change process, the caller can be distinguished even if the program for both RAM clearing processes is common. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

  As shown in the source code example illustrated below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting state management area at the time of determination. However, in this case, 00H is set in the setting state management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be turned ON. Recording process is required. For this reason, since the processing content differs between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing at the time of setting change, dedicated processing is required for each part other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, 00H is provisionally set in step S2425 in order to commonize the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated.

Example of source code when 00H is not temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2425
CP A, 10H; S2426 (PF port information is stored in A register)
JR NZ, $ 000; (bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR NZ, $ 111;

LD W, 01H; S2429
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;

$ 000:
XOR W, W; equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2435; increase

$ 111:
XOR W, W; increase
LD (VALID_PALY), W; Increment
JR S2436; increase

S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
・ ・ ・ ・ ・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436

Source code example for temporarily setting 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425
XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

CP A, 10H; S2426
JR NZ, S2435;

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR Z, S2436;

LD W, 01H;
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
・ ・ ・ ・ ・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2426). If the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON, the process advances to step S2435.

  In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is turned off, so that the normal game process cannot be executed. At this time, if the power is turned off by performing a setting change operation after the power is once turned off, the RAM abnormality can be canceled. That is, if it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 have been operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from a value indicating RAM abnormality (03H) to a value indicating setting change. (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. As described above, the return from the RAM abnormality always goes through the setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure occurrence is the RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated only when the setting value is changed.

  If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is possible to automatically return to the normal game state.

  In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the work area in the game control area and the work area in the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal when the power is restored, The game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this case, the normal game state can be returned by turning on / off the power switch.

  When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped. After the power is turned off, when the power is restored, the work areas in the game control area and the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the game processing may be started by initializing a work area and a stack area in an area inside the game control area and an area outside the game control area. In this way, the normal game state can be restored by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is turned off.

  When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, the work area in the game control area and the work area in the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and the setting is performed. When the key 971 is operated, the game processing may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, the normal game state can be restored by operating the setting key 971 after the power is turned off.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 has not been operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure occurrence is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the gaming state before the power failure occurred (step S2427). In this way, the effect (background, decorative design mode (low probability time) on the peripheral control board 1510 side corresponding to each game state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state). In this case, a preparation is made to return to the original state when using the decorative symbol in a different mode between the high-probability mode and the high-probability mode.In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command Used when creating a.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2428). If the setting key 971 has been turned ON, it is determined that a setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the flow proceeds to S2436. . That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of the power failure occurs is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (unless the RAM clear switch 954 is operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

  Steps S2425 to S2429 are processing executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated. Therefore, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426) and the setting key 971 (Step S2428) may be performed first. That is, as illustrated, the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428) after the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is determined (step S2426), or after the operation of the setting key 971 is determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

  If YES is determined in the step S2421 or S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is retracted to the stack area inside the game area (step S2432), and the RAM abnormal processing outside the game area shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

  Then, a work area other than the set value and set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and a stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). Note that an unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may be initialized together.

  Thereafter, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM after the power is turned off while the command is stored in the command buffer, the unsent command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is turned off during the transmission of the fluctuation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent fluctuation pattern command may not be transmitted. When only the variation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined to be abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the command that has not been transmitted during the setting processing after the power is restored is transmitted, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is configured based on the command. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

  Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when the setting change processing is started or when the setting confirmation processing is started. In the setting change processing, the command buffer is cleared along with the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, so there is no need to separately clear the command buffer. However, in the setting confirmation processing, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. For this reason, the command buffer should be cleared when shifting to setting confirmation.

  After that, the function of the device (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 is initialized (step S2437). Specifically, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC0 for the setting change process, and the CTC0 is set to enable the interrupt. The time of CTC1 for controlling the timer interrupt process in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of the CTC1 for the normal game is set to be prohibited.

  Then, a hardware random number (for example, a hit random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is started (step S2438), updating of the hardware random number is started, and a power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

  Finally, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main control-side main process (FIG. 228).

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart of main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control-side main processing is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (FIG. 227).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 executes a first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for a setting change process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the third example, the power outage is monitored in the main process. However, the power outage may be monitored by monitoring the power outage in the timer interrupt process and detecting the occurrence of the power outage. For example, when at least one of the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is ON, the period during which the power failure notice signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. May be determined that a power failure has occurred. In the third example, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are provided separately, the power failure may be monitored in any of the timer interrupt processes. A power outage may be monitored. Therefore, by substituting the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process and power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code ) Does not need to be incorporated in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  When the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so that the interruption is set to be prohibited (step S2451), and it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area. A determination is made (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the set state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start a normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the interruption is set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. .

  If it is determined in step S2452 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the interrupt timer is switched to the normal game, and then the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Execute Before executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the normal game CTC1 (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt (the timer interrupt for the setting process) is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt ( A timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455), and interruption is permitted (step S2456).

  Thereafter, a power failure notice signal is acquired, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for performing a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed.

If a power failure notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main control-side main processing shown in FIG.
In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off is reduced and the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off can be surely ended.

  Thereafter, the flag register is retracted to the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power-off processing is executed, and the processing necessary for the work area outside the game area before power is cut off is executed (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are as shown in FIG. Then, the flag register evacuated to the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The target area for which the checksum is calculated is a setting state management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area after the power is turned on and before the main control side main processing is executed. And the value of the setting state management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been executed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Lastly, the setting values of the RAM protection valid (write prohibition) and the invalidity of the prohibition area are written to the RAM protection register, the writing of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the process waits until the power failure is restored (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating an area to be used in the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In the present embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is released to enable access to the entire area. Note that by specifying an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, when detecting access to the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 You may make it reset.

  In the processing described above, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated one, and may be another order.

  In the third example, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored in the main control-side main process. However, the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by a timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, at least at the start and at the end, check the power failure signal, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result becomes a predetermined value The occurrence of a power outage may be detected.

  In the main control-side main processing shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and at least once for the setting change processing. Of the timer interrupt process. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing may not be executed (for example, when the process branches to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this manner, a process of calculating a base value is executed in a main loop (timer interrupt process) for a normal game, and an unnecessary base value is calculated in a timer interrupt process for a setting change process. Whether to execute the process of calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the process. In the third example, since the timer interrupt process for the setting process and the timer interrupt process for the normal game process are provided separately, the power failure may be monitored in any of the timer interrupt processes. A power outage may be monitored. Therefore, by substituting the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process and power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code ) Does not need to be incorporated in each timer interrupt process, and the program size can be reduced.

  FIG. 229 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for the setting process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1. , Any of the banks can be used. In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control-side main processing, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing or the normal game. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt process, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt process. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to the original state. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to the bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is allowed, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not the interrupt is permitted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as an EI instruction) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2471).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process relating to a winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is determined as NO in step S2473, so that the winning detection is performed. No fraud is detected. Note that, even if a winning is detected, payout of a prize ball, display of a change, and the like are not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered that it is desirable that no fraud is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected.

  Note that even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input processing 1 and monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of forcibly activating the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like by a person who intends to perform an improper act (Goto). For example, while an employee of a hall is performing an operation of changing a setting or confirming a setting, the door is open, and a sensor attached to the door is located at a position close to an adjacent pachinko machine. For this reason, while performing the setting change operation or the setting confirmation, it is possible to detect a goto action by radio waves or the like in the adjacent pachinko machine.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing, the value of the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H) in the timer interrupt processing, so the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is set in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded. However, during a normal game, a determination is made in order to prevent a fraudulent act of illegally shifting to the setting change mode.

  If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing for changing the setting value and displaying the setting (steps S2474 to S2478). On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. And a response signal (ACK) when a command to the payout control board 951 is received. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon that the display before and after the LED display switching is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2577). Then, the setting display processing shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a transmission buffer of a plurality of bytes in a FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is limited, untransmitted commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is in the full state or the full state. In the case where the command is near, it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit in accordance with the empty state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. The information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, each time a command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and Without determining the free space, if the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission processing executed in the next timer interrupt processing, the remaining commands may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The upper limit may be set to be equal to or smaller than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, when the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, serial communication of about 80 bits can be performed in one timer interrupt cycle. If one command is composed of 20 bits, 80 ÷ 20 = 4, so it is preferable to set the upper limit to 4 commands. In practice, one more five commands may be set as the upper limit. This is because the maximum command length is assumed to be 20 bits, but many commands are shorter than the maximum length.

  Regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the data amount of a command stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, the command is stored in the transmission information storage area so that the transmission information storage area does not become full. The capacity of the storage area for storing the previous command may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

  In the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing shown in FIG. 229, unlike the other timer interrupt processing, the random number update processing (R_ATART_K) is not executed. However, since the hard random number has been activated in S2438, the hardware interrupt is not executed. Like the random number, the random number updating process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

  In the third example, even if the test signal output process is executed in the timer interrupt process for the normal game (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), the test signal output process is called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. Is also good.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a normal game executed by the main control MPU 1311.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1. Thus, any of the banks can be used. In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control-side main processing, and the register bank 1 is used in the setting processing or the timer interrupt processing for a normal game. Therefore, an instruction to switch to bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt process, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch to bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt process. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also returned to the original state. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to the bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is allowed, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not the interrupt is permitted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as an EI instruction) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2491).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2492). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Subsequently, random number update processing 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, respective values for changing the initial values of the big hit symbol determining random number and the small hit symbol determining random number updated in the random number updating process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for initial value determination.

  Thereafter, a switch input special process is executed (step S2494).

  Thereafter, a timer update process is executed (step S2495). In the timer updating process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is turned on in accordance with the variation display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the normal symbol variation determined in the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process In addition to the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is transmitted to the effect that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the ACK signal is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, a prize ball control process is executed (step S2496). In the prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written to the main control RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of award balls, a self-check for creating award ball commands for paying out game balls or checking a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. Or create a command. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created award ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a two-channel output serial communication circuit, transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 on one channel, and transmits a command to the payout control board 951 on another channel. The transfer rate (baud rate) of the serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate may be set such that the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 is lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the prize ball controlled by the payout control board 951 is accompanied by a game value, so it is hard to be affected by noise or the like, and is transferred at a low speed so as not to become an abnormal prize ball command due to command garbage or omission. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, since a command for effect without a game value is transmitted, the effect only needs to be returned by the next command. Further, a large number of commands are transmitted, and the effect is performed with good response. It is desirable to transmit the command to the peripheral control board 1510 early so as not to give a strange feeling to the user. In addition, the response of the effect is poor (for example, even if the game ball wins in the starting winning opening and the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to change, the decorative symbol does not start to change in the main liquid crystal display device 1600). This is because the player feels uneasy about the malfunction.

  Subsequently, a frame command receiving process is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on a detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is sent to the payout control board 951 in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, and the like), and stores the transmission information storage area described above. To memorize. Specifically, in the frame command reception processing, in order to perform notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951, the command system conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the command is corrected and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) in the same manner as other generated commands. When a command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. The main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

  Subsequently, a fraud detection process is executed (step S2498). In the fraud detection processing, an abnormal state (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormality, etc.) related to fraud is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the count switch detects that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 2005 or 2006 when the jackpot is not in the jackpot gaming state, the main control program is executed. Creates a prize abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequently, a command corresponding to a winning switch or a start-up switch is generated at the time of detection of passage of various switches, and a switch passing command output process for setting the command in the transmission information storage area is executed (step S2499).

  Then, the flag register is evacuated to the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and a base display output process is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed using the second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as a flag register is saved in a stack area in the game control area before and after execution of the base display output processing, and the base display is output. It is not updated during output processing. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

  Next, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the random number value for the big hit matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and based on the big hit symbol random value, the probability variation state is set. It is determined whether or not to shift. If the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open and close the big wins 2005 and 2006. In the case of opening and closing the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 based on this determination, the gaming state where the special winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or enlarged) so that game balls can be accepted in the special winning openings 2005 and 2006. As a result, the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player. In addition, when the certainty change condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the probability change state, and when the certainty change condition is not satisfied, the game state changes to a game state other than the certainty change state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low-probability state).

  Subsequently, a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. If the detection signal has been input to the input terminal, a normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the random number matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Usually called lottery). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state, so that the starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be received, and a game advantageous to the player is provided. Transition to state.

  Subsequently, an output data setting process is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or the big hit game When in the state, a drive signal is output to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the starting port (second starting port door member 2549), as a piece of output information to the hall computer, a probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information Output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, information output information during time reduction, start Various information regarding the game, such as a winning information output signal to output the (game information) signal and security signals to the external terminal board 784. In the output data setting process, a test signal output process may be performed to output a test signal.

  In the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out-balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (eg, 10 balls).

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a normal symbol or a special symbol.

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a transmission buffer of a plurality of bytes in a FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2508), and the process returns to the process before interruption.

[12-18. Another example 4 of setting change / confirmation processing]
Next, another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting change function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the processing related to the setting change is executed in the main control side main processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. The processes other than those described below are the same as those of the above-described third embodiment.

  In the fourth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 is used. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the set value may be described as a setting change switch 972.

  FIG. 231 is a flowchart of the main control-side main processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control-side main processing is executed after step S2440 of the power-on processing (FIG. 227). The main control-side main process of the other example 4 executes steps S2481 to S2484 instead of step S2452 of the main control-side main process of another example 3 (FIG. 228). The main control side main processing executes the setting change and setting confirmation processing not only when the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided as in the fourth example, The present invention is also applicable to other examples 1 and 2. For example, the main control main processing shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop processing for setting processing (steps S2450 to S2453) and a second main loop processing for normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). Also in the main loop processing, one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196 of another example 1 and FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. In the timer interrupt processing, setting processing (step 2068 in FIG. 190, step S2341 in FIG. 223) ) And a normal game process are executed. In this case, since only one timer interrupt process is executed in the main loop, it is not necessary to switch the CTC in steps S2454 and S2455 described later.

  In the main control-side main process shown in FIG. 231, the same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the main control-side main process of another example 3 (FIG. 228).

  First, the main control MPU 1311 executes a first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2450). In the fourth example, the power failure is monitored in the main process. However, the power failure may be monitored by a timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when at least one of the start and end of the timer interrupt, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is ON, the period during which the power failure notice signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. May be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 4, since a timer interrupt process for the setting process and a timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored in any of the timer interrupt processes. A power outage may be monitored. Therefore, by substituting the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process and power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code ) Does not need to be incorporated in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  When the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so that the interrupt is set to be prohibited (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). Thereafter, the setting display processing shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting change / setting confirmation processing has been completed based on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or detects whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the change from ON to OFF. If the operation of ending the processing of the setting change / setting confirmation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change / setting confirmation processing is not completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). The clearing of the edge information prevents the setting value from being changed a plurality of times by one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed a plurality of times while the timer interrupt process for detecting the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is executed once. This is to prevent the setting from being changed using the same edge information as the previous one in the first main loop process executed later. The edge information of the setting key 971 may not be cleared, and only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared. Thereafter, the interrupt is set to be permitted (step S2453), and the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. The reason why the interruption is disabled in the processing from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing from being interrupted by a timer interrupt.

  In the first main loop process for the setting process (steps S2450 to S2453), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is continuously cleared, and the process proceeds to the normal game (the execution of the second main loop process). In the middle), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referred to.

  If it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change / setting confirmation processing has been completed, a second main loop processing for a normal game (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the normal game CTC1 (step S2454), the CTC0 interrupt is stopped, and the CTC1 interrupt is activated (step S2455). CTC1 is set to allow interrupts (step S2456).

  Thereafter, a power failure notice signal is obtained, and it is determined whether a power failure has occurred based on whether the power failure notice signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure notice signal is detected, the power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, if the power failure notice signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update processing 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for performing a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery. Thereafter, the flow returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for the normal game is repeatedly executed. When detecting that the setting key 971 has been operated to be ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command notifying the fact and performs the peripheral control. The substrate 1510 may perform a notification effect on the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during a normal game, it is desirable that the mode is such that it does not hinder the progress of the normal game. For example, only a specific LED is lighted and displayed, or a small area of the main liquid crystal display 1600 is displayed. Characters, specific symbols, or the like may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 has been turned ON may be displayed in accordance with the progress of the game.

  If a power failure notice signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power-off processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

  In the power-off process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (Step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume large amounts of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off is reduced, and the processing at the time when the power supply to the main board is turned off can be surely ended.

  Thereafter, the flag register is retracted to the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power-off processing is executed, and the processing necessary for the work area outside the game area before power is cut off is executed (step S2465). ). Details of the power-off processing are as shown in FIG. Then, the flag register evacuated to the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to determine whether the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal. The target area for which the checksum is calculated is a setting state management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area after the power is turned on and before the main control side main processing is executed. And the value of the setting state management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area.

  Further, a value (5AH) indicating that the power-off process has been executed normally is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S2468). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Lastly, the setting values of the RAM protection valid (write prohibition) and the invalidity of the prohibition area are written to the RAM protection register, the writing of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the process waits until the power failure is restored (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating an area to be used in the main control RAM 1312 and, when an prohibited area other than the designated area is accessed, determining that the area is abnormal and resetting it. In the present embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is released to enable access to the entire area. Note that by specifying an unused area in the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, when detecting access to the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 You may make it reset.

  In the processing described above, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), power-off processing (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the illustrated one, and may be another order.

  In the fourth example, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main control-side main process. However, the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by a timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, at least at the start and at the end, check the power failure signal, measure the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output, and when the measurement result becomes a predetermined value The occurrence of a power outage may be detected. In another example 4, since a timer interrupt process for the setting process and a timer interrupt process for the normal game process are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored in any of the timer interrupt processes. A power outage may be monitored. Therefore, by substituting the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process and power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code ) Does not need to be incorporated in each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

  In the main processing on the main control side shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing and the timer interrupt for the normal game. Of the timer interrupt process. In addition, at this execution timing, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing may not be executed (for example, when the process branches to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this manner, a process of calculating a base value is executed in a main loop (timer interrupt process) for a normal game, and an unnecessary base value is calculated in a timer interrupt process for a setting change process. Whether to execute the process of calculating the base value can be switched so as not to execute the process.

  FIG. 232 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a setting change process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change / setting confirmation processing is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting processing. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in the fourth example, the process (steps S2577 to S2478) of the setting change / setting confirmation of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process (FIG. 229) in the third example is deleted. It is a thing.

  First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). Note that the main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other is usable as a register group of bank 1, and performs bank switching. Without using the registers of both banks. The register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, an instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but there is no need to execute an instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the state of the bank in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of the interrupt. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register also returns to the original state. When a configuration in which the state of the bank is not stored in the flag register is adopted, the bank switching instruction is executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, and the state is returned to the bank 0.

  Since the flag register also stores a flag for controlling whether or not an interrupt is allowed, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting the interrupt to be enabled. It should be noted that the flag for controlling whether or not the interrupt is permitted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (such as an EI instruction) during the timer interrupt processing or the RETI instruction is executed, the interrupt is not permitted.

  Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, the value is set to 0 (step S2471).

  Next, switch input processing 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input processing 1, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

  Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to a winning signal, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if a winning is detected, a payout of award balls, a special symbol, a normal The processing related to the progress of the game, such as the symbol change display, is not executed. In addition, a prize detection relating to the progress of the game is performed, but a detection relating to irregularities such as magnets and impact (vibration) is not performed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall. In the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, illegal operations such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) are not performed. This is because it is considered that it is desirable not to detect.

  Note that even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may detect in the switch input processing 1 and monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect a fraudulent act of forcibly activating the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like by a person who intends to perform an improper act (Goto).

  Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing, the value of the game state management area does not have to be determined. This is to cope with a fraudulent act of illegally shifting to the setting change process. Whether the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area is determined before the switch input process 1 (step S2472), and the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, the process may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

  If the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing for changing and displaying the setting value (steps S2474 to S2476). When a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that abnormal timer interrupt processing is being executed may be generated. This is because if a value indicating the start of a game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and some abnormality has occurred. In the mode of the abnormality notification, a notification using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or a sound, such as a notification of a magnet, a radio wave, or vibration, or a security signal may be output from the external terminal plate 784. You may employ | adopt one or more of these notification modes, and may notify by one or combination.

  On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474). For example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. And a response signal (ACK) when a command to the payout control board 951 is received. Thereafter, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the time for turning off the LED is secured, and the ghost phenomenon that the display before and after the LED display switching is mixed appears. And flickering of the LED is prevented.

  Thereafter, a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 (step S2476). The process of outputting the security signal may be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control-side main process shown in FIG. 231 similarly to the process of the setting change / setting confirmation.

  Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area that is a transmission buffer of a plurality of bytes in a FIFO format, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral board command transmission processing may be executed after the end of the processing of S2480 or S2481 of the main processing instead of the timer interruption processing.

  Thereafter, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, setting one word clears the watchdog timer. Thereafter, the bank of the register is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process returns to the process before the interruption.

  In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ARTART_K) is not executed. This is because it is not necessary to update the random number generated by software when the RAM is abnormal, but a random number update process may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine with light guide plate]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine including a light guide plate will be described. Recent pachinko machines are provided with a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and performs a special symbol change display game together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect is possible by using a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate to superimpose images, for example. Further, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, an effect having a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate capable of stereoscopic viewing using parallax between the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a larger stereoscopic effect.

  However, the effect using the light guide plate is becoming rut, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emitting effect. Further, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns with one sheet, and there is a demand for a more entertaining effect by displaying a variety of patterns.

[13-1. Construction]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the center role 2500 and the presentation effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first design is illuminated and displayed in the presentation effect unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern is illuminated and displayed in the presentation effect unit.

  The presentation effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The presentation effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center role 2500. The display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 for closing the frame of the center role 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate mounted on the rear side of the center role 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light to the right side of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first design substrate 2611, and light is applied to the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 on the second design substrate 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating light are mounted.

  The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that light can be applied to the side surface of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side surfaces of the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 are visible, and the first design substrate 2611 and the second design substrate 2612 are visible from the player side. It is hard, and the appearance in the game area 5a is improved.

  Although the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 is described in this embodiment, another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by an innumerable number of first reflecting portions that reflect light from above toward the front side, and light from the lateral direction toward the front side. And a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by an innumerable number of second reflecting portions having a concave and convex shape for reflecting light. That is, when the LED for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 emits 2613 light, the display effect unit 2600 can display and display the first pattern 2621 on the light guide plate 2610 and the LED for light guide plate 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 is turned on. When the light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 by light emission. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are desirably full-color LEDs, and have a highly directional light source (LED with lens) for irradiating light in a narrow range. Is desirable. By using a full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be transferred to the light guide plate 2610 in any single color or a plurality of colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

  In the light guide plate 2610, irregularities forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for copying the first pattern 2621 and unevenness forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for copying the second pattern 2622 are finely formed. In a state where the LED 2613 for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the LED 2614 for the light guide plate of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light, and the back surface disposed on the rear side. The various decorations of the unit 3000 and the effect images and the like displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well. Even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, the light guide plate 2610 has a light-transmitting region that can be seen through the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the rear surface side, and does not reflect light applied to the light guide plate 2610 and is polished. A glass-processed mat area, a lame area where a reflection pattern for reflecting transmitted light is formed irrespective of the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving area in which a reflection pattern is formed is provided such that light emission is changed depending on the light traveling direction in the light guide plate 2610).

  As shown in FIG. 234, the first pattern 2621 is part of the effect of the special symbol change display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described later. The first pattern 2621 includes moving areas 2621a and 2621c, glitter areas 2621b and 2621d, and a mat area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmissive area 2621f. The moving regions 2621a and 2621c emit light in the moving region 2621a and light in the moving region 2621c by turning on a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and switching the lighting position. Therefore, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, the size of the first picture 2621 can be seen to change.

  In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving area and the lame area are arranged twice, but may be repeated any number of times. By composing the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area a plurality of times, a complicated movement can be represented by the first pattern 2621. In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving region and the glitter region are alternately repeated. However, the characteristic (that is, since the moving region emits light) without sandwiching the glitter region between the moving regions. Moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

  By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emission color is changed by the light guide plate LED 2613, it is possible to change the color for each moving area 2621a and emit light. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the picture is shown to move as the color changes. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light lines extend obliquely downward. The second picture 2622 is formed such that the obliquely extending streaks of light correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second picture board 2612. That is, when one light guide plate LED 2614 emits light, a streak of light that extends obliquely downward from the top of the light guide plate 2610 to the lower part of the light guide plate 2610 starts from the light emitting plate LED 2614 that has emitted light.

  Since the second pattern 2622 is further away from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes down the light guide plate 2610, the brightness of the light stripe becomes darker as it goes down the light guide plate 2610. Thereby, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (the player side), as the light guide plate 2610 goes downward, the streaks of light appear to extend rearward, and the light is emitted three-dimensionally. The illusion can be made as described above, and the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 2610 can be enjoyed.

  Further, it is preferable to arrange the reflecting portion so that stereoscopic viewing by parallax between the left and right eyes is possible. For example, paying attention to one light streak forming the second picture 2622, the second reflector that emits light that causes the light streak to be imaged on the retina of the player is different between the left and right eyes of the light guide plate 2610. By disposing them at the positions, parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and a second pattern having depth can be shown.

  As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment changes the first pattern 2621 projected by the irradiation of light from one direction with the mat area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light and the traveling direction of the light. Instead, it is composed of lame areas 2621b and 2621d in which a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light is formed, and moving areas 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a in which a reflection pattern that reflects light in a specific traveling direction is formed. A moving picture area (dynamic picture) that looks like moving the first picture and a static picture area (static picture) that looks still.

  Further, a single light guide plate 2610 can project a first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and a second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 depending on the direction of illumination. For this reason, light of a single color (for example, red of a single wavelength or white in which light of a plurality of wavelengths is mixed) is radiated from the lateral direction, and light of a plurality of colors is radiated from above (for example, adjacent LED groups) 2614 emits light with different wavelengths, so that one light guide plate 2610 can produce an effect of a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

  In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, by irradiating light from the lateral direction, a still picture is displayed in the mat area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b and 2621d of the first picture 2621, and a moving picture that appears to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a. Is projected. That is, the light guide plate effect by both the still picture and the moving picture is performed by the first picture 2621 by the irradiation of the light from the lateral direction. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture by the first picture 2621 are projected at the same time.

  Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 is configured by a mat area and a glitter area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include a moving pattern. In this case, a light guide plate effect is produced by a still picture by the first picture 2621 by irradiation of light from the lateral direction and a second picture 2622 by irradiation of light from above. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving picture may be projected after the still picture is projected, or the still picture may be projected after the moving picture is projected. As described above, various effects can be performed by projecting the still picture and the moving picture at different timings. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character with a still pattern, it is possible to perform an effect such that the character comes down. On the other hand, by displaying the character in a moving pattern after displaying the background in a static pattern, it is possible to perform an effect such that the character moves at a specific place.

  In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged so as to overlap. When light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upper direction, in a region where the two patterns are overlapped on the light guide plate 2610, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, so that both the patterns can be recognized together. . However, when the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that is viewed in a plan view and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that is viewed in a stereoscopic manner, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in a region where two patterns are mixed. When the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, and a transmission area 2621f that allows the back side (the liquid crystal display device 1600) to be seen through is provided, and the pattern based on the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. This makes it easy for a person to view stereoscopically.

  In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different regions without overlapping. When the first picture 2621 is a picture viewed in a plan view and the second picture 2622 is a picture viewed in a stereoscopic view, it may be difficult to view stereoscopically in an area where two pictures are mixed. By separating the area where the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided, and projecting the pattern by the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the second pattern can be easily three-dimensionally presented to the player. Can be seen.

[13-2. Configuration of Light Guide Plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflection unit will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflection units).

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 includes, on the back surface side (the liquid crystal display device 1600), a transmissive area 2621f that can be seen through, a mat area 2621e that does not reflect irradiated light, There are provided lame regions 2621b and 2621d where reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light are formed, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a where reflection patterns for reflecting light in a specific traveling direction are formed.

  FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the reflection unit.

  The reflection portion is formed by a concave portion provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and reflects light traveling on the inside of the light guide plate 2610 to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflection of light at a boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the picture portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light, and the picture is visually recognized by the player. In the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain degree of spread (for example, ± 30 degrees). The light streaks forming the second picture 2622 are visible when light traveling in the direction of the light streaks is reflected by a reflecting portion 2650 described below.

  In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a illustrated in FIG. 237 (A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 is arranged along the streaks of light. The size of the reflecting portion 2650 is desirably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is extremely smaller than the streak of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown larger in the figure.

  The reflecting portion 2650 includes a reflecting surface 2651 for reflecting light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflecting surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the direction perpendicular to the reflecting surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 and hitting the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 237 (B).

  In addition, light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the streak of light appearing in the moving area 2622a, that is, light traveling along the reflecting surface 2651 in parallel with the reflecting surface 2651 does not hit the reflecting surface 2651, but is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 and reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not exit from the surface. Similarly, light traveling in a direction having an angle (especially, an acute angle) with a light streak appearing in the moving area 2622a has a small amount of hitting the reflecting surface 2651, and the reflecting portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. For this reason, light having a wavelength that reaches a large amount is visible to the player's eyes, and a pattern can be shown in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

  At this time, by slightly tilting the reflecting surface 2651, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted left and right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment irradiates light with high directivity, the reflected light from the reflecting unit 2650 also reaches the player as a directional light beam. For this reason, parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and a second pattern having depth can be shown. That is, since the reflector 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflector 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are at different positions, the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye are different. The virtual intersection is not on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the picture appears to be in a recessed position, and the light reaching the right eye and reaching the left eye If the virtual intersection with the light to be emitted is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the picture can be seen at the near position.

  The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflection surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 as in the case of the reflection surface 2651, or light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610. May be formed at an angle that does not reflect the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

  The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent a pattern displayed by light arriving from a direction other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

  The reflecting portions 2660 of the lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are constituted by spherical concave portions provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, advance in the light guide plate 2610, and from a plurality of directions (that is, The light arriving at the reflector 2660 (in a plurality of paths) is reflected and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflection portion 2660 in the glitter region reflects light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, if each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at a different timing, the glitter region 2621b will shine. When the light guide plate LED 2614 emits light of a different color, the lame area 2621b emits light of a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 blinks in a different color, the glitter region 2621b is mixed and glittered in a plurality of colors.

  Note that the mat portion 2621e is not provided with a reflection portion and is processed into irregular ground-like irregularities in a frosted glass shape, and does not reflect light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 to the front side.

  So far, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, an embodiment of the light guide plate representing a different pattern will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflection section in the light guide plate constituting the picture shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

  The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the back surface, reflects light incident from any one of the plurality of specific light input portions 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670 to be formed. The plurality of specific light input portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 are for introducing light such that light travels through the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. The plurality of specific light input sections 2630 are illustrated as four first specific light input sections 2630a, second specific light input sections 2630b, third specific light input sections 2630c, and fourth specific light input sections 2630d. The components from the specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion are provided. In this case, seven specific light-entering portions 2630 (LED groups 2614) are repeatedly provided for a rainbow effect of causing the light guide plate to emit light in seven colors, and the number of the specific light-entering portions may be determined according to the type of light emission color. The first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion (not shown) repeat the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 from left to right in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure) in order from the left (the seventh specific light incident portion). (In the order of returning to the beginning and becoming the first specific light entrance portion 2630a).

  The reflection portion 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line (a direction in which light incident from the specific light incident portion 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610) connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 and guides the light. It has a boundary surface inclined 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflecting portion 2670 is concave in a pent roof shape triangle. The reflecting portion 2670 reflects light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. In addition, the reflection unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the unspecified specific light input unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

  Accordingly, as indicated by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 on the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). Then, from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflecting portion 2670 appears to emit light. On the other hand, as indicated by a dashed line in FIG. 239, light incident from the unspecified specific light incident portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 From the player sitting in front of, the reflection portion 2670 does not seem to emit light.

  In the present embodiment, as the reflecting portion 2670, a shape that extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630 in a state in which the reflecting portion 2670 is concave is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any as long as it extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630.

  The plurality of reflection units 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entrance units 2630, and the plurality of first reflection units 2670a and the second specific light entrance units 2630b corresponding to the first specific light entrance unit 2630a. , A plurality of third reflectors 2670c corresponding to the third specific light incident portion 2630c, and a plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d. Unit 2670d and the like.

  In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 that can emit light in different modes by reflecting light forward by a specific one of the plurality of reflectors 2670. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a including a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b including a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c including a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflections. And a picture 2623d composed of a portion 2670d.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the pictures are arranged in order from the center to the outside and circulate in order.

  The second pattern substrate 2612 has a strip shape extending left and right, and has an LED 2614 mounted at a position corresponding to each specific light incident portion 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light incident portion 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light incident portion 2630b, and a third specific light incident portion 2630c. , A fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, and a fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light incident portion (not shown). (Not shown), a sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light input section (not shown), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light input section (not shown). (Not shown). In FIG. 239, the first to fourth LED groups 2614a to 2614d are illustrated, and the fifth to seventh LED groups are not illustrated. Each LED group divides a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the drawing) on the second pattern substrate 2612 in the left-right direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and sequentially divides from left to right. (The order after the seventh LED group returns to the beginning and becomes the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614 each.

  Next, the light emitting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light incident portion 2630a, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the first reflection portion 2670a. Other second reflectors 2670b, third reflectors 2670c, fourth reflectors 2670d, etc., reflect light other than the front, so that only the first reflector 2670a appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the picture composed of the plurality of first reflectors 2670a can emit light.

  When the second LED group 2614b of the second picture substrate 2612 emits light, light enters from the second specific light input portion 2630b into the light guide plate 2610, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the second reflection portion 2670b. The other first reflecting portion 2670a, third reflecting portion 2670c, fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect light to other than the front, so that only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it is possible to emit light from the picture composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b.

  When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light incident portion 2630c, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the third reflection portion 2670c. The other first reflector 2670a, second reflector 2670b, fourth reflector 2670d, etc., reflect outside the front, so that only the third reflector 2670c appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it is possible to emit light from the picture composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c.

  When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 emits light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the fourth reflection portion 2670d, The other first reflector 2670a, second reflector 2670b, third reflector 2670c, etc., reflect outside the front, so that a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees only the fourth reflector 2670d shining. As a result, it is possible to emit light from the picture composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d.

  Similarly, when each LED group emits light from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light incident portion 2630, and the light is reflected from the light guide plate 2610 by the corresponding reflection portion 2670. The light is reflected to the front, the light is reflected to other than the front at the other reflector 2670, and only the corresponding reflector 2670 appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and is constituted by the corresponding reflector 2670. It is possible to emit a picture that is present.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching the LED group to emit light, a plurality of pictures 2623 can be respectively emitted, and a plurality of pictures can be emitted in sequence to create a moving animation. Such a light emission effect can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in a light guide plate 2610 on which a similar pattern is superimposed, a moving effect of emitting a pattern such as an animation having a movement of expanding from the center to the outside or contracting from the outside to the center. Can be.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pattern displayed in the moving effect using the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, a moving effect in which the size of the picture changes is performed by switching the position of the LED group that emits light over time.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 240 (A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f and the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, the light enters the light guide plate 2610. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g, and the pattern on which the sixth reflection portion 2670f and the seventh reflection portion 2670g are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize the light.

  Thereafter, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light enters from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e and the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion. The 2670e and the sixth reflector 2670f are reflected, and the pattern on which the fifth reflector 6670e and the sixth reflector 2670f are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light is incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d and the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e, the light guide plate is activated. The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Thereafter, the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on, and when light enters from the third specific light incident portion 2630c and the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflecting portion. The 2670c and the fourth reflector 2670d are reflected, and the picture in which the third reflector 2670cd and the fourth reflector 2670d are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light input portion 2630b and the third specific light input portion 2630c, the light guide plate The light incident on the light 2610 is reflected by the second reflection portion 2670b and the third reflection portion 2670c, and the pattern on which the second reflection portion 2670b and the third reflection portion 2670c are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize the light.

  As described above, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, a moving effect of changing the size of the picture and emitting the picture so as to move from the center to the outside can be performed. At this time, the LED group may emit light of a single color, or each group may emit light of a different color (that is, depending on a position).

  FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect using the light guide plate. In the example illustrated in FIG. 241, a moving effect in which the size of a picture is changed by changing the number of LED groups that emit light over time is performed.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the second specific light incident portion 2630b to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b. The seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects, and the pattern on which the second reflecting portion 2670b to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Thereafter, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c to the second reflecting portion 2670g. Then, the pattern on which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is fourth reflected. The portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects, and the pattern on which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize the pattern.

  Thereafter, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the second reflecting portion 2670g. Then, the pattern on which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is sixth reflected. The portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, so that the player can recognize it.

  As described above, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, it is possible to change the size (light emission range) of the pattern and to perform a moving effect of causing the pattern to emit light so as to shrink. At this time, the LED group may emit light of a single color, or each group may emit light of a different color (that is, depending on a position).

  FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect using the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, a moving effect in which the color of the picture is changed by changing the emission color of the LED group over time is performed.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a corresponds to each of the specific light incident portions 2630a to 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first to seventh LED groups 2614a to 2614g are configured by full-color LEDs, and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light incident portion is represented by the last letter of the code.

  As shown in FIG. 242 (A), the first LED group 2614a is lit in red, the red light incident from the first specific light incident portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a, and the first reflecting portion 2670a is disposed. The drawn pattern emits light in red, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is turned on in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light incident portion 2630b is reflected on the second reflecting portion 2670b, and the picture is emitted in orange. Further, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light incident portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the picture is emitted in yellow. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d is lit in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e is turned on in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern emits blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f is turned on indigo blue, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f, and the picture is emitted in indigo blue. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the violet light incident from the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the picture is emitted in purple.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 242 (B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue and indigo, respectively, and the color of the picture changes. When the time further elapses, as shown in FIG. 242 (C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in blue, purple, red, orange, yellow, green and blue, respectively, and The color changes.

  In this way, the light emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the picture is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). The human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, so that a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so as to move inward can be performed.

  FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of the patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED groups 2614.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflecting portion 2670 forming one picture, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one picture. Specifically, control is performed so that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light incident portion 2630) is repeated using the seven LED groups as a repeating unit. The LED emits light with directivity, and is configured to illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LED emitting light in the same pattern (which is a light emission source of light constituting one picture) is a range shown by a fan shape in the figure, and the second picture substrate 2612 In the vicinity, there is a range where light from the LED does not reach.

  For this reason, a picture is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the end where light enters the light guide plate 2610. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full width at half maximum θ = ± 30 degrees), the range in which light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern) The pattern is provided apart from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times (the interval between the LEDs that emit light) α.

In general, if the length α of the repeating unit of the LED group, the illuminating angle of the LED is θ, and the distance separating the picture from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is L, the following relationship is obtained.
L = tan θ × α / 2

  As described above, when the moving pattern that looks moving is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be arranged at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. In other words, the moving picture area for displaying a moving picture is smaller than the still picture area for displaying a still picture. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the moving effect by the light guide plate 2610 can be performed in an area smaller than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. For this reason, in the effect of the variable display game, the player can recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbol usually displayed near the end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. . In addition, by performing the moving effect at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1600 that the player gazes at, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the player's excitement due to the moving effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which the center role 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 was attached. In this case, however, the inner frame of the center role 2500 (from a player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1). An area where a moving effect is not possible within a predetermined distance from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is formed in the (visible window portion), and the area where the moving effect is not possible can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the area where the moving effect can be performed is narrowed, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center role 2500, the area where the moving performance cannot be performed is hidden by the center role 2500, and the area where the moving performance cannot be performed is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , And moving effects can be performed in all (or most) of the inner frame of the center role 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end of the light guide plate 2610 is located outside the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer periphery of the center role 2500.

  Since the back unit 3000 is provided with various decorations (decoration unit 3050, movable rendering units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorations. The light guide plate 2610 is provided, and the light-emitting devices (the first picture substrate 2611 and the second picture substrate 2612) can be located behind the decorative body. As a result, the substrate serving as the light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see, and the decorativeness can be secured.

  Further, an LED for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs for light guide plate 2613, 2614) and an LED for emitting light from the decorative body may be mounted on one substrate.

  When the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000 in this way, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made an area where the moving effect can be performed, and the player can notice the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. You can not.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating an example of a picture displayed in another moving effect using the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, a moving effect in which the color of the picture is changed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time is performed.

  As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light incident portion 2630a to the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED corresponding to each specific light incident portion. A group 2614g is arranged. The first to seventh LED groups 2614a to 2614g are configured by full-color LEDs, and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light input portion is represented by the last letter of the code.

  As shown in the drawing, the first LED group 2614a is lit in red, the red light incident from the first specific light incident portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a, and the pattern on which the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged is red. , And the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light incident portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b, and the picture is emitted in orange. Further, the third LED group 2614c is turned on in yellow, and the yellow light that has entered from the third specific light incident portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the picture is emitted in yellow. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d is lit in green, and the fourth reflecting portion 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific light incident portion 2630d, and the picture is emitted in green. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e is turned on in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light incident portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e so that the picture is emitted in blue. The sixth LED group 2614f is turned on indigo blue, and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f reflects the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light incident portion 2630f, and the pattern emits light in indigo blue. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g is turned on in purple, and the violet light incident from the seventh specific light incident portion 2630g is reflected by the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the picture is emitted in purple.

  Thereafter, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue and indigo, and the color of the picture changes. When the time further elapses, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights in blue, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the picture changes.

  In this way, the light emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the picture is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, it is possible to perform a moving effect in which the pattern emits light so that streaks of light of seven colors flow.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which two lines of light intersect as shown in FIG. 235, by changing the emission color of each LED group 2614 as described in FIG. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and a moving effect that allows the pattern to emit light so that the light streaks of the seven colors flow. In addition, if the streak of light is made to appear deeper or closer to the front side as the distance from the light source is increased using the left-right parallax, a pattern with a three-dimensional effect can be displayed.

  Next, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating a manner in which the light guide plate 2610 displays a picture viewed in plan.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (B), since the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 has a curved reflecting surface, light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. Reaches the right eye 10R and the left eye 10L of the player. In addition, the reflector 2660 travels inside the light guide plate 2610, reflects light arriving at the reflector 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, along a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. As a result, as shown in FIG. 245 (A), there is no parallax between the left and right eyes in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660, so that the player moves the pattern 2621 to a planar pattern located at the position of the light guide plate 2610. Will be seen as

  FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating a manner in which a picture viewed in plan by the light guide plate 2610 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (B), a reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the left eye 10L of the player. The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected toward the right eye 10R of the player. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. The parallax of the eyes is small, and it can be said that the pattern for the left eye constituted by the reflector 2650L and the pattern for the right eye constituted by the reflector 2650R are arranged at the same position. For this reason, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

  FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating how a light guide plate 2610 displays a stereoscopically visible pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (B), the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle at which light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the left eye 10L of the player. The reflection surface 2651 of the reflection unit 2650R is set at an angle at which light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the right eye 10R of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted from each other by the distance between the reflection unit 2650L and the reflection unit 2650R, and the player has left and right eyes. A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflection portions 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional pattern at the position behind the light guide plate 2610.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating a manner in which a light-guide plate 2610 displays a stereoscopically visible pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 248 (B), the reflection surface 2651 of the reflection portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle at which light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the left eye 10L of the player. The reflection surface 2651 of the reflection unit 2650R is set at an angle at which light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the right eye 10R of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted from each other by the distance between the reflection unit 2650L and the reflection unit 2650R, and the player is left and right eyes A right-eye image and a left-eye image having parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R of the player intersect at a point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. For this reason, the player sees the picture 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R as a three-dimensional picture in front of the light guide plate 2610.

  As described above, according to the presentation effect unit 2600, a plurality of different patterns can be emitted by one light guide plate 2610. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to perform animation display or the like. In addition, the thickness of the presentation effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center role 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and it is easy to secure a wide space behind the light guide plate 2610. it can. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be arranged behind the light guide plate 2610. The pachinko machine 1 can improve the appearance in the game area 5a and have a high appeal to the player, and in addition to the effect by the light emission display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and By performing a movable effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, a variety of effects can be provided to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of translucent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflectors 2670 emerge to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to a player who is familiar with the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, and the player can be surprised and entertained, and at the same time, something good for the player It is possible to make the player think that there is a chance, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the luminous display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610 in good condition, the luminous display of the pattern 2623 from other players who are away from the front. Can be difficult to see, it is difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention, The player can play the game without hesitation and can enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center role 2500 where the center role 2500 is mounted in the center of the front-viewing game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are illuminated and displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. Also, the illuminated pattern does not hinder the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually performed can be visually recognized in a good state from the player side, and the game becomes hard to see. It is possible to prevent the player from having a mistrust and enjoy the game in a good condition.

  In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center role 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 is aligned with the frame of the center role 2500, so that the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (the first pattern substrate). 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, making it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light guide plate 2610 is present when the pattern is illuminated. A strong impact can be given to a player who has not considered to be surprised, and it is possible to entertain the light-emitting display of a plurality of patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting display of a plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effects can be shown to the player, various effects can be performed by appropriately combining the effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, and to entertain the player by the effects of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. Can be suppressed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, since the effect display device 1600 is disposed behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect image related to the plurality of patterns 2623 illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and to impart a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the pattern 2623 illuminated and displayed. An effect (display effect) that can strongly attract the interest can be shown to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single-color LEDs or full-color LEDs. In addition, the number of specific light-entering portions, reflecting portions, and LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of pictures.

[13-3. Production example]
Next, an example of the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol change display game will be described. FIG. 249 to FIG. 254 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect using the light guide plate.

  In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 emits light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and a moving effect of moving an image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or a notice effect).

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249 (A), nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen darkens (blacks out). This blackout allows the player to gaze at the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. This allows the player to gaze at the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), a movement effect of displaying an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. As shown in FIG. 249 (D), in the movement effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 moved to and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. The image 1611 moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. The image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed are the same character image (the pose or face may be the same or different) or the same character (for example, the name of the character) and the font and color are different. They may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the back of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. Also, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (E), in the movement effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the ratio of the movement image 1611 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 with the passage of time. May be changed along with.

  During the movement effect, the mode of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and to use other light guide plates to project a picture having a different size. In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, a direction different from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 having the initial size (for example, the horizontal direction). The first pattern 2621 having a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiating light from an oblique direction.

  After performing the movement effect for a predetermined time, the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off and the first pattern 2621 is turned off from the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. Further, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen darkens (blacks out). This blackout allows the player to watch the liquid crystal display device 1600 closely, and creates a space for improving the expectation for the next performance.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (G), the first pattern 2621 or an image 1612 (for example, a character with high reliability of hitting) different from the moving and displayed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, when the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the expectation of the player hitting is increased, but when the size of the character image 1612 is reduced, the expectation of the player hitting is reduced. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. The character image 1612 may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621. Further, along with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

  The character image may be displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, a direction different from the irradiation direction (lateral direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 (for example, an oblique direction). The character image may be projected by irradiating light from (direction). Also, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and the character image may be projected on another light guide plate. When a character image having a different size or expression is projected on a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, an effect display with a sense of depth can be provided unlike the flat liquid crystal display device 1600.

  As described above, in the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is projected, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. , The first pattern 2621 may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253 (A)), before the first pattern 2621 is projected, as shown in FIG. A movement effect of displaying an image moving toward the position to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253 (C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253 (D), the movement effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

  Thus, the time during which the first pattern 2621 is projected (the time of the light guide plate effect) and the effect time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) are the same as the first pattern 2621. May be started before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Further, the time of the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 254, the effect of the variable display game may be performed by switching between a moving pattern in which the pattern at which the images are gathered appears to move and a static pattern in which the pattern does not move.

  In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is achieved when a moving pattern appears, and an effect with a low expectation of a big hit is achieved only with the appearance of a still image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and the displayed still picture is displayed as shown in FIG. 254 (B). A moving effect of displaying an image 1611 moving toward 2621 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254 (C), the still picture 2621 is switched to the moving picture. Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (D), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of positions (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 may be performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254 (F), the still picture 2621 is displayed. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (G), with the progress of the variable display game, a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (ie, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the picture 1613 may be performed. Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 254 (H), the variable display game ends in a loss without switching the still picture 2621 to the moving picture.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or a specific look-ahead effect) is selected in the special symbol change display game, the special display effect is displayed in the specific display effect. The specific image 1611 performs an effect integrally with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the moving effect may not be performed on the first pattern.

  As described above, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, an effect in which the still image and the moving image are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610 is performed, so that the player has a sense of expectation in the development of the variable display game. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Next, an example of an effect in which an effect by the moving body is added to the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol change display game will be described.

  FIG. 255 and FIG. 256 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 255, one pattern is formed by the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1600. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in a short period in accordance with the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly, increase the expectations of the jackpot for the player. Then, as shown in FIG. 255B, the entire movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), a moving effect of displaying a pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610 and displaying an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is provided. Do. Further, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), a moving effect of moving an image from a plurality of places (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the picture 2621 with the progress of the variable display game may be performed. .

  The movable body 3601 may emit light at the timing when the movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emission mode (light emission color and light emission timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emission mode of the light guide plate 2610.

  By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 does not appear in FIG. 249 or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears in FIG. 255, the player's expectation of the development of the variable display game can be obtained. It is possible to increase the pachinko machine with high interest.

  In the above-described example, the movable body 3601 appears in place of the pattern where images are collected, but one character may be configured by the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, when the body is represented by the movable body 3601 and the face is represented by the light guide plate 2610, the facial expression can be changed by switching a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, in addition to the effects produced by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects produced by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 256, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect indicating the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256 (A), a pattern 2621 is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect of displaying an image 1611 moving toward the displayed picture on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 256 (C), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (ie, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first picture 2621 with the progress of the variable display game is performed. May be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), the movable body 3601 appears from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and stops at a position overlapping with the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), a picture 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256 (F), toward the displayed picture 1613. A moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, with the progress of the variable display game, as shown in FIG. 256 (G), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of places (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the picture 1613 may be performed. Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 256 (H), the movable display does not appear and the variable display game ends with a loss.

  Thus, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, an effect indicating that the movable body comes out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to a conventional communication function using an 8-bit parallel bus.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, the input / output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted through one signal line or an 8-bit bus. In some cases, data output from the main control MPU 1311 is read, or an illegal signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 to perform an illegal act. For this reason, there is a demand for a configuration in which input / output signals of the main control MPU 1311 are difficult to detect from the outside. If a serial communication function of continuously transmitting data at a predetermined timing with one signal line is used, the serial communication It is difficult to read data or input data in line with the line timing.

  The main control board 1310 has a test signal output circuit for monitoring a signal when the inspection organization inspects the pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of the special electric accessory, a signal (for example, 5 V ON / OFF) input to a solenoid driving driver (transistor) to monitor an output signal of a solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory is monitored. Signal) to make a signal for inspection. If a serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 is output as a signal for inspection, it is difficult for an inspection organization to use a device for analyzing the serial signal, and thus it is difficult to use the serial signal as a signal for inspection. It is. For this reason, in a pachinko machine that transmits a signal by serial communication in the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise an output of an inspection signal. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, an inspection signal for changing the level at the same timing as the solenoid driving signal is used. Is generated. When the output transistor of the serial / parallel converter is constituted by an open collector (or open drain), the voltage level is different by changing the voltages (5 V and 12 V) applied to the two serial / parallel converters connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

  Further, it is necessary to reduce the number of steps of a program for detecting an input by serial communication to reduce a software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit and a part is input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. A device is needed to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after turning on the power may be input directly to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 without being input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be detected even before the execution of the interrupt processing, so that the signal level can be detected even after the timer interrupt processing such as immediately after power-on.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the extended I / O using the chip select, and the signal is input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. The signal level can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of a serial signal.

  FIG. 257 is a block diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial / parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 259 is the main control MPU 1311 and the periphery. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an arrangement of components on a main control board 1310. In FIGS. 257, 258, and 259, thick lines indicate transmission lines for parallel signals, and thin lines indicate transmission lines for serial signals.

  The main control MPU 1311 according to the present embodiment includes an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with another board (the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the like), and the main control board 1310. Synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit, output control signals for other devices (such as solenoids), and output from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors It has a general-purpose port to which a signal is input.

  The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission / reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission / reception port is selected by a chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

  The transmission / reception port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). The transmission port includes a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

  As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission / reception port. The number of parallel / serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission / reception port is not limited to the illustrated one.

  Note that more serial / parallel converters may be connected by using a connection like the parallel / serial converter 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission / reception port fetches the parallel data input when CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) is at a 0 level, and outputs a predetermined clock after CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1. Data is output from the serial port at the timing of. The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 receives signals from a game ball detection switch (start winning port, large winning port count switch, normal winning port, specific area switch, normal symbol gate switch, game board discharge switch), a photo sensor, and the like. The game ball that mainly flows down the game area 5a is detected. Although the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 has a configuration having a 16-bit input port, an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

  Specifically, since a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, the serial control signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is at the 0 level. The output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. As described above, since the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 captures the output signal of the game ball detection switch using the SERTX signal as a trigger, the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at an arbitrary timing.

  Each of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission / reception port outputs a signal for lighting an LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). The data transmission destination is selected by a chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in the input serial data according to a predetermined clock signal when the chip select (CS) signal is at the 0 level, and output a signal from the parallel port when the chip select signal rises to 1. I do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 is connected to the segment side of the LED, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. When the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 outputs a signal at a predetermined timing, the LED is dynamically lit. Although the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a configuration having 16-bit output ports, they may have a 16-bit configuration by connecting integrated circuits having 8-bit output ports in parallel.

  The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). The segment signal is output at the timing to turn on the LED.

  In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED in which the anode side of the LED is a common terminal is used for the base display 1317. When the LED is lit, a drive current flows from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. Flows. However, since an integrated circuit having the same configuration is used for the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output from the driver circuit in each of the conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 (the output transistor of the driver circuit) Polarity) will be the same. For this reason, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of drawing in the drive current for lighting the LED.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may use an integrated circuit having only a parallel / serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial / parallel conversion function, respectively. Further, an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal may be used by switching between a parallel-serial conversion function and a serial-parallel conversion function.

  In addition, two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 fetch the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at the 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and set the CS to 1 as in the case of the aforementioned serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. Is output from the parallel port at the timing of rising. The output of the parallel port includes a driver transistor, and switches the voltage applied to the driver transistor to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

  An external terminal plate 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal plate 784 (for example, a security signal and a ball payout signal). Is output. Various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals for the various solenoids are output. A test terminal 1348 is connected to the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the test terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory opening signal, Normally, an electric accessory release signal is output. Nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346.

  The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same signal branched including the chip select is input to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, the solenoid drive signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the inspection signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. In addition, +12 V is applied to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12 V, and +5 V is applied to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5 V inspection signal. As described above, by using the two serial / parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, synchronized signals having different voltage levels can be generated.

  Of the outputs from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is thickened, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which only a relatively small current flows. The pattern may be thin. It is sufficient to reduce the resistance of the pattern without increasing the thickness of the pattern, and to increase the substantial cross-sectional area by forming the pattern on both the front and back surfaces, or to increase the substantial cross-sectional area by forming the inner layer pattern. May increase.

  Further, since the two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load on one conversion circuit becomes large, the output signal waveform of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and affects the output signal. Does not occur. That is, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. .

  Next, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 259, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on a main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around the main control MPU 1311. An inspection circuit arrangement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area. Circuit components (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection organization, and are generally marketed pachinko machines. No. 1 is not mounted (a pattern for component mounting is provided). That is, a connector that relays a signal output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid is mounted on the generally marketed pachinko machine 1, but the inspection signal output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 is transmitted. The inspection terminal 1348 to be relayed is not mounted. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 on the market has a configuration in which the inspection signal is not detected by the wrongdoer and is not used for the wrongdoing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 for commercial use, a printed pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area, although no components are mounted. For this reason, since noise may be induced in the data bus and cause a malfunction, the wiring (print pattern) in the test circuit arrangement area is pulled up to the power supply (+5 V) via a resistor (or to GND). (Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized alteration, the surface mounted components are not used in the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is commercially available. Surface mount components can be used. For this reason, the components of the circuit for inspection can be reduced in size, the area for disposing the circuit for inspection can be reduced, and the main control board 1310 can be reduced in size. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized alteration, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 has no components mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, but the circuit components provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are commercially available pachinko machines. 1, components can be mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310.

  Note that, among the components of the inspection circuit, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged near the main control board 1310. This separate board is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection organization, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 generally marketed. In this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 which is generally commercially available.

  In this way, by arranging the circuit components used for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 collectively in the inspection circuit arrangement area, it is easy to find missing parts of the commercially available pachinko machine 1 and to add additional components for fraud. Easy to find installation. Further, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, so that the main control board 1310 having high noise resistance can be configured.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area have a different orientation (for example, 180 degrees as shown in the drawing) from the same type of circuit components arranged in another place of the main control board 1310. (Rotated direction). In this way, by arranging the circuit components in different directions in the inspection circuit arrangement area and other places of the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the components used for the normal game from the components for the inspection, In the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 on the market, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which components are erroneously arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area.

  The symbols and numbers (or a combination thereof) of the mounted circuit components are displayed on the main control board 1310 by, for example, silk printing, but the symbols and the numbers of the circuit components to be arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are displayed. The numbers may be grouped by symbols and numbers following the symbols and numbers of the circuit components used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are denoted by symbols after IC12. In this way, the circuit components for game control mounted on the pachinko machine 1 on the market can be given symbols or numbers that do not jump, and the checks after the circuit components are mounted on the main control board 1310 can be easily performed. it can.

  Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the game control parts, the connectors connected to the game control parts and the inspection terminals can be easily arranged. It can be distinguished, and erroneous wiring for incorrectly connecting cables can be prevented. In particular, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are the same as the symbols and numbers of the connection destinations of the inspection apparatus of the other party, it is convenient to connect cables at the time of inspection, and connection errors can be reduced.

  In addition, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused ports that are not used, and the empty ports may be arranged so as to be collected at adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the unused port numbers are consecutive or not, the unused port terminals may be arranged in a consolidated position. By arranging the vacant terminals collectively, the area where the printed pattern is not provided on the main control board 1310 is collected, and it is easy to find missing parts, and to find attachment of additional parts for fraud. It is easier.

  Further, the terminals of the vacant port are arranged at a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, to which a solenoid is connected) in a positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting and outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right sides (up and down in the figure) of the side where the terminal of the empty port is located. Therefore, when an additional function is added to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without routing a long pattern.

  As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, wiring of the data bus can be reduced, and attachment of an additional component for fraud can be easily found. In other words, a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits are eliminated, and some signal lines including control lines are formed. Therefore, a clear circuit pattern is obtained. In addition, the main control board 1310 that is resistant to noise can be configured by shortening the data line routing distance.

  In addition, since the number of data lines is reduced, circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of the data lines. Therefore, an I / O IC (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

  In addition, since the number of circuit patterns is reduced, the number of ground patterns can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise can be configured.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

  The parallel output port of the address D2 (chip select SERS0) is a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343. As shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of channel A are connected to the common side of the function display unit 1400 (the anode terminal of the LED). And the output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side of the base display 1317 (the anode terminal of the 7-segment LED). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

  The parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1342. As shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of channel A are connected to the segment side of the function display unit 1400 (cathode of LED). The output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B are connected to the segment side of the base display 1317 (the cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED).

  The common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port to be turned on at a constant period (for example, interruption every 4 ms). Focusing on the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms),..., Only PA7 in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms) Is repeated at a constant cycle (4 ms × the number of ports). That is, when the eight ports are repeatedly switched, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, when the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A are grouped and attention is paid to the output ports of channel A, only PA0 and PA4 are turned ON in the timer interrupt processing, and in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned ON,..., And only PA3 and PA7 may be turned ON in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms) at a constant cycle (4 ms × the number of ports). By making the operation of the fixed period serial communication, it is difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

  The parallel input port of the address D5 is a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to the inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. Outputs of these ball detection sensors are input to the main control MPU 1311 as serial signals, and are read as signals of the address D5.

  Further, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure notice signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311. ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (at the time requested by the program) or monitored outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after power-on), the main control is performed without going through the parallel / serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to the MPU 1311.

  Further, detection signals of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch are provided to general-purpose input / output ports (input / output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311. Has been entered. These signals are output when an abnormality (such as fraud or failure) occurs in the pachinko machine 1 and need to be monitored in real time (at the time requested by the program). It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. Further, the abnormality is notified by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or voice by the detection signals of these sensors and switches. By this abnormal notification, the employee of the hall comes to check the state of the pachinko machine, so that the game is substantially stopped. If the abnormal notification is a false notification, it may make the player uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress false detection. For this reason, it is preferable to input these signals to the general-purpose input / output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short time (so-called reading twice) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

  In the double reading process, in one timer interrupt process, a read command is continuously executed to determine a signal level input to a general-purpose input / output port (or a general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, Executes a plurality of read instructions sandwiching a few instructions to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or reads a plurality of reads with a wait of several clocks This is performed by executing an instruction and determining the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, when the level of the port is continuously determined through the parallel-serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when the level of the general-purpose port is continuously determined, the level is 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, signals of various switches and sensors requiring real-time properties are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the extended I / O using the chip select. Since the level of a signal input to a general-purpose input / output port (also used for input / output) is taken in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for reception of a serial signal.

  Although the general-purpose input / output ports (input / output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, a part of the signal input through the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 is used for the general-purpose input / output ports (input / output) IOP4 to IOP7. May be entered.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

  When the general-purpose input port is an unused terminal, the terminal is pulled up to 5 V via a resistor or pulled down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential, and to reduce the influence of noise induced on the power supply line. It is better to reduce it. If the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be left open. However, it may be pulled up to 5 V via a dummy resistor or pulled down to GND so that the level change of the output port does not become noise.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 and the signal used for game control is output via the serial / parallel conversion circuit. For this reason, the winning ball detection signals are collected and input to one port and are easily handled by the game control program.

  Also, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, a signal that needs to be detected a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) is input to a general-purpose port, and a signal that does not need to be read twice is serially input. The data is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, the signal level can be detected a plurality of times in a short time, and the determination can be made without the influence of noise. If the general-purpose input port is vacant, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

  A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 are allocated to the general-purpose input / output port (input / output). Since all can be assigned, the general-purpose input / output port has high versatility with respect to a change in specifications. For this reason, it is desirable that the port reserved as a spare for the addition of a new function be a general-purpose input / output port (also used for input / output), and that the general-purpose input port be assigned with priority.

  Next, referring to FIG. 261, the timing of data output and capture by a synchronous serial signal will be described.

  When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminals SERS0, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected in PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

  Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is output at the data fetch timing of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR / LOAD terminal that determines the data fetch timing of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( LOW), data is fetched from PA0 to PB7. Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is fetched from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs the serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this time, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH), and control is performed so as not to take in new data.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used as a trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at an arbitrary timing.

  Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263.

  It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be used in common by a plurality of models without redesign. However, the input / output signals of the main control board 1310 may vary depending on the model and specifications. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the input / output interface of the main control board 1310 that differs depending on the model is mounted on another board (input / output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. Configuration. The performance (for example, noise resistance) is evaluated by making the main control board 1310 common to a plurality of models, that is, by making the board size, the circuit design, the artwork of the printed circuit board, the component arrangement, and the like the same. The main control board 1310 having a stable quality can be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesign.

  In addition, when the input / output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input / output board 1351, there is a problem where the circuits are divided. One is a method of separating with a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating with a parallel signal converted from a serial signal. The former case is preferable because the number of wirings between the substrates can be reduced as compared with the latter case. Further, it is difficult to know the order in which data is transmitted from a serial signal even if the signal itself is acquired, and it is unknown at what timing which data is being transmitted. Further, the clock is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and this synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. For this reason, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the contents of the transmitted data even if a serial signal is obtained. For this reason, it is preferable that the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 be connected by a serial signal line.

  As shown in FIG. 262, an input / output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 in a sealable manner. On the input / output board 1351, a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 are provided. The main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 (the main control MPU 1311 and the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. It is possible to connect the substrates with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or a connector between boards.

  Further, if serial communication is performed between the boards, even if the signal is obtained, it is difficult to analyze the data, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the contents of the transmitted data are known to the wrongdoer. Also, the input / output board 1351 for inputting / outputting a signal for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310, and the input / output signal that changes depending on the model is set in the input / output board 1351, so that the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without increasing the number of models can be increased, and versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

  Further, by housing the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

  When using the main control board 1310 for another model, the design of the input / output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. The main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) is evaluated and whose design quality is stable can be used. If the size of the input / output board 1351 and the position of the mounting hole are not changed, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be used without redesigning the main control board box 1320. In addition, a countermeasure against noise that changes for each model may be performed by the input / output board 1351 instead of the main control board 1310.

  The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 for outputting a drive signal of the base display 1317 are preferably arranged on the main control board 1310. When the base display 1317 is provided on the input / output board 1351, the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are provided on the input / output board 1351, and signals for driving the function display unit 1400 are input and output. It is good to output from 1351.

  Further, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal is preferably disposed on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 are preferably provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel bus, so that when the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, This is because the number of connection lines with the substrate 1351 increases.

  As shown in FIG. 263, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input / output board 1351 may be mounted outside the main control board box 1320.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 263, since the input / output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. Further, since the input / output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Further, when the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed and the input / output board box 1350 in which the input / output board 1351 is housed are provided separately, each board box becomes small, and the board installation position becomes free. . Furthermore, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, the main control board 1310 needs to appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input / output board 1351 Since it is not necessary to be visible from the back side of the machine 1, the substrate installation position is free. Thus, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 263, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 263, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output outside the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the case of a pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 outside the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent the operation of the pachinko machine from being detected by a fraudster. . However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, there is a low possibility that the operation status of the pachinko machine is perceived by a wrongdoer. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and the data rate is constant, so that the data rate can be easily estimated from the outside. As a result, the signal transmitted on the data bus is obtained. Sometimes. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of the synchronous clock may be different from the operation clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. For this reason, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the contents of the transmitted data even if a serial signal is obtained.

  As described above, the example in which the input / output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output function of the signal depending on the model is mounted on the input / output board 1351 has been described. If there is a portion where the resistance to fraud or noise does not decrease even if it is arranged, it may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. For example, the output of a signal requiring a drive current of a solenoid or a motor attached to the game board 5, the output of a drive signal of the function display unit 1400, various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) Is a function that may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. In addition, communication with the payout control board 951, output of a signal output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), base display The output to 1317 is a function that is preferably mounted on 1310 on the main control board.

  The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input / output board 1351 receive a dummy signal (0 V or 5 V) to an empty input terminal or connect a dummy resistor to an empty output terminal. Good. This is because if nothing is connected to the empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

  In particular, if some of the multiple signals that a fraudster wants to acquire are transmitted through a parallel bus or general-purpose port, and other signals are transmitted as serial signals, serial signal analysis is difficult. It is necessary for the wrongdoer to acquire signals from a plurality of places including the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351, and the deterrence against fraud can be increased.

[15. Slot machine]
So far, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described, and subsequently, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (turning-type gaming machine) will be described. The pachinko machine has been schematically described with reference to FIG. 26, but programs and data are arranged in a RAM and a ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 264 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, in the slot machine 4000 of this embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front, and a front member is provided on the front of the housing 4100. 4200 is provided so as to be able to open and close in a one-sided format. Above the front member 4200, there are provided an image display 4500 that performs display effects and information display according to the progress of the game, a speaker that performs sound effects, and the like. The image display body 4500 is configured by, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Various effect displays and history information displays on the image display 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 constitutes an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 implements a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant

  At the center of the front member 4200, a front panel on which a pattern for decoration and the like are drawn is arranged at the center of the front member 4200, and the rear is visible at the center of the front panel (for example, transparent). ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. In addition, the front panel may be configured by a display device. In a state where no image is displayed in the symbol display window 4401, the reel 4301 can be visually recognized, and an image for producing a game mainly around the symbol display window 4401 is displayed. I do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing a game in the symbol display window 4401.

  Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize a symbol that is variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 disposed in the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in a horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged in accordance with a predetermined arrangement by winding a strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn in the longitudinal direction on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

  Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 266), which is a stepping motor, respectively. The respective reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently driven to rotate and stop. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form a drive source for the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method in the same manner as the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 to increase the drive torque and the static torque. As a result, a small motor can be used as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The respective reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c corresponding thereto are a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motor 4341 corresponding to each reel is a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

  Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 4301 is stopped, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, 3 × 3 total of nine symbols for each of the reels 4301 a, 4301 b, and 4301 c via the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c for deriving and displaying the game stop result can be visually recognized.

  For a 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401, a predetermined enableable line is set. In the present embodiment, a line (middle line) crossing the middle symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a line obliquely crossing each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the lower stage of the left reel 4301a to the middle stage of the middle reel 4301b to the upper stage of the right reel 4301c. A line obliquely crossing each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the upper stage of the left reel 4301a to the middle stage of the middle reel 4301b to the lower stage of the right reel 4301c is a valid line. Then, the player can insert a medal or input from a credit (hereinafter, referred to as a "bet operation") to activate a line that can be activated, based on a symbol combination mode (rolled) formed on the activated line. It is determined whether a winning (role) has been established or not.

  When a winning is achieved, three predetermined symbols may be arranged on the activated line, or three predetermined symbols may be arranged on other lines in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) crossing the upper symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that a line (lower line) crossing the lower symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c and a front surface (visible portion) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each of the other reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. The symbols may be arranged visually on the virtual line located. Hereafter, the lines that can be activated (middle, upward and downward lines), lines that can be visually aligned when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are combined into a symbol stop line (pattern alignment). Line).

  The upper, middle, lower, upward-sloping and downward-sloping lines are activated lines, and a predetermined activation line is activated in accordance with the bet amount. Based on the symbol combination mode formed on the activated line, a prize ( It determines whether the role has been established or not. For example, in the case of the bet number 1, the middle line is an effective line, in the case of the bet number 2, the upper and lower lines are effective lines in addition to the middle line. And Also, regardless of the bet amount (even if the bet amount is 1 or 2), all the lines may be made valid, or three lines may be used exclusively.

  Around the symbol display window 4401 (for example, below), a payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games during the special prize may be provided.

  A step portion protruding forward is formed below the symbol display window 4401, and the upper surface of the step portion is an operation section 4202 that is inclined downward on the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

  The medal slot 4203 is provided on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. When a player inserts medals into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performs a betting operation, the game can be executed. In a path through which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, an insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on information detected by the insertion sensor 4207b.

  The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are disposed on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from credits by performing a pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can input from credit to the maximum number of bets (for example, three) by performing a pressing operation once, but if the credit number is less than the maximum number, the credit number is input as the bet number. It has become.

  A payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided below the operation unit 4202. The payout button 4209 is a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (bet medal) input as a bet amount by the single bet button 4205, the max bet button 4206, or stored as a credit when a winning is established. It is used when giving a command to return the used medals (reserved medals) to the medal tray 4201. Note that when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 after the automatic betting operation based on the establishment of the replay winning (replay winning), a medal exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as a credit is also transmitted to the medal selector 4207 via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the tray 4201.

  The starting lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a one-section game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used to return medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and jammed in the medal selector 4207 to the medal tray 4201.

  The reel stop button 4211 includes a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c. This is for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c in response to the stop operation.

  Further, a decorative plate (decorative panel) constituting a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below a portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout port, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided below the decorative plate and at the lowermost part of the front member 4200.

  A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 266) for controlling the entire slot machine 4000 is provided in an upper portion inside the housing. On the main board 4600, an accessory ratio indicator 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided. The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED similarly to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be formed by a liquid crystal display device provided over the main substrate 4600.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display body 4500) provided on the front of the slot machine 4000. Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the image display 4500.

  By operating the display switch 1318, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed on the printed circuit board or the housing 4100 near the display switch 1318 that a switch for operating the display of the accessory ratio is displayed (printing, engraving, sticker, or the like). The display switch 1318 is desirably provided near the accessory ratio display 1317. However, the display switch 1318 may be provided on another board (for example, the effect control board 4700) as long as it is not a main control unit 1300 but in a place where the operation is easy. , The power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, and the front member 4200. Further, as described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from operating by mistake.

  A symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially at the center of the inside of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are mounted thereon. An external relay terminal plate 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

  Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is provided at a lower portion inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the activated line and a prize is established, the prize is won. Are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to. By operating the payout button 4209, the medal for the credit is paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110. On the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 are stored, and the inflowing medals are transferred to a medal collection mechanism on an installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank for guiding is provided.

[15-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 266 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. The main board 4600 is provided with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like.

  Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the accessory ratio display 1317 for displaying the accessory ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the display switch 1318 for switching the display of the accessory ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 may be a push-button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. By operating the display switch 1318, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The one-sheet insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, the start lever 4210, the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, the payout button 4209, and the like are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown in the drawings. , And outputs a detected operation signal to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a , 4211b, and 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

  The slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input from the devices to the main board 4600. The devices include a medal payout device 4110 in addition to the symbol variation display device 4300.

  As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively (the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, and the right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor. Each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can rotate and stop independently. At the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed on the symbol display window 4401 from above. Displayed continuously changing downward.

  In addition, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c for detecting reference positions related to the rotation of the reels. The reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c, respectively. It is provided corresponding to the inside of the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 4207, the above-described solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b are provided. The insertion sensor 4207b detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is off, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out so that the insertion of the medal is not accepted. The medals that have flowed through the return gutter through the return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, since the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, neither the betting nor the storing of medals due to the insertion of medals is performed.

  The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting paid out medals one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. . The auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a. When the number of medals stored in the auxiliary storage box exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the medals exceed the predetermined quantity is sent to the main board 4600. Output to At this time, an error display notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like, thereby notifying the player, the hall employee, and the like that the abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. In addition, a drive signal is input from the main board 4600 to the medal payout device 4110 according to the type of the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there is no medal at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), a payout medal abnormality signal is output from the payout sensor 4110e to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in medal payout. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, or the like to notify that a player, a hall employee, or the like has an abnormality.

  The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. The effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input / output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 4705), a sound source IC 4706, and the like. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, off, etc.) of the lighting device 4502 and the operation of the speaker 4512.

  Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 of the game arcade via the external relay terminal plate 4131. The external relay terminal plate 4131 has a role of relaying various signals (insertion medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

  The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from a power supply of AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power supplies of DC +5 V (hereinafter, “+5 V”), DC +12 V (hereinafter, “+12 V”), and DC +24 V (hereinafter, “+24 V”) are created. Three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. Is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300 including

  In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed outside the slot machine 4000, and can only be operated by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. The reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated when setting is changed together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

  The main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switch signal (for example, HI) and sets the reel drive motor voltage switch circuit 4605. Is supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) and sets the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. Is supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage.

  The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 with the number of medals determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c rotate, and thereafter, the player stops the reels by pressing the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped and controlled. When all the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the activated line, and the game result is determined as necessary. In accordance therewith, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are awarded.

  As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel band on which a pattern is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is determined based on display contents (combination of symbols displayed on the activated lines) displayed in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned activated line in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in a total number of the payout numbers corresponding to the displayed winning combinations.

[15-3. Configuration of Storage Area]
Subsequently, a storage area provided by the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603 provided on the main board 4600 will be described. The storage area of the pachinko machine has been schematically described with reference to FIG. 24, but has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 267 to 270. FIG. 267 is a diagram illustrating details of an access area in the game control of the slot machine 4000 and a ROM area 5100 that is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602 in the present embodiment.

  The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by a medium such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from “0000H” to “FFFFH” are assigned. The access area according to the present embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I / O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. Have been. Note that each area does not necessarily have to correspond to a medium that provides an access area, and a plurality of media may provide one area, or one medium may provide a plurality of areas.

  With the access area of the present embodiment configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data without being conscious of the medium that actually provides the access area by specifying an address. Hereinafter, details of the access area will be described.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. ROM area 5100 corresponds to a storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium in which stored contents are retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read out, but is updated or deleted. You can't do that. Note that the ROM 4602 may be a non-volatile storage medium, and data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updated.

  The addresses from “0000H” to “1FFFH” are assigned to the ROM area 5100. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the ROM 4602 by designating the address “0000H” to “1FFFH”.

  The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolated area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolated area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolated area, and a fourth isolated area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

  The first control area is a game control area in which a program for performing game control and the like are stored. The first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the game stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. Note that an area (first control area, first data area) used for game control is a game control area (first storage area).

  The second control area stores a program for debugging (functional inspection) the control program and the like. The second data area is an area for storing data for performing debugging (function inspection). Note that the second data area is not necessarily required, and data for debugging may be stored in the second control area. Note that an area (second control area, second data area) for storing a program or data for debugging (functional inspection) of the game control program without being used for game control is set as an area for debugging (inspection function) ( (Second storage area).

  The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, and the like. In the third control area, data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored. A third data area for storing data for calculating the ratio of the accessory may be provided. Note that an area (third control area) in which a program and data for calculating an accessory ratio that are not used for game control are stored is defined as an area for calculating an accessory ratio (third storage area). In this way, by designing the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in another area, the inspection of the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 are performed. And the inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas where access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset processing is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and succeeding areas. For example, the start address of the first isolated area is next to the end address of the first control area. (“0A00H”), and the end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately before the first data area (“0AFFH”). The third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30. However, the debug (function test) area It may be treated as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is disposed between the debug (function inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area. In FIG. 267, the fourth isolation area is treated as a debug (function inspection) area. You may make it handle as an object ratio calculation area | region.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 268 is a diagram illustrating details of the RAM area 5200 in the present embodiment. RAM area 5200 corresponds to a storage area provided by RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium from which stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and enables reading and writing of stored data. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100 and stores data derived by executing the programs. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be able to read and write data, and may be a nonvolatile storage medium. Further, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be retained for a predetermined period by the backup power supply.

  The RAM area 5200 has addresses from “3000H” to “31FFH”. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses “3000H” to “31FFH”.

  The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolated area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

  The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The work area for debugging (inspection function) is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of a program. The work area for calculating an accessory ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio and the calculated accessory ratio (such as an accessory ratio, a continuous agent ratio, and an advantageous section accessory ratio). It is not always necessary to secure a dedicated work area for the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and a work area for game control may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating an accessory ratio may be allocated to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the control area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is reduced. However, if the program configuration does not use the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory, the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory will not necessarily be used. Is also good.

  The evacuation area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debugging (inspection function) control, or calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, before executing the predetermined process, the values of various registers of the CPU (operation register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to a save area, After the processing is completed, the copied value is returned to various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and calculation of the accessory ratio. The calculation may be separately performed. Thereby, the game control, the debugging (inspection function) control, and the calculation of the accessory ratio can maintain more independence.

  The isolation area includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), and a work area for calculating the proportion of characters, a work area for debugging (inspection function), an evacuation area, and an evacuation area for calculating the proportion of characters. , And is a region that is continuous with each region (regions before and after). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the next address (“3076H”) after the end address of the game control work area, and the end address is This is the address ("307FH") immediately before the work area for debugging (inspection function). In addition, the isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed in the processing by the CPU 4601.

  FIG. 268 shows details of the work area for calculating an accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work ratio calculation work area may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the play ratio is stored. . One or more backup areas may be provided. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, is set each time data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or is initialized (step S1020 in FIG. 271). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). Good. The check code may be used also as the power interruption flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power interruption flag is set. If a predetermined value is set in the power interruption flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271), it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal or not, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area.

  An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

  FIG. 269 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating an accessory ratio.

  FIG. 269 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (A), the number of paid-off items, the number of consecutive paid-out items, the total number of paid-out items, the ratio of bonuses, the ratio of consecutive valuables, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non- advantageous section games, and the number of advantageous sections Store the percentage. The number of bonuses paid out is the number of medals paid out during the operation of the bonus (for example, during the regular bonus). The number of continuous-acquisition-acquired balls is the number of medals paid out during the operation of the continuous-accompaniment (for example, during a big bonus). The total number of payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The ratio of bonuses can be calculated by the number of bonuses / the total number of bonuses. The ratio of consecutive bonuses can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive bonuses paid out / the total number of paid outs. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games executed in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a gaming state such as ART (Assist Replay Time) in which the number of medals on hand is hard to decrease). , The number of games executed in a gaming state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by the number of advantageous section games ÷ (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non- advantageous section games).

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-favorable section games are represented by the total of FIG. This is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, each of which corresponds to a cumulative total, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294767295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal.

  The number of bonuses, the number of consecutive bonuses, the total number of bonuses, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-favorable section games are updated in the area ratio calculating area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 271), and , The continuous character ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

  FIG. 269 (B) shows a structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (B), the number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of payables, the number of consecutive payouts, the number of games, the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, the number of advantageous section games, The number of advantageous section games and the advantageous section ratio are stored. The storage area for each data is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each of a predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

  Note that the write pointer and the read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data move every predetermined number of balls. The read pointer also moves with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer indicates a storage area one time behind the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using data for 400 games.

  The cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the accessory ratio and the continuous character ratio is a value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer makes a round and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total total of each data is the total value of the data collected in the past, the total value of the accessory ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the total value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data of the cleared area is calculated.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (B), the number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of consecutive bonus payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are 2-byte storage areas. Numeric values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. Each of the number of replays, the number of winnings, the number of bonuses, the number of consecutive bonuses, and the total number of games is a 3-byte storage area, and can store a value up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the total is, for example, the sum of data for 400 games × n (6000 games when n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of times of replay, number of prize payouts, number of payouts, number of continuous payouts, and number of games are each a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store a numerical value up to 16777215 or 429767295 in decimal. Since the total total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Each of the total and total of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store a value up to 255 in decimal. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non- advantageous section games are each a 3-byte storage area, and can store a value up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous section ratio is a storage area of 1 byte, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal.

  By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for the same 6,000 games can be stored. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

  Among the structures of the work area shown in FIG. This is the same as the description in FIG. The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The winning and payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of executed games, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

  The number of replays, the number of winnings, the number of bonuses, the number of consecutive bonuses, the total number of bonuses, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-favorable section games are updated in the area ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 271). ), The accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 269 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data of the work area for calculating the ratio of characters is deleted in the initialization processing (step S1020 in FIG. 271). However, the data is not deleted on other occasions. For this reason, the data of the work area for calculating an accessory ratio may be deleted at predetermined intervals (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total sum of FIG. 269 (B) may be deleted every predetermined period.

  In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio greatly changes from the previous calculated value. In the case where the number of paid out items> the total number of paid out items), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. In addition, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the data is abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be checked using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be copied to the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. Configuration of I / O Area]
Subsequently, the I / O area 5300 will be described. Input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 5300, and the CPU 4601 can access the input / output ports by accessing the I / O area 5300. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, or a port related to output of a special winning opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. The setting of the input / output port (setting regarding use / non-use such as input setting and output setting) is set based on the setting value of the parameter information setting area 5400.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram illustrating details of the parameter information setting area 5400 according to the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, the various settings include the start / end addresses of each control area and data area as shown in FIG. In FIG. 270, the definition of the start address and the end address of each of the third control area, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and the save area for calculating the accessory ratio is omitted, but the third control area start setting is omitted. And the third control area end setting is defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of other control areas. Defined in the same way as the end setting, the setting for starting the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio and the setting for ending the evacuation area for calculating the ratio of the accessory are defined in the same way as the start and end settings for the other evacuation areas. An area other than the area set here is an unused (unset) area. Thereby, when the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. In FIG. 270, continuous areas are set. However, the areas need not be continuous as set areas. For example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, an initial start of the program can be performed by causing a reset by intentionally accessing the isolated area. In the slot machine, since the processing is sequentially executed, the initial setting can be executed again by executing the program from the start-up processing by accessing the isolated area after the final game processing is completed. Thereby, even if the function of the initial setting is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, it is possible to reset the normal value by executing the initial setting again. Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear is determined based on the power interruption flag. However, it is possible to forcibly generate the RAM clear by accessing the isolated area without setting the power interruption flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machines, the game is played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, the game cannot be continued, but in the case of the slot machine, it becomes unnecessary after the game is over. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, the process for initializing the information in the RAM can be made unnecessary by accessing the isolated area.

  The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601. Instead, the address and the set value of the parameter area are set in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. Before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at the time of startup, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. Thereby, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The set values of various parameters are set in the ROM 4602 in which a game control program is stored for information managed (determined) by the user.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset startup processing]
Subsequently, control of the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset activation process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process that is executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on or a power failure occurs, and is a process that is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

  When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters required for executing a game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, and the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated as a use area in the RAM area 5200, and an area not allocated as a use area (an isolated area in FIG. 268) is set as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the save area are divided into a game control area and a debug (inspection function) area (or other uses). In the ROM area 5100, similarly to the RAM area 5200, an area for storing programs and data is allocated as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

  Next, the CPU 4601 executes a security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, the activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped because, for example, the ROM 4602 may have been replaced with an incorrect ROM. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

  The processing from the power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not processing defined by the user program, but processing configured by hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for performing initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as activation setting of a periodic process (FIG. 272, timer interrupt process) for periodically executing a predetermined process is executed. In the present embodiment, a function for preventing settings related to the lottery of a game, such as a setting of a random number function, from being rewritten by a user program after a security check is executed in a parameter setting process, and other than these functions, a device initialization setting process is performed. Running on By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom of the game control is increased and the illegality is hardly performed in the game.

  Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the processing of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the contents of the backed-up RAM 4603.

  When performing a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “Yes”), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for initializing the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when a setting change operation of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power-off flag is not set.

  On the other hand, when performing a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “No”), the CPU 4601 executes a process of returning the game based on the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the process returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure by the return process. Specifically, in any one of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset activation process described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 272), the process is returned to the process interrupted at the time of power failure.

  In the slot machine 4000 according to the present embodiment, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when a return process is performed. At this time, only the game control work area, excluding the debug (inspection function) work area, of the entire area in which the checksum calculation target is used as the work (the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area) It may be. The reason for calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is that the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process, and that the game result is affected. Since there is no processing, there may be some bugs due to insufficient verification. In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds information obtained by performing such processing is considered. Using the checksum as a calculation target may impair the reliability of normal recovery from power interruption. On the other hand, since the game control processing is directly related to the game, if it is mounted on a product with a bug or the like remaining, a serious trouble will occur in the market. In some cases, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled. In this case, it is extremely likely to cause enormous cost and other damages to manufacturers and halls, so thoroughgoing. This is because the game control work area has higher reliability than the debug (inspection function) work area, because the verification is performed in an efficient manner.

  Upon completion of the initialization process or a series of games, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning information of the RAM 4603 that is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

  When the game initial setting process ends, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting a debug (inspection function) signal to an initial state is performed. In the information signal output process, information signal 1 to N output processes are defined, and a necessary module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when a debug (inspection function) signal (information on the start of rotation of the reel, the ON of the start lever, and the winning combination) accompanying the game start is output in the game start processing, the debug (the information on stop of each reel) in the symbol stop processing is performed. Inspection function) When a signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, a debug (inspection function) signal related to the fixed position in the winning determination process (fixed position stopped and displayed on each reel, payout accompanying the fixed position) When outputting the number information and output signal information (number of payout medals) related to the number of payouts at the time of payout, an “information signal N output process” module required for the process is appropriately called and executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process of performing a process at a stage before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not an instruction to execute a replay (replay) has been made, whether or not medals have been inserted, whether or not medals have been cleared, and the like. Confirmation of game setting values and the like are performed.

  When start lever 4210 is operated, CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting a game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random value for performing a lottery of a game is obtained, a winning combination is determined, and the rotation of the reel 4301 is started. Thereafter, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed (step S1032).

  When the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 executes a symbol stop process for enabling the input of the reel stop button 4211 and performing a process until all the reels 4301 stop (step S1034).

  Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, a winning combination is determined, and when it is determined that a winning is achieved, a setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed, and a setting for executing a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of award medals to be paid out as a gaming value to an area corresponding to the current gaming state, and sets a work area for calculating an accessory ratio in the RAM area 5200 (see FIG. 268 (see FIG. 269) (step S1038). When there is no prize to be paid out in step S1036, the processing in step S1038 can be skipped, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

  In addition, even if the slot machine 4000 detects a fraud and stops the game, it executes the accessory ratio calculation area update processing (step S1038). Regardless of whether or not fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, data for calculating the accessory ratio can be collected even during fraud notification.

  Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game termination process for performing a process at the time of terminating the game (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if no prize has been won, or if the prize has no payout, the process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and executes a main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, a description will be given of a periodic process which is an interrupt process started at a predetermined cycle while the main loop process of the system reset initial start process is being executed. FIG. 272 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the periodic process.

  When the periodic processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. As described above, the periodic process is an interrupt process that is started while the main loop process is being executed. Therefore, by saving the register of the CPU used in the main loop process, the process can be continued after the return. Need to be

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets a watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be cleared periodically.

  Next, the CPU 4601 executes a switch input process of sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check processing, processing relating to drive control of a driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, pulse output of the stepping motor, detection of the origin position, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process for updating various timers used in the game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing × the set number of times.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether the display switch 1318 has been operated, and if the display switch 1318 has been operated, invokes the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and stores the medal stored in the accessory ratio calculation work area. Calculate the accessory ratio with reference to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 (step S1119). The process of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is the same as the process of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (FIGS. 24 and 25). The specific calculation method of the accessory ratio and the specific display method of the accessory ratio are the same as the methods described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to confirm the accessory ratio (the gambling of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data.

  Note that when the display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, total, total total) may be calculated. Only the value to be calculated may be calculated. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 in response to the operation of the display switch 1318.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The control target LED is controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, a payout number display LED 4562. Also, data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

  The CPU 4601 executes an information output process of outputting a signal to the external relay terminal plate 4131 (Step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal plate 4131. Further, CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

  The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating a random number used for the game (Step S1126). In the random number update process, a random number to be generated by software processing is updated. Here, in addition to the random numbers generated only by software, a process of updating soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. In the case of the soft random number built in the CPU, the count itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger of the update is determined by this processing. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of program processes related to random number updating.

  When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, execution of an interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During the execution of the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is suspended, and the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. Is to be executed. For this reason, it is configured such that the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed in a multiplex manner.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, an information signal output process executed in a system reset activation process or the like will be described. The information signal output processing is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is configured by a plurality of modules. For example, “condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)”, “lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)” and the like are available. Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, and the description of each flow is omitted. FIG. 273 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of an information signal output process according to the present embodiment.

  When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the value set in the register from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the value is restored even if it is destroyed), and to save the values of all registers to the stack area. It is made to let. The stack area used at this time is allocated to a debug (inspection function) save area, and is assigned to a different area separated from the game control save area.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires, from the RAM 4603, information to be referred to for selecting (ON / OFF) an information signal to be output (a signal for debugging (inspection function)) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only data stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, and data is not written to the RAM 4603 during the process. If writing is necessary, information is output to a debug (inspection function) work area. A dedicated work is provided so that the work is not used (including reference) in processing other than the information signal output processing. Thereby, even if the program for executing the information signal output processing is arranged in a different place from the other game control programs, the independence from the other game control programs can be secured without using the common area. .

  Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information obtained in the processing of Step S1212 (Step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to a corresponding port (Step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is determined in advance, and by setting a sufficient time, a debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination. Thereafter, the values of all the registers saved in the processing of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the information signal (debug (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the output of the debugging (inspection function) signal. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each function (1 to N) of the output signal. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processes are configured for each function. However, a table defining output signals corresponding to the functions is stored in the debug (inspection function) area in the fourth area. The information signal output processing may be made common by preparing the two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to the function specified by the caller.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a program (signal output program) for executing information signal output processing and the like is stored in an area clearly distinguished from an area for storing a game control program (game control area). By providing an area (an area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 and is a process that does not affect the result of the game, and does not impair the fairness of the game. For other purposes (for example, to arrange a game control program or a general-purpose program to compensate for a shortage of the capacity of the game control area), the program is not arranged in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

  The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program. At this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all registers used in the game control area. Also, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is being executed, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. In this case, only the reference to the game control work area is permitted, and writing is prohibited. Further, it is configured to prohibit calling a module (including a subroutine) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program arranged in the debugging (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in a subroutine form, and after the subroutine is completed, the program is returned immediately after the calling by a return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area).

  In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control and work area for calculating the ratio of the accessory) may be the same as that of steps S18 to S26 in FIG. Note that the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and if the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the game state backup data is deleted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the above-described example of the pachinko machine, the accessory ratio of the operating slot machine can be accurately calculated, and the gambling of the operating gaming machine can be improved. You can check.

  As described above, the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations, and various changes and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims are provided. It includes the configuration.

  Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the followings are typical examples of aspects of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine for giving a gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program for controlling the progress of the game,
And an accessory ratio indicator for displaying information on the granted game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller,
Transmitting data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display to the driver circuit by serial communication,
The game according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein after power-on, for a serial communication with the driver circuit, a synchronization method, a communication rate, whether to use a parity, and whether to use a stop bit are set. Machine.

  (1) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and the peripheral control device.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress an incorrect display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device includes:
It has a work RAM that holds data about the progress of the game and data for calculating the accessory ratio even while the power is turned off,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the setting for the serial communication is executed after the work RAM is cleared.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the wrong accessory ratio by using the RAM data having the wrong content.

(3) The main control device includes:
A function of transmitting the data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein after the power is turned on, a data storage amount for determining a timing at which data is transmitted from the FIFO buffer is set.

  Thus, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program for controlling the progress of the game,
And an accessory ratio indicator for displaying information on the granted game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main control device, the display device, and the driver such that a length of a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than a length of a signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a circuit is arranged.

  By increasing the length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit, it is easy to find unauthorized modification without disposing components around the main control device, and furthermore, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. Is shorter than the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the ratio of the accessory can be displayed more accurately.

  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio indicator are housed in one case.

  This makes it easy to find unauthorized modification without disposing other components around the main control device, and further reduces the influence of noise.

  (6) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio indicator are arranged on one printed circuit board.

  This makes it easier to find unauthorized modification without disposing other components on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and further reduces the influence of noise.

  (7) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio indicator is configured to house the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

  Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, a signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

  (8) The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

  Thus, the influence of noise on a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

  (9) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same as a display direction of a model number on a surface of the main control device.

  This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the main controller has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit does not display characters and numbers on the display device, and has a standby mode for reducing power consumption.
The game according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the gaming machine is installed in a closed state in which the accessory ratio indicator is invisible. Machine.

  This can prevent unnecessary power consumption of the gaming machine when display of the accessory ratio is unnecessary.

(11) A gaming machine for giving a prize ball as a game value to a player by winning a predetermined prize port of a game ball fired toward a game area,
A main controller for controlling the progress of the game,
And a character ratio indicator for displaying information about the prize ball,
The winning opening, there is a general winning opening the shape of the entrance does not change depending on the gaming state, there is an electric winning opening the entrance is opened or expanded depending on the gaming state,
The main controller, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least, the number of first prize balls to be paid out at the time of winning in the general winning opening, and at the time of winning in the electric winning opening The number of the second prize balls to be paid out is counted separately,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the accessory ratio indicator displays information on a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main control device stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of the stored prize balls,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the main control device deletes the number of winning balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

  Thus, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an incorrect accessory ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when power is turned off,
Storing game control data in the first backup area,
Storing data of the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of the bonuses in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein data stored in the first backup area and data stored in the second backup area are deleted under different conditions.

  Thereby, when at least one of the game control data and the winning ball number data for calculating the bonus ratio is normal, only abnormal data can be deleted and normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device includes:
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when power is turned off,
Storing game control data in the first backup area,
Storing data of the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of the bonuses in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the game machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is deleted, but the data stored in the second backup area is not deleted. The gaming machine according to the item.

  When the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed-up ratio calculation / display data 13136 which is backed up by the operation of the RAM clear switch is prevented from being deleted, thereby preventing the deletion of the ratio-calculated / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff at the game hall. In addition, it is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of the accessory is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to have a high accessory ratio, and to prevent concealment of a state where the accessory ratio is high.

(15A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information related to the granted game value,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the control means updates information about a game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes:
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire many game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state is determined by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of games discharged from the gaming machine). The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the number by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls.

  (15C) The control means may receive, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal for detecting a winning in a winning opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command or a timing for receiving a prize ball payout completion signal, or a timing for receiving a prize ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls used for calculating a base to be displayed on the display means is updated at a timing when a prize ball payout command instructing payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means includes:
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal gaming state, when receiving a signal that detects a winning of a game ball to a winning opening provided in the game area, calculates the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening,
Updating the total prize ball count using the calculated prize ball count,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state.

(15E) comprising payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes:
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected to a winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instruct the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Updating the total prize ball count using the prize ball count instructed to the payout control means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state.

(15F) comprising payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes:
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected to a winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instruct the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving a reception confirmation of the instruction from the payout control means,
Updating the total prize ball count using the prize ball count corresponding to the instruction that has received the reception confirmation,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state.

(15G) comprising payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes:
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected to a winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instruct the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Completion of payout of the prize ball according to the instruction is received from the payout control means,
The total prize ball count is updated using the prize ball count corresponding to the instruction that has received the completion of the payout,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state.

  (15H) The control means updates information on a game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input / output of a predetermined signal, and the display means displays the information on the updated game value on the display means. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information and displaying the result.

  According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the processing relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be executed accurately.

(16A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information related to the granted game value,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the control means updates information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, in association with a situation of the game satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes:
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire many game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the base is calculated at a timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means includes:
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected in a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in a buffer,
At a predetermined timing, the predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls hit in the game area). The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the number by the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the number of winning balls.

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing at which the number of winning balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby obtaining a total prize ball from the buffer. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the predetermined number is moved to a number.

  (16E) The control means updates information on game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input / output of a predetermined signal, and displays the information on the updated game value on the display means. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information and displaying the result.

  According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property under the restrictions of the main control device in the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine for giving a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information related to the granted game value,
The control means includes:
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means is updated in association with the counted number of consumed balls satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means includes:
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire many game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein information on the game value is calculated at a timing when the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

  (17C) The control means calculates the number of consumed balls by the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passed through the outlet and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein

(17D) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes:
Stores the total number of out balls used for calculating the base,
Calculate the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state, store it in the buffer,
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing, and dividing the number of award balls paid out to the player in the normal playing state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein:

(17E) the predetermined timing is a timing at which the number of consumed balls of the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of spheres consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out-balls, whereby the total number of out-balls from the buffer is increased. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a predetermined number is moved to the number.

(17F) The control means includes:
Triggered by a winning in the starting winning opening, a special symbol variation display game for deriving the special gaming state is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein when the reserved storage of the special symbol change display game is the upper limit value, the number of the prize balls is counted without storing the winning in the starting winning opening.

  (17G) The control means updates information on a game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input / output of a predetermined signal, and the display means displays the information on the updated game value on the display means. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, further comprising processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) a result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information and displaying the result.

  According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the granted game value;
A main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is performed is detachably attached,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the display means displays information on the gaming value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably mounted on an outer frame mounted on island facilities of a game arcade,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the display means is provided on a back side of the gaming machine which is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the display means is provided in the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

  According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, a decrease in the sales of the hall can be suppressed.

(19A)
A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information related to the granted game value,
The control means includes:
Information updating means for updating information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means in connection with satisfying a predetermined condition in the game;
Game execution means for performing a special symbol change display game triggered by a winning in the starting winning opening,
The information relating to the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special symbol change display game is being played by the game execution means, The described gaming machine.

(19B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means may include, as the predetermined condition, the detection of a prize to a winning opening, transmission of a prize ball payout command, reception of a reception confirmation of a prize ball payout command, or reception of a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls used for calculating a base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

  According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient measures against fraud are taken even during the variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Effect control means for controlling the effect of the special symbol variation display game performed in response to the winning of the starting opening,
Game value information display means for displaying information about the granted game value,
The effect control means,
Controlling transition to a low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced from a normal mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the display mode is not changed such that the power consumption of the gaming value information display means is reduced during the low power mode.

(20B) an effect display means for displaying an effect of the special symbol variation display game, the effect display means comprising a liquid crystal display means having a backlight;
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the gaming value information display means comprises a light emitting diode and does not reduce luminance even during the low power mode.

(20C) An effect display means for displaying an effect of the special symbol change display game,
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the holding of the special symbol change display game is exhausted,
The game value information display means does not change the display mode such that power consumption is reduced even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the holding of the special symbol change display game is exhausted. The gaming machine described in the preceding sections.

  According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with an enhanced energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information related to the granted game value,
The control means includes:
A normal game state, and game state control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The information on the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

  (21B) The control means is configured to determine, based on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means includes:
When the special symbol change display game has a big hit, the advantageous gaming state is derived, and the player is controlled to open a winning opening capable of acquiring many game values,
The period from the jackpot determination by the special symbol change display game to the start of the next special symbol change display game is set as the advantageous game state, and the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information on the game value. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein

(21D) The control means includes:
In the advantageous gaming state, the player controls so as to open a winning opening capable of acquiring a large number of gaming values,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of game balls that have won the winning opening is excluded from the number of game balls launched in the game area, and the number of consumed balls in the normal game state is counted.

  According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine for providing a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the granted game ball,
In the game area where the fired game balls roll, a start port for deriving a special game state that facilitates acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger for deriving an open state from a closed state of the start port. At least a passage opening is provided,
The control means includes:
It is also possible to control a special game state in which it is easy to derive the open state of the starting port,
Excluding the number of prize balls awarded and the number of consumed balls consumed by the player when being controlled to the special game state or the special game state, the number of prize balls awarded to the player is The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein information on the gaming ball is calculated and updated by dividing by a number of consumed balls consumed by a player.

  (22B) The control means is configured to determine, according to any one of the number of game balls hit into the game area, the number of game balls ejected from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls in the normal state is counted.

  (22C) The control means sets the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during the period from the determination of the hit in the normal symbol change display game to the start of the next normal symbol change display game to the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, which is excluded from calculation of information.

  (22D) The control means counts the number of consumed balls in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls that have won the starting port from the number of game balls launched into a game area. The gaming machine described in each item.

  According to the inventions of 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) a launch device that is operable by a player and fires a game ball toward a game area;
A prize ball providing means for providing a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the game area;
When the gaming ball is detected at a predetermined winning opening out of the winning opening, a main control unit that executes a lottery to determine whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player,
Based on information transmitted from the main control means, peripheral control means to determine the effect to appear, and a game machine comprising:
The main control unit has an information updating unit that can update the information on the given game ball in any of the following ways:
A first state in which the information relating to the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated or decreased, and a second state in which the information relating to the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated in any way. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the provided game balls is updated to an increase compared to the first state is suppressed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the state has shifted from the first state to the second state.

(23B) The information on the game value is a base,
The main control means includes:
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire many game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
Calculating the base by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect by setting a timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means includes:
At a predetermined time, at a timing of each of a predetermined number of prize balls or a predetermined number of consumed balls, write information about the game ball in the storage area,
The information on the game ball written in the storage area is compared with the information on the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing to determine increase or decrease of the information on the game ball,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase or decrease.

  According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, even if the variable display game is interrupted for a long time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(24A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the granted game value;
Prize ball number acquiring means for acquiring the number of prize balls acquired by the player at a predetermined timing;
Consuming ball detecting means for detecting a consuming ball consumed by the player,
The control means includes:
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumption ball by the consumption ball number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of award balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected consumption ball number are repeated within the same repetition. , And
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the information on the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes:
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire many game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
Counting the total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state in the same repetition,
The game according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the information on the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

  According to the invention of 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the granted game value;
Out-opening detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through an out-opening provided at a lower portion of the game area,
A winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening,
The control means includes:
A normal game state, and a game state control means for controlling the game state to any one of at least a special game state in which the player can acquire a greater game value than the normal game state,
Count the number of game balls that passed through the out port from the output of the out port detection means,
Counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detecting means,
By the sum of the counted number of game balls passed through the out mouth and the number of winning balls, the number of consumed balls consumed by the player is counted,
At a predetermined timing, the information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , A gaming machine according to the preceding items.

(25B) A gaming machine for giving a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the granted game value;
Detecting means for counting the number of game balls launched in the game area,
The control means includes:
A normal game state, and a game state control means for controlling the game state to any one of at least a special game state in which the player can acquire a greater game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, counting the number of game balls consumed by the player,
At a predetermined timing, the information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , A gaming machine according to the preceding items.

(25C) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the granted game value;
Detecting means for counting the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine,
The control means includes:
A normal game state, and a game state control means for controlling the game state to any one of at least a special game state in which the player can acquire a greater game value than the normal game state,
Counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means, counting the number of balls consumed by the player,
At a predetermined timing, the information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state. , A gaming machine according to the preceding items.

  According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the processing relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be executed accurately.

(26A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information related to the granted game value,
The control means includes:
A normal game state, and a game state control means for controlling the game state to any one of at least a special game state in which a player can acquire a greater game value than the normal game state;
Prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize port that can be won,
Having a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information on the game value using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information on the game value is a base,
Excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area is awarded to a winning opening that is capable of winning, counting the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state,
Excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area, counting the number of consumed balls in the normal game state,
The control means calculates information on the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of consumed balls in the normal game state, wherein the information on the game value is calculated. Gaming machine.

  (26C) The control unit detects the passage of the game ball of the gate provided on the right side of the game area or the winning in the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area for a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the gaming machine is excluded from counting the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

  (26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to one of a lapse of a predetermined time since the last detection, a time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, and a time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein

  (26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls is counted.

  According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
First data setting means for setting first data according to a game result;
Second data setting means for setting second data not depending on the result of the game;
Third data setting means for setting third data according to a result of the game;
First conversion means for obtaining first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means;
Second conversion means for obtaining second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means;
Display means for displaying the second converted data without displaying the first converted data.

  (27B) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means does not display the second converted data when the second converted data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

  (27C) The first conversion unit is a multiplication unit, and obtains first conversion data by multiplying the first data and the second data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in the preceding sections.

  (27D) The second conversion unit is a division unit, and divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain second conversion data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , A gaming machine according to the preceding items.

(27E) The first data is a game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player,
The third data is a game value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out balls),
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain, as second conversion data, information on a given game value,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the display displays information (for example, a base) related to a game value obtained by the second conversion means.

  According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, a base value required for evaluation of a gaming machine can be accurately displayed in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), it is possible to accurately display information (for example, a base value) relating to the game value in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a periodic process for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the granted game value;
Conversion means for calculating information about the game value,
The control means includes:
Passing an argument to the conversion unit at a predetermined timing, and acquiring a result converted based on the argument by the conversion unit from the conversion unit,
A gaming machine, wherein a process of passing the argument and a process of acquiring a result of the conversion can be executed within one regular process.

(28B) The converting means includes:
An arithmetic circuit that performs a division operation,
A divisor register to which the divisor is input, a dividend register to which the dividend is input, and a result register for outputting a quotient of the division operation;
The control means includes:
Writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register,
After a predetermined time has elapsed from the writing of the argument, the quotient is read from the result register,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized in that a process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) a prize game medium counting means for counting game media given to the player in a predetermined game state;
In the predetermined game state, the game device has a consumed game medium number counting means for counting game media consumed by the player,
The control means includes:
Writing a value obtained by multiplying the number of award game media counted by the award game medium number counting means by 100 to the dividend register,
Writing the number of consumed game media counted by the consumed game medium number counting means to the divisor register,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a base value is read from the result register.

  According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the result of the conversion from the conversion circuit are performed within one repetition process (timer interrupt process), control complexity can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
A winning opening where game balls can be won,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Display means for displaying information about the granted game value;
Consumption ball counting means for counting the consumption balls consumed by the player;
Prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls given to the player,
At least one of the winning ports is a specific winning port that can be switched between an open state where a game ball can easily win and a closed state where a winning is difficult,
The control means includes:
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means,
If a winning in the specific winning opening is detected even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and if the determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the abnormal winning is determined. A game machine that updates information on game value to be displayed on the display means by excluding from the number of consumed balls.

(29B) at least one of the winning ports is a starting winning port which is a trigger for deriving a special game state for facilitating the acquisition of a large number of game balls;
The control means, when a winning in the starting winning opening is detected in a state where the starting winning opening is closed, determines that the winning is abnormal, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized by updating information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means.

(29C) At least one of the winning ports is a special winning port opened in a special game state,
The control means, when the winning in the special winning opening is detected in the closed state of the special winning opening, determines that the winning is abnormal, excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of balls consumed. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized by updating information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means.

(29D) having a consumption sphere detecting means for detecting a consumption sphere consumed by the player,
Wherein the consumed ball counting means subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning prize from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed ball number detecting means, and counts the number of consumed balls consumed by the player. A gaming machine according to the item.

(29E) The control means stores a total number of consumed balls used for calculating information on the game value,
The consuming ball counting means adds the consuming ball number detected by the consuming ball number detecting means to the total number of consuming balls, subtracts the number of prize balls related to the winning prize from the total number of consuming balls, and calculates the consuming balls. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein counting is performed.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of consumed balls used for calculating the information on the game value,
The consumed ball counting means counts the consumed balls by adding a value obtained by subtracting the consumed ball number related to the winning abnormality from the consumed ball number detected by the consumed ball number detecting means to the total consumed ball number. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, which is characterized by the following.

(29G) The winning opening is switchable between an open state where the winning of the game ball is easy and a closed state where the winning is difficult,
When the winning in the winning opening is detected in the closed state and the prize ball is not paid out in connection with the winning, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and determines the number of winning balls related to the winning. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, characterized in that information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means is updated, excluding from the number of consumed balls.

  (29H) If the winning abnormality in the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls and displays the number on the display means. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, characterized in that information on a gaming value for updating is updated.

  According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, it is possible to accurately display real-time information (for example, a base value) on the game value by excluding the number of winning balls related to winning abnormalities from the number of out balls.

(30) A gaming machine for providing a game medium to a player as a prize,
A gaming area in which a plurality of winning openings are arranged,
A prize awarding means for, when a game medium is detected at each of the winning ports, giving a predetermined specific prize out of a plurality of prizes;
Arithmetic processing means for performing predetermined arithmetic processing using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media provided as a prize provided by the prize providing means;
Processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means,
Display means for displaying the result of the arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device,
When a specific prize of the plurality of prizes occurs in a game, the prize awarding means awards the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Gaming machine.

  According to the thirtieth invention, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, a prize (for example, a prize ball paid out when a prize is awarded to a prize port to which a high-value prize is awarded (a general prize port or a grand prize port with a large number of prize balls)) with the occurrence of a specific prize is generated. Even if provided, the result of the arithmetic processing (the calculated base value) can be displayed so as not to change, and it is easy to determine whether or not the gaming machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, according to a set payout rate). it can.

(31A) A game comprising: a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding a winning when a specific condition is satisfied; and a peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. Machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
Information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means,
A first information output unit that outputs at least a part of the information stored in the information storage unit to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine wherein the status history of the gaming machine can be grasped.

(31B) Even if it is not a special gaming state, a general winning opening in which a game ball launched in the gaming area can win,
The signal transmitted from the main control unit to the peripheral control unit includes a signal indicating a winning in the general winning opening,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the first information output means outputs information relating to winning in the general winning opening when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to an external terminal board when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
An information storage unit configured to store more detailed information than information output toward the external terminal board when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, further comprising: an information presenting means for presenting information stored by the information storing means.

(31D) first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
Storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
The game according to any one of the preceding claims, further comprising: limited initialization means for not initializing a part of the information stored in the storage means even when the information is initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
Second initialization means for initializing the storage content of the information storage means,
The information storage means can retain the stored content even when the power of the gaming machine is turned off,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the first initialization means initializes the storage content of the temporary storage means without initializing the storage content of the information storage means.

  (31F) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means stores a type of a signal received from the main control means and a time at which the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal relating to a counting event counted according to the progress of the game, and a signal relating to a state change event which triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including
The peripheral control means includes:
Temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means,
Information storage means updated by information stored in the temporary storage means,
First information output means for outputting at least a part of information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The peripheral control means includes:
Counting the counting event based on the signal received from the main control means, storing the counting result in the temporary storage means,
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control unit, the state change event is stored in the information storage unit, and the count result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage unit is stored in the information storage unit. The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein:

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores a counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
Count the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, and store it in the temporary storage means,
When the signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control unit, the type of the signal relating to the state change event and the time at which the signal is received are stored in the information storage unit, and the count event stored in the temporary storage unit is stored. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the counting result of the counting event is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine, and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine,
The information storage means stores a counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
Count the signal related to the counting event received from the main control means, and store it in the temporary storage means,
When receiving a signal related to the state change event from the main control unit, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage unit is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage unit. A gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph.

  According to the inventions from 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the payouts have changed. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, information on a game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine for giving a prize gaming medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing periodic processing relating to the progress of the game,
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
A prize game medium counting means for counting a prize game medium to be given to a player;
Using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media, calculating means for calculating information on the provided game value,
A first light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a symbol change display;
A second light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements for displaying information on the provided game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected in common, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. And having
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. And having
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means,
The control unit outputs a selection signal to the first terminal and the third terminal at a common timing, but at least one of the first light emitting element groups during the period of outputting the selection signal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals to light one light emitting element, and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals to light at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group. Is output at different timings to control the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group within one periodical processing.

  According to the thirty-second aspect, a circuit for displaying information (for example, a base value and an accessory ratio) on the provided game value can be simply configured, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine for giving a prize gaming medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing periodic processing relating to the progress of the game,
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
A prize game medium counting means for counting a prize game medium to be given to a player;
Using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media, calculating means for calculating information on the provided game value,
A first light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a symbol change display;
A second light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements for displaying information on the provided game value,
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected in common, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. And having
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. And having
A selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group, and at least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponding to the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group corresponding to the signal output in the same periodic processing, A process of outputting a selection signal output to one terminal and a signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and a process of outputting a selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal Outputting a signal output to a corresponding one of the plurality of fourth terminals That process and, depending on different processing of the same periodical in the process, game machine and outputs a signal at different timings in the periodic processing.

  According to the thirty-third invention, it is possible to simply configure a circuit for displaying information relating to a given game value. For this reason, information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine for giving a prize gaming medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
A prize game medium counting means for counting a prize game medium to be given to a player;
Using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media, calculating means for calculating information on the provided game value,
Calculation result display means for displaying information about the game value calculated by the calculation means,
The control means includes:
A control device for executing processing for game control,
Timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) for determining an operation timing of the control device;
Controlled by the control device, at least, output drive means for outputting a control signal for displaying in the calculation result display means,
On the board on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction as viewed from the control device, and the output driving means and the calculation result display means are arranged in another direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged apart from timing means.

  (34B) The connection line between the control device and the timing means and the connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to cross each other. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing unit includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal input to the control device, and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal input to the control device,
On a printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction as the oscillation circuit from the processor, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein

  According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress interference between a signal related to game control and a signal for displaying information related to the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the influence on the game control and quickly and accurately display information on the game value.

(35A) A gaming machine for giving a prize gaming medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
A prize game medium counting means for counting a prize game medium to be given to a player;
Using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media, calculating means for calculating information on the provided game value,
Display means for controlling the control means and displaying information related to the game value,
The control means includes:
A control device for executing processing for game control,
The control device accesses at the time of execution of the processing, and has at least a memory for storing information related to the game value,
The gaming machine is provided with input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means includes:
At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal, and when it is determined that the data is abnormal, first initialization means for initializing a predetermined first area of the memory ,
When power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the input means is operated, and when it is determined that the input means is operated, a second initialization means for initializing a predetermined second area of the memory Have
The first area initialized by the first initializing means and the second area initialized by the second initializing means correspond to the second initializing state by the first initializing means. Including the duplicated area that is also initialized by the
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region,
The gaming machine, wherein the information on the gaming value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) In the first area, data used for calculating information on the game value is stored,
In the second area, data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored,
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculating the information on the game value is stored,
In the second area, data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored,
The control means includes:
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

  (35D) The control unit determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time a periodic process repeatedly executed at a predetermined time interval is performed. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  (35E) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the control unit determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the game value is calculated. .

  (35F) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the control unit determines whether data stored in the first area is abnormal when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  According to the invention of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control a memory for storing information (base value and accessory ratio) related to a given game value. For this reason, information on the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine for giving a prize gaming medium as a gaming value to a player,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player;
A prize game medium counting means for counting a prize game medium to be given to a player;
Using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media, calculating means for calculating information on the provided game value,
Display means for displaying information about the game value,
An electric accessory actuated by the control means,
Under a specific condition, when a plurality of game media wins during the operation of the electric auditorium triggered by one hit, among the winning game media, some of the game media have the information related to the game value. A gaming machine characterized in that, although used for calculation and other game media are not used for calculating the information on the game value, any game media can be a trigger for a variable display game.

(36B) The control means includes:
When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, a variable display game is executed,
According to the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) advantageous to the player and a second gaming state (normal state) having a lower advantage than the first gaming state And control to either
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate information related to the game value, and the first game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the gaming medium that has won in the state is not used for calculating the information on the gaming value, but any gaming medium can be a trigger of a variable display game.

(36C) The control means includes:
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines,
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media that wins in a state where a predetermined type of the error is detected are used for calculating information on the game value. However, although a predetermined type of game medium that has been won in a state where the error has not been detected is used for calculating the information on the game value, any game medium can be a trigger for a variable display game. A gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph.

  According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, the use of the game medium for calculating the information on the game value is switched according to the state of the gaming machine, so that the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine including an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
When the main body frame is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame, compared to when the main body frame is in the open state with respect to the outer frame, the setting change operation that makes the operation of the setting change operation unit difficult is difficult. A gaming machine characterized by having a converting means.

(37B) an outer frame, a main body frame which is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided; And a setting state display unit to display,
A gaming machine, comprising: a visibility-improving unit that makes it difficult to visually recognize contents displayed by the setting state display unit when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and on which a game board is provided, and a setting determining operation unit that performs a setting determining operation for determining a setting state related to the game. Gaming machine
A game machine comprising: a decision making means for making it difficult to operate the setting decision operation section when the main body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine including an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted,
When the main body frame is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame, it is configured to prevent insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion portion by a specific portion of the outer frame. A gaming machine.

  According to the inventions of 37A to 37D, it is difficult for an illegal actor to change an unauthorized setting state, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved.

(37E) A gaming machine which displays a symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition and provides a predetermined gaming profit when a winning result is derived as a symbol variation display result,
Fluctuating time determining means for determining the fluctuating time of the symbol,
A setting information determining unit that determines predetermined setting information relating to the game to one of a plurality of settings based on an operation on the specific operation unit,
A gaming machine, wherein the variation time determining means is capable of determining a specific variation time when the setting information is determined to be specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine for performing a variable display of a symbol based on the establishment of a start condition and providing a predetermined gaming profit when a winning result is derived as a variable display result of the symbol,
Fluctuating time determining means for determining the fluctuating time of the symbol,
Based on an operation on the specific operation unit, comprising a probability determination unit that determines the probability that the hit result is derived to any of a plurality of probabilities,
The gaming machine, wherein the variation time determining means is capable of determining a specific variation time when a probability determined based on an operation on the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that performs a symbol display based on establishment of a start condition and provides a predetermined game profit when a winning result is derived as a symbol display result.
Fluctuating time determining means for determining the fluctuating time of the symbol,
A setting information determining unit that determines predetermined setting information relating to the game to one of a plurality of settings based on an operation on the specific operation unit,
The variation time determination unit may determine a common variation time regardless of the setting information, and may determine a different variation time according to the setting information,
A gaming machine, wherein a probability that a different fluctuating time is determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common fluctuating time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine which displays a symbol based on the establishment of a start condition and provides a predetermined game profit when a winning result is derived as a symbol variable display result,
Fluctuating time determining means for determining the fluctuating time of the symbol,
Based on an operation on the specific operation unit, a setting information determining unit that determines predetermined setting information related to the game to one of a plurality of settings,
Effect control unit for performing a predetermined effect,
The variation time determining means can determine a different variation time according to the setting information,
The effect control unit, when a specific fluctuation time is determined by the fluctuation time determining means in response to the specific setting information of the setting information, within the specific fluctuation time, the fluctuation display of the symbol A gaming machine characterized by sequentially performing a result suggestion effect indicating a result and a setting suggestion effect indicating a content of the setting information determined by the setting information determining unit.

  According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player aware of the setting state in a new mode, and to improve the entertainment of the game.

(37I) a main control board provided with a game control unit for performing control relating to a game; a separate control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit; A setting-related operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game performed by the unit,
The game control unit has a setting change allowable state generating unit that allows an operation related to the change of the setting state with respect to the setting related operation unit,
A gaming machine, wherein, when the information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information, the setting change allowing state generating means allows an operation related to the change of the setting state. .

  According to the invention of 37I, it is difficult for an illegal actor to change an illegal setting state, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved.

(37J) A game control unit for controlling a game, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state for the control performed by the game control unit, and a game area is operated by a player operating a predetermined firing operation unit. A gaming machine that gives a gaming profit by having a game ball fired toward a predetermined winning opening,
When the setting change operation section is operated to change the setting state, the apparatus further includes a firing disabling means for disabling the firing of the game ball by the operation of the firing operation section for a predetermined period. Gaming machine.

  According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine comprising: a game control unit for performing control relating to a game; and a setting operation unit for changing settings relating to control performed by the game control unit,
A gaming machine, wherein a game control board constituting the game control section and a setting board constituting the setting operation section are accommodated in one case.

  (38B) The case described above, wherein the case is capable of accommodating, together with the game control unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing a setting, instead of the setting operation unit. Gaming machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit includes:
A first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed;
A second operation unit for finalizing the setting and terminating the setting state;
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising: a setting display for displaying setting contents.

  (38D) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display.

  According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of the gaming machine having the setting function and the gaming machine having no setting function are shared, and the design and production can be efficiently performed.

(39A) a game controller having a processor for executing a program for performing control related to a game, and a memory accessed by the processor;
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory;
A setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed,
The game control unit,
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected,
A gaming machine, wherein the setting state is started when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated.

  (39B) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes a first area of the memory after the end of the setting state.

  (39C) The game control unit, when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, in the second area at least partially different from the first area, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the memory is initialized.

  According to the invention of 39A to 39C, erroneous operation of setting change can be prevented.

(40A) A gaming machine comprising: a game control unit for performing control relating to a game; and a setting operation unit for changing settings relating to control performed by the game control unit,
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information on the provided game value,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and setting display means for displaying the content of the setting,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control unit displays the game value display means and the setting display means in the setting state so as not to be confused.

  (40B) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

  (40C) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are constituted by one display.

(40D) The game value display means displays information on the provided game value on the display without delay as the game progresses,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information on the setting on the display in the setting state, instead of the information on the provided game value.

  (40E) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are configured by different displays.

(40F) The game value display means includes:
In the other than the setting state, the information about the granted game value is displayed without delay according to the progress of the game,
In the setting state, a character, a number, or a figure that is not displayed in the setting state is displayed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means includes:
In the other than the setting state, the information about the granted game value is displayed without delay according to the progress of the game,
In the setting state, the lights are turned off or turned on entirely,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

  According to the inventions of 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate from being confused.

(41A) Lottery means for performing a lottery regarding a hit based on the game medium passing through the starting port;
Effect determination means for determining any effect from a plurality of effects based on the result of the lottery,
Effect performing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means,
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information relating to the game to one of a plurality of pieces,
When an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed, the setting information determining unit that displays the setting information determined by the setting information determining unit on a predetermined display unit,
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining unit,
A gaming machine, characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect even when the different operation is performed when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed by the effect determining means.

(41B) Lottery means for performing a lottery regarding a hit based on the game medium passing through the starting port;
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, setting information determining means for determining predetermined setting information relating to the game to one of a plurality of pieces,
Effect determination means for determining any effect from a plurality of effects based on the result of the lottery,
Effect performing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means,
An error detecting means for detecting an error,
Error notification means for notifying the error detected by the error detection means,
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion effect during a period when the error notifying means notifies an error satisfying a predetermined condition.

(41C) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a start condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determining means to determine whether it is a hit,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition,
If the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding unit that stores and holds the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Setting information determining means for determining, based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, predetermined setting information relating to a game to one of a plurality of setting information;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
If the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change in which it is determined that the expectation suggestion effect is to be executed or during the suspension of the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol change, the newly established condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that limits the execution of the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol change corresponding to the set starting condition.

(41D) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a start condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determining means to determine whether it is a hit,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition,
If the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding unit that stores and holds the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Setting information determining means for determining, based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, predetermined setting information relating to a game to one of a plurality of setting information;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
If the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change in which it is determined that the expectation suggestion effect is to be executed, or during the suspension of the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol change, the newly established condition is satisfied. A gaming machine capable of executing the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol change corresponding to the starting condition.

(41E) Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of the starting condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determining means to determine whether it is a hit,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition,
If the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding unit that stores and holds the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Setting information determining means for determining, based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, predetermined setting information relating to a game to one of a plurality of setting information;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the start condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol change is suspended. A gaming machine that limits execution of the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol change corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

(41F) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a start condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determining means to determine whether it is a hit,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition,
If the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding unit that stores and holds the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Setting information determining means for determining, based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, predetermined setting information relating to a game to one of a plurality of setting information;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the start condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol change is suspended. A gaming machine for limiting execution of the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol change corresponding to the newly established start condition.

(41G) lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a start condition;
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, determining means to determine whether it is a hit,
Special symbol variation executing means for executing a special symbol variation based on establishment of a start condition,
If the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding unit that stores and holds the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
Setting information determining means for determining, based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit, predetermined setting information relating to a game to one of a plurality of setting information;
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expected suggestion effect for the determination result by the determination unit, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit,
When the starting condition is newly established during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol change is suspended. A gaming machine capable of executing the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol change corresponding to the newly established starting condition.

  According to the inventions of 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(42A) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Calculating means for performing required calculation processing according to the first program and the second program;
A first storage unit having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
The first storage means and the second storage means are switched between accessible and unaccessible so that either one can be accessed,
The calculating means includes:
Using the first storage means when executing the first program,
A gaming machine using the second storage means when executing the second program.

  (42B) A gaming machine wherein access to the first storage means and the second storage means is switched by a single command input to the arithmetic means.

  (42C) The instruction for switching the first storage unit to be accessible and the instruction for switching the second storage unit to be accessible are different in at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand). Gaming machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in the game control area) for performing a winning lottery in a game,
The second program is a program for calculating information relating to a game value given in a game (outside the game control area), and is called and executed by the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Calculating means for performing required calculation processing according to the first program and the second program;
A first storage unit having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
The first storage means and the second storage means are switched between accessible and unaccessible so that either one can be accessed,
The calculating means includes:
When executing the first program, use the first storage means,
At the start of the second program, in the second program, access to the first storage device is disabled, and access to the second storage device is switched,
A gaming machine wherein the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

  (42F) The gaming machine, wherein at the end of the second program, the arithmetic unit switches the second program so that the second storage unit cannot be accessed and the first storage unit can be accessed.

(42G) A gaming machine including main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to a player based on a result of a winning lottery in a game,
The main control means includes:
Program storage means for storing the first program and the second program;
Calculating means for performing required calculation processing according to the first program and the second program;
A first storage unit having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing;
A second storage unit having a storage area having the same configuration as the first storage unit,
The first storage means and the second storage means are switched between accessible and unaccessible so that either one can be accessed,
The calculating means includes:
When executing the first program, use the first storage means,
When starting the second program, in the first program, access to the first storage unit is switched to inaccessible, and access to the second storage unit is switched.
A gaming machine wherein the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

  (42H) The arithmetic unit switches, after the end of the second program, to disable access to the second storage unit and enable access to the first storage unit in the first program restored from the second program. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the inventions of 42A to 42H, when transferring processing between programs, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction, and precautions when creating a program can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine for giving a gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling an effect in a game based on an instruction from the main control means;
A display device on which an effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means,
A display panel for displaying a rendering pattern,
A light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the sides of the display panel,
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflection units that reflect light traveling on a specific path in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine, and a light traveling on the display panel along a plurality of paths. A plurality of second reflecting portions reflecting on the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflector, a dynamic pattern is displayed on the display panel,
A gaming machine, wherein a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting portion.

(43B) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to sides of the display panel,
The peripheral control means changes the emission colors of the plurality of light-emitting elements as time passes, so that light of different colors travels along different paths in the display panel, and the plurality of first reflection The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein a color of a picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed over time by emitting light of different colors from the portion.

(43C) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to a side of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control unit switches on / off of the plurality of light emitting elements as time passes, controls a light path in the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflection units. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed in accordance with the passage of time.

(43D) The light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light to a side of the display panel from a plurality of positions,
The peripheral control means switches the number of light-emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light-emitting elements as time passes, controls a light path in the display panel, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the color of the picture projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed over time by emitting light from at least a part thereof.

  According to the inventions of 43A to 43D, a moving pattern and a stationary pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

(44A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling an effect in a game based on an instruction from the main control means;
A display device on which an effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means,
A display panel for displaying a rendering pattern,
A light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the sides of the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflection units that reflect light traveling on a specific path in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine, and a light traveling on the display panel along a plurality of paths. A plurality of second reflecting portions reflecting on the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflector includes a plurality of first right-eye reflectors that reflect light traveling along a specific path in the display panel in a direction reaching the right eye of the player, and a left eye of the player. And a plurality of first left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction to reach
The plurality of first right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of first left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from the right-eye pattern.
The peripheral control means includes:
The right-eye pattern and the left-eye pattern are caused by causing the light-emitting device to emit light so that light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first right-eye reflection section and the first left-eye reflection section. Is displayed on the display panel to allow the player to recognize a three-dimensional pattern in which parallax between the left and right eyes occurs,
A gaming machine, characterized in that a light from the light emitting device is reflected by the second reflecting portion, so that a flat pattern with no parallax between left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel.

  (44B) The second reflector is a front surface side of the gaming machine that causes light traveling in the display panel through a plurality of routes to reach a right eye and a left eye of a player. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by being reflected on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflection unit includes a plurality of second right-eye reflection units that reflect light traveling along a specific path in the display panel in a direction reaching the right eye of the player, Including a plurality of second left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction to reach the left eye,
The plurality of second right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of second left-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by light reflected by the second reflection portion.

  According to the inventions of 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed with one light guide plate, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

(45A) A gaming machine for providing a gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling an effect in a game based on an instruction from the main control means;
A display device on which an effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means,
A display panel for displaying a rendering pattern,
A light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the sides of the display panel;
The peripheral control means includes:
A dynamic pattern and a static pattern can be displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light,
A gaming machine characterized by performing an effect indicating the result of the winning lottery by combining the display of the dynamic pattern and the display of the static pattern.

(45B) The display panel includes a plurality of first reflectors that reflect light traveling in a specific path in the display panel and emit the light to the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. A plurality of second reflectors that reflect the traveling light and emit to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling in the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, so that the changing pattern is displayed on the display panel. To display,
By reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflection unit, a stationary pattern is displayed on the display panel,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, characterized by performing an effect indicating the result of the winning lottery by combining the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern.

  According to the inventions from 45A to 45B, a moving pattern and a stationary pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

(46A) A gaming machine for giving a gaming value to a player,
Main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling an effect in a game based on an instruction from the main control means;
A display device that displays the effect image under the control of the peripheral control means,
A display panel for displaying a rendering pattern,
A light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the sides of the display panel;
The display panel has a plurality of reflectors for reflecting light traveling in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means includes:
By causing the light emitting device to emit light, a target picture is displayed on the display panel,
A gaming machine, wherein an image moving toward the target picture is displayed on the display device.

  (46B) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the pattern displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or character.

  (46C) The game according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device after displaying the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

  (46D) The game according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means displays the target pattern on the display panel after displaying an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device. Machine.

  According to the inventions of 46A to 46D, a plurality of patterns and patterns in different modes can be displayed with one light guide plate, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

(47A) a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
A setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means, and
The game control means,
A power-on process that is performed when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a periodic process that is performed at predetermined intervals are executed,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, in the power-on processing, a setting change that can change the set value according to an operation state of the setting operation unit. Executing a setting corresponding to a state or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed,
After executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute the processing corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the periodic processing. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  (47B) The periodic process is common to at least two of the plurality of processes, the process related to the change of the set value, the process related to the confirmation of the set value, and the process related to a normal game. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising:

(47C) The regular process is configured by at least a first repetitive process for executing a process related to the normal game, and a second repetitive process for executing a process related to a change in the setting,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the game control means selectively executes the first repetition process and the second repetition process depending on an operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording an operation state of the gaming machine in an area where stored contents are backed up when power is turned off,
The game control means,
In the setting change mode, as the predetermined condition, to the effect that the setting change mode is set in the setting state management area,
A gaming machine, wherein in the setting confirmation mode, the setting condition management area is set to indicate that the mode is the setting confirmation mode as the predetermined condition.

(48) a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
A setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means, and
The game control means,
A power-on process that is performed when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a periodic process that is performed at predetermined intervals are executed,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, in the power-on processing, a setting change that can change the set value according to an operation state of the setting operation unit. Executing a setting corresponding to a state or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed,
The regular process is capable of executing a normal game process related to a normal game and a setting process related to setting change or setting confirmation,
The gaming machine, wherein the normal game process is configured by a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be commonly executed by the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means,
A storage unit capable of storing information related to the game,
In a power-on process performed when power is supplied to the gaming machine, an output signal of the setting operation unit is stored and held in a specific storage unit of the storage unit,
In the power-on process, when determining whether or not the setting operation unit is operated, the determination is performed based on information stored in the specific storage unit without reading an output signal of the setting operation unit. And
In the power-on process, the second setting operation means is configured to store the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated. Means for initializing
In the power-on process, when initializing the storage unit when the first setting operation unit is not operated and only the second setting operation unit is operated, the specific setting A gaming machine characterized in that storage means is not initialized.

(49B) comprising peripheral control means for controlling an effect on the display device,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode for activating the gaming machine based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is activated.

(50A) a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting operation means includes at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means,
The game control means,
Storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to the game, and a second storage area different from the first storage area;
The first storage area is an area for storing the setting value,
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used in the game,
The game control means,
When it is determined that the set value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized,
When it is determined that the first setting operation unit of the setting operation unit is not operated and the second setting operation unit is operated, the first storage area is not initialized. And a game machine for initializing the second storage area.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area,
Wherein the game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. The described gaming machine.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than an area for storing various parameters used in a normal game,
When the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power failure occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and determines the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the storage area is initialized.

(51A) a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means,
Equipped with a storage means capable of holding information related to the game even when the power is turned off,
A power-on process that is performed when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a periodic process that is performed at predetermined intervals are executed,
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, in the power-on processing, a setting change that can change the set value according to an operation state of the setting operation unit. Executing a setting corresponding to a state or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed,
In the power-on process, at least in the power-on processing, the storage means stores a setting state management area in which a value set in accordance with the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored according to an operation state of the setting operation means. A gaming machine characterized by including.

(51B) setting operation means operated to start in a setting change mode for changing a setting value relating to control performed by the game control means,
The game control means,
When an operation for starting the gaming machine in the setting change mode is performed in a state where the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area, and When a predetermined area is initialized and an operation for ending the setting change mode is performed by the setting operation means, a normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and a game is performed in a normal game state in which a game ball can be fired. Start the machine,
When an operation for starting the gaming machine in the setting confirmation mode is performed in a state where the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein even when an operation of ending the setting confirmation mode is performed by a setting operation unit, a normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area.

(52) a game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Setting operation means operated to change or confirm a setting value related to control performed by the game control means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game control means,
A power-on process executed when power is supplied to the gaming machine, a first periodic process executed every predetermined first cycle, and a second periodic process executed every predetermined second cycle Possible,
In the power-on process, it is determined whether or not an operation associated with a setting operation is performed in the setting operation unit,
If it is determined that an operation associated with the setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means, a setting change state in which the set value can be changed or a setting check state in which the set value cannot be changed, according to the operation state Execute the settings corresponding to
When it is determined that an operation associated with the setting operation is not performed in the setting operation unit, setting corresponding to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. No, the normal game start process can be executed,
The first periodic process is executed after executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the power-on processing,
The gaming machine, wherein the second regular process is executed in the power-on process after enabling a normal game start process.

(53A) game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
A gaming machine capable of mounting an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of the gaming machine,
The test signal generation circuit,
A second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
An inspection connector that outputs the generated inspection signal,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The gaming machine, wherein the second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal.

(53B) the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit include an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal;
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

  (53C) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

  (53D) The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface mount component. .

(53E) a game control means for executing a periodic process at a predetermined cycle to control the progress of the game;
A first detection unit that detects an event captured by the game control unit in the periodic processing among events related to the progress of the game,
A game machine comprising: a second detection unit that detects an event captured by the game control unit in a process other than the periodic process, among events related to the progress of the game,
The game control means,
Converting means for converting a signal from the first detecting means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input,
A general-purpose input port to which a signal of the first detection unit or the second detection unit is individually input,
The signal of the first detection unit is input to the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion unit,
A gaming machine wherein the signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball fired toward a game area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value relating to control performed by the game control means.

(53G) an accessory driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The serial input port is a serial input / output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal,
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input / output port,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) a game control means for executing a periodic process at a predetermined cycle to control the progress of the game;
A gaming machine comprising: first detection means and second detection means for detecting an event relating to the progress of the game,
The game control means,
Converting means for converting a signal from the first detecting means into a serial signal;
A serial input port to which a serial signal is input,
A general-purpose input port to which a signal of the first detection unit or the second detection unit is individually input,
The first detecting means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal once in one periodical processing,
The second detection means determines a signal level based on a result of detecting a signal a plurality of times in one periodical processing,
The signal of the first detection unit is input to the general-purpose input port or to the serial input port via the conversion unit,
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control means detects a signal of the second detection means a plurality of times in one periodical processing to determine a signal level.

(53I) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball fired toward a game area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the second detection means is a setting operation means operated to change or confirm a set value relating to control performed by the game control means.

(53J) game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory,
The game control means is mounted on a first printed circuit board,
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. Yes,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line for transmitting a serial signal obtained by converting a signal repeated at the predetermined cycle from the first printed circuit board side. Gaming machine.

(53K) An inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of the gaming machine can be mounted,
The test signal generation circuit,
A second driver circuit that receives the same control signal as the first driver circuit and generates a test signal from the control signal;
An inspection connector that outputs the generated inspection signal,
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board. Gaming machine.

  (53L) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the first printed board and the second printed board are housed in one board box.

(53M) the first printed board and the second printed board are housed in different board boxes,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit each include an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal;
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit receive different voltages and independently generate signals of different voltages that change at the same timing.

1 Pachinko machines (game machines)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Payout control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 arithmetic circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1317 Character ratio display (base display)
1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First starting port 2004 Second starting port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol variation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 effect control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I / O area 5400 parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

Game control means for performing a lottery of a special game that is beneficial to the player with the satisfaction of the predetermined condition;
A setting operation means operated to change a setting value related to control performed by the game control means, and
The game control means,
Computing means for executing a program, storing means capable of storing information relating to a game, and reset generating means for generating a reset in the computing means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A power-on process is performed when the power is turned on, and
In a normal game state, when a reset is generated by the reset generation unit, a normal game can be executed after initializing the storage unit based on execution of a setting process operable by the setting operation unit. On the other hand, when a reset is generated by the reset generation unit at a predetermined timing of the power-on processing, a normal game can be executed without initializing the storage unit. Gaming machine.